Brother MFC-L6910DN Manual
Brother
Faxmaskine
MFC-L6910DN
Læs gratis den danske manual til Brother MFC-L6910DN (672 sider) i kategorien Faxmaskine. Denne vejledning er vurderet som hjælpsom af 19 personer og har en gennemsnitlig bedømmelse på 4.5 stjerner ud af 10 anmeldelser. Har du et spørgsmål om Brother MFC-L6910DN, eller vil du spørge andre brugere om produktet?
Side 1/672
Online User's Guide
DCP-L5510DW
MFC-L5710DN
MFC-L5710DW
MFC-L5715DN
MFC-L6710DW
MFC-L6910DN
MFC-L6915DN
MFC-EX910
© 2023 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
Before You Use Your Machine ............................................................................................................. 1
Definitions of Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Trademarks .................................................................................................................................................... 3
Open Source Licensing.................................................................................................................................. 4
Copyright and License ................................................................................................................................... 5
Important Notes.............................................................................................................................................. 6
Introduction to Your Machine............................................................................................................... 7
Before Using Your Machine ........................................................................................................................... 8
Control Panel Overview ................................................................................................................................. 9
How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD ....................................................................................................... 19
How to Enter Text on Your Machine............................................................................................................. 20
Set the Main Home Screen .......................................................................................................................... 22
Customisation of Your Machine ................................................................................................................... 23
Access Brother Utilities (Windows) .............................................................................................................. 24
Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows) ................................................................................... 25
Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine ............................................................................................. 26
Improve Machine Ventilation ........................................................................................................................ 27
Paper Handling.................................................................................................................................... 29
Load Paper................................................................................................................................................... 30
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 31
Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) .................................................................... 39
Paper Settings.............................................................................................................................................. 48
Change the Paper Size and Paper Type............................................................................................ 49
Select the Paper Tray For Printing ..................................................................................................... 50
Change the Check Paper Setting....................................................................................................... 51
Recommended Print Media.......................................................................................................................... 52
Load Documents .......................................................................................................................................... 53
Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) ............................................................. 54
Load Documents on the Scanner Glass............................................................................................. 56
Unscannable and Unprintable Areas ........................................................................................................... 57
Using Special Paper..................................................................................................................................... 59
Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 60
Print from Your Computer (Windows)........................................................................................................... 61
Print a Document (Windows).............................................................................................................. 62
Print Settings (Windows) .................................................................................................................... 64
Secure Print (Windows)...................................................................................................................... 68
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows) .................................................................................... 69
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language Emulation)
(Windows) .......................................................................................................................................... 71
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows) .................................................. 72
Print from Your Computer (Mac) .................................................................................................................. 73
Print Using AirPrint ............................................................................................................................. 74
Print an Email Attachment............................................................................................................................ 75
Secure Print Using a USB Flash Drive......................................................................................................... 76
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive ................................................................................................. 78
Home > Table of Contents
i
Compatible USB Flash Drives............................................................................................................ 79
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage ................. 80
Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows) ............................................................................... 82
Print Duplicate Copies.................................................................................................................................. 83
Change Print Settings Using the Control Panel ........................................................................................... 84
Cancel a Print Job........................................................................................................................................ 85
Test Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 86
Universal Print.............................................................................................................................................. 87
Universal Print Overview .................................................................................................................... 88
Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management.................................... 89
Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal.................................................................... 90
Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer ................................................................... 91
Print Using Universal Print ................................................................................................................. 92
Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print ................................................................................... 93
Scan...................................................................................................................................................... 94
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine ............................................................................................ 95
Scan Photos and Graphics................................................................................................................. 96
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File .................................................................................. 98
Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive....................................................................................... 100
Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) ................................................................................................ 102
Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment .................................................................................. 104
Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient ...................................................................................... 106
Scan to FTP ..................................................................................................................................... 108
Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) ............................................................................................................ 112
Scan to Network (Windows) ............................................................................................................. 119
Scan to SharePoint .......................................................................................................................... 125
Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) .................. 129
Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan .......................................................... 133
Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs ........................................................................................... 134
Disable Scanning from Your Computer ............................................................................................ 136
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)........................................................................................................ 137
Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)............................................................................. 138
Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other Windows Applications....................................... 139
Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan ................................................................................................ 144
Scan from Your Computer (Mac)................................................................................................................ 148
Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management......................................................................... 149
Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management................................................................ 150
Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management .................................................... 151
Copy ................................................................................................................................................... 152
Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided) .................................................................................................. 153
Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided)................................................................................................ 158
Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images ............................................................................................................ 160
Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature ................................................................................. 161
Interrupt a Print Job with a Copy Job ......................................................................................................... 163
Copy an ID Card ........................................................................................................................................ 164
Copy Options ............................................................................................................................................. 166
Fax ...................................................................................................................................................... 169
Home > Table of Contents
ii
Send a Fax................................................................................................................................................. 170
Send a Fax ....................................................................................................................................... 171
Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF.................................................................................................... 173
Send a Fax Manually........................................................................................................................ 174
Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation ........................................................................................ 175
Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) .................................................... 176
Send a Fax in Real Time .................................................................................................................. 179
Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)................................................................................ 180
Add a Cover Page to Your Fax......................................................................................................... 182
Cancel a Fax in Progress ................................................................................................................. 185
Check and Cancel a Pending Fax.................................................................................................... 186
Fax Options ...................................................................................................................................... 187
Receive a Fax ............................................................................................................................................ 189
Receive Mode Settings .................................................................................................................... 190
Memory Receive Options ................................................................................................................. 200
Remote Fax Retrieval....................................................................................................................... 210
Voice Operations and Fax Numbers .......................................................................................................... 216
Voice Operations .............................................................................................................................. 217
Store Fax Numbers .......................................................................................................................... 219
Set up Broadcasting Groups ............................................................................................................ 223
Combine Address Book Numbers ................................................................................................... 227
Telephone Services and External Devices................................................................................................. 229
Use BT Call Sign .............................................................................................................................. 230
Set the Telephone Line Type............................................................................................................ 232
External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)................................................................................... 234
External and Extension Telephones ................................................................................................. 237
Multi-line Connections (PBX) ........................................................................................................... 244
Fax Reports................................................................................................................................................ 245
Print a Transmission Verification Report .......................................................................................... 246
Print a Fax Journal ........................................................................................................................... 247
PC-FAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 248
PC-FAX for Windows........................................................................................................................ 249
PC-FAX for Mac .............................................................................................................................. 269
Network .............................................................................................................................................. 270
Supported Basic Network Features ........................................................................................................... 271
Configure Network Settings ....................................................................................................................... 272
Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel......................................................................... 273
Wireless Network Settings ......................................................................................................................... 274
Use the Wireless Network ................................................................................................................ 275
Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
............................................................................................................................. 288
Enable/Disable Wireless LAN .......................................................................................................... 292
Print the WLAN Report..................................................................................................................... 293
Network Features....................................................................................................................................... 297
Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel................................................. 298
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management ............................................ 299
Print the Network Configuration Report............................................................................................ 300
Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management .......................................................... 301
Home > Table of Contents
iii
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) .......................................................................................................... 302
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature................................................................................................ 323
Configure and Operate LDAP Search .............................................................................................. 327
Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management ..................................... 331
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) ............................................................................................ 334
Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination.......................................................................... 336
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings......................................................................... 339
Security .............................................................................................................................................. 340
Before Using Network Security Features ................................................................................................... 341
Disable Unnecessary Protocols ....................................................................................................... 342
Configure Certificates for Device Security ................................................................................................. 343
Supported Security Certificate Features .......................................................................................... 344
How to Create and Install a Certificate............................................................................................. 345
Create a Self-signed Certificate ....................................................................................................... 346
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority
(CA) .................................................................................................................................................. 347
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key ........................................................................... 351
Import and Export a CA Certificate................................................................................................... 354
Manage Multiple Certificates ............................................................................................................ 357
Use SSL/TLS ............................................................................................................................................. 358
Introduction to SSL/TLS ................................................................................................................... 359
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS............................................................... 362
Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS ...................................................................................... 366
Use SNMPv3.............................................................................................................................................. 368
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3 ............................................................... 369
Use IPsec................................................................................................................................................... 370
Introduction to IPsec......................................................................................................................... 371
Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management ............................................................................ 372
Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management ......................................... 373
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management ....................................................... 375
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network ......................................................... 383
What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication? .............................................................................................. 384
Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based
Management (Web Browser)............................................................................................................ 385
IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods............................................................................................... 387
Use Active Directory Authentication........................................................................................................... 388
Introduction to Active Directory Authentication................................................................................. 389
Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management .................................... 390
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory
Authentication) ................................................................................................................................. 392
Use LDAP Authentication........................................................................................................................... 393
Introduction to LDAP Authentication ................................................................................................ 394
Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management.................................................... 395
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP
Authentication) ................................................................................................................................. 396
Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 ................................................................................................................... 397
Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0........................................................................................... 398
Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management ............................................ 399
Home > Table of Contents
iv
Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0 ............................................................................................. 400
Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0 ...................................................................... 401
Configure Personal Home Screen Settings Using Web Based Management.................................. 402
Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features................................................................................. 403
Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel ............................................................ 404
Send or Receive an Email Securely........................................................................................................... 405
Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management......................................... 406
Send an Email with User Authentication .......................................................................................... 407
Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS ....................................................................... 408
Store Print Log to Network ......................................................................................................................... 409
Store Print Log to Network Overview ............................................................................................... 410
Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management....................... 411
Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting .......................................................... 413
Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0....................................................... 415
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel .................................................................................... 416
Setting Lock Overview...................................................................................................................... 417
Use Global Network Detection Features.................................................................................................... 422
Enable Global IP Address Detection ................................................................................................ 423
Block Communications from the Global Network ............................................................................. 424
Administrator..................................................................................................................................... 425
Network Features....................................................................................................................................... 426
Security Features ....................................................................................................................................... 427
Network Security .............................................................................................................................. 428
User Authentication .......................................................................................................................... 430
Brother Management Tools ........................................................................................................................ 431
Mobile/Web Connect......................................................................................................................... 432
Brother Web Connect................................................................................................................................. 433
Brother Web Connect Overview....................................................................................................... 434
Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect............................................................................ 436
Set Up Brother Web Connect........................................................................................................... 438
Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect............................................................. 446
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect ......................................................... 447
FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail ........................................................................................................ 449
AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 452
AirPrint Overview.............................................................................................................................. 453
Before Using AirPrint (macOS) ........................................................................................................ 454
Print Using AirPrint ........................................................................................................................... 455
Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)........................................................................................................... 458
Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)................................................................................................. 459
Mopria
™
Print Service and Mopria
™
Scan................................................................................................. 460
Brother Mobile Connect ............................................................................................................................. 461
Register an External Integrated Circuit (IC) Card Reader.......................................................................... 462
Brother iPrint&Scan.......................................................................................................................... 463
Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) ............................................................................................. 464
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 465
Error and Maintenance Messages ............................................................................................................. 466
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes.................................................................................. 472
Home > Table of Contents
v
Document Jams ......................................................................................................................................... 476
Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit ............................................................................ 477
Document is Jammed under the Document Cover .......................................................................... 478
Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF ...................................................................... 479
Paper Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 480
Clear Paper Jams............................................................................................................................. 481
Paper is Jammed in the MP tray ...................................................................................................... 482
Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 483
Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine .................................................................................. 485
Paper is Jammed inside the Machine .............................................................................................. 487
Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray............................................................................................... 489
Printing Problems....................................................................................................................................... 492
Improve the Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 495
Telephone and Fax Problems .................................................................................................................... 500
Set Dial Tone Detection.................................................................................................................... 503
Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems ............................................. 504
Network Problems...................................................................................................................................... 505
Error Messages ................................................................................................................................ 506
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) ...................................................................... 508
Check Your Machine's Network Settings.......................................................................................... 509
I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration........................................................ 510
My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network ............. 512
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly ................................................... 514
AirPrint Problems ....................................................................................................................................... 516
Other Problems .......................................................................................................................................... 517
Check the Machine Information ................................................................................................................. 519
Reset Your Machine ................................................................................................................................... 520
Reset Functions Overview ............................................................................................................... 521
Routine Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 522
Replace Supplies ....................................................................................................................................... 523
Replace the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................ 525
Replace the Drum Unit ..................................................................................................................... 528
Clean the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 531
Clean the Scanner............................................................................................................................ 533
Clean the Touchscreen LCD ............................................................................................................ 535
Clean the Corona Wire..................................................................................................................... 536
Clean the Drum Unit......................................................................................................................... 538
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers ...................................................................................................... 541
Check the Remaining Part Life .................................................................................................................. 543
Pack the Machine and the Toner Cartridge Together................................................................................. 544
Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts ......................................................................................................... 546
Machine Settings............................................................................................................................... 547
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel ..................................................................................... 548
In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage) ............................................................................. 549
General Settings............................................................................................................................... 550
Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut..................................................................................... 567
Print Reports .................................................................................................................................... 572
Home > Table of Contents
vi
Settings and Features Tables........................................................................................................... 575
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management ...................................................................... 640
What is Web Based Management?.................................................................................................. 641
Access Web Based Management .................................................................................................... 642
Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management...................................................... 644
Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management .......................................... 645
Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 646
Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 647
Supplies ..................................................................................................................................................... 656
Environmental and Compliance Information .............................................................................................. 658
Information Regarding Recycled Paper ........................................................................................... 659
Availability of Service Parts .............................................................................................................. 660
Chemical Substances (EU REACH)................................................................................................. 661
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 662
Brother Help and Customer Support.......................................................................................................... 663
Home > Table of Contents
vii
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Definitions of Notes
Definitions of Notes
We use the following symbols and conventions throughout this User's Guide:
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.
NOTE
NOTE specifies the operating environment, conditions for installation, or special
conditions of use.
Tips icons indicate helpful hints and supplementary information.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.
Fire Hazard icons alert you to the possibility of a fire.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch hot machine parts.
Prohibition icons indicate actions you must not perform.
Bold Bold style identifies buttons on the machine's control panel or computer screen.
Italics Italicised style emphasises an important point or refers you to a related topic.
Courier New
Courier New font identifies messages shown on the machine's LCD.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
2
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Trademarks
Trademarks
Apple, App Store, AirPrint, Mac, macOS, iPadOS, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Nuance and PaperPort are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates
in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe
®
, Reader
®
, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, and Wi-Fi Direct
®
are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
WPA
™
, WPA2
™
, WPA3
™
, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
Android, Google Drive and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC. Use of these trademarks is subject to
Google Permissions.
Mopria
™
and the Mopria
™
Logo are registered and/or unregistered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorised use is strictly prohibited.
EVERNOTE is a trademark of Evernote Corporation and used under a license.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Brother Industries, Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software Licence Agreement specific to its
proprietary programs.
Software Trademarks
FlashFX
®
is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX
®
Pro
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX
®
Tera
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance Nitro
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Datalight
®
is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related documents
and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
3
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Open Source Licensing
Open Source Licensing
This product includes open source software.
To view Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright Information, go to your model's Manuals page at
support.brother.com/manuals.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
4
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Copyright and License
Copyright and License
©2023 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.
This product includes software developed by the following vendors:
This product includes the “KASAGO TCP/IP” software developed by ZUKEN ELMIC, Inc.
Copyright 1989-2020 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved.
FlashFX
®
Copyright 1998-2020 Datalight, Inc.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
5
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Important Notes
Important Notes
• Check support.brother.com/downloads for Brother driver and software updates.
• To keep your machine performance up to date, check support.brother.com/downloads for the latest firmware
update. Otherwise, some of your machine's functions may not be available.
• Do not use this product outside the country of purchase as it may violate the wireless telecommunication and
power regulations of that country.
• Not all models are available in all countries.
• Before giving your machine to anyone else, replacing it, or disposing of it, we strongly recommend resetting it
to its factory settings to remove all personal information.
• Windows 10 in this document represents Windows 10 Home, Windows 10 Pro, Windows 10 Education, and
Windows 10 Enterprise.
• Windows 11 in this document represents Windows 11 Home, Windows 11 Pro, Windows 11 Education, and
Windows 11 Enterprise.
• For macOS v13 Users:
This machine supports macOS v13.
For machine setup and software installation instructions, see the Quick Setup Guide included in the carton.
All features in macOS v11 and macOS v12 are available in the macOS v13 environment and work in a similar
way.
• The screens or images in this User's Guide are for illustration purposes only and may differ from those of the
actual products.
• Unless otherwise specified, the screens in this manual are from Windows 10. Screens on your computer may
vary depending on your operating system.
• The contents of this document and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
• Not all features are available in countries subject to applicable export restrictions.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
6
Home > Introduction to Your Machine
Introduction to Your Machine
• Before Using Your Machine
• Control Panel Overview
• How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
• Set the Main Home Screen
• Customisation of Your Machine
• Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
• Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine
• Improve Machine Ventilation
7
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Before Using Your Machine
Before Using Your Machine
Before attempting any printing operation, confirm the following:
• Make sure you have installed the correct software and drivers for your machine.
• For USB or network cable users: Make sure the interface cable is physically secure.
Simultaneous printing, scanning, and faxing
Your machine can print from your computer while sending or receiving a fax into memory or while scanning a
document into the computer. Fax sending will not be stopped during printing from your computer. However, when
the machine is copying or receiving a fax on paper, it pauses the printing operation, and then continues printing
when copying or fax receiving has finished.
DCP models do not support the fax feature.
Firewall (Windows)
If your computer is protected by a firewall and you are unable to network print, network scan, or PC-FAX, you
may need to configure the firewall settings. If you are using the Windows Firewall and you installed the drivers
using the steps in the installer, the necessary firewall settings have been already set. If you are using any other
personal firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
8
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Control Panel Overview
Control Panel Overview
>> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
The control panel may vary depending on your model.
4
3
1
2
1. Touchscreen Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
You can select from two types of screens to set as the Main Home screen: Home screens and Shortcuts
screens. When a Home screen is displayed, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the other Home
screens.
The Main Home screen displays the machine's status when the machine is idle. When displayed, this screen
indicates that your machine is ready for the next command.
If Active Directory Authentication or LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel is locked.
The available features vary depending on your model.
The Home screens provide access to features, such as Fax, Copy, and Scan.
Home screen: Screen 1
9
Home screen: Screen 2
Home screen: Screen 3
Shortcuts screen
Create Shortcuts for frequently used operations, such as sending a fax, copying, scanning, and using Web
Connect.
Eight Shortcuts tabs are available with six Shortcuts on each Shortcuts tab. A total of 48 Shortcuts are
available.
10
8
1. Date & Time
Displays the date and time set on the machine.
2. Function Icons
•
[Fax] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
Press to access Fax mode.
•
[Copy]
Press to access Copy mode.
•
[Scan]
Press to access Scan mode.
•
[Secure Print]
Press to access the [Secure Print] option.
•
[Web]
Press to connect your machine to an Internet service.
•
[Apps]
Press to connect your machine to the Brother Apps service.
•
[USB]
Press to access the USB menu and select [Scan to USB] or [Direct Print] options.
• [2 in 1 ID Copy]
Press to access the 2 in 1 ID Copy option.
3.
(Toner)
Displays the remaining toner life. Press to access the [Toner] menu.
4. (Settings)
Press to access the [Settings] menu.
11
If the Setting Lock function has been turned on, a lock icon appears on the LCD. You must unlock the
machine to change the settings.
• Toner
- Displays the remaining toner life.
- Press to access the [Toner] menu.
•
Network
- Press to set up a network connection.
- A four level indicator on the screen displays the current wireless signal strength if you are using a
wireless connection.
•
Fax Preview (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
Press to access the [Fax Preview] menu.
• Tray Setting
Press to access the [Tray Setting] menu.
• Eco Mode
Press to access the [Eco Mode] menu.
• All Settings
Press to access all machine settings.
•
Date & Time
- Displays the date and time set on the machine.
- Press to access the [Date & Time] menu.
5. IP Address
If the IP Address setting in the Display Information menu has been turned on, your machine's IP Address
appears on the Home screens.
12
6. or (Wireless Status) for wireless network models
Press to configure the wireless settings.
If you are using a wireless connection, a four-level indicator displays the current wireless signal strength.
0 Max
Wireless LAN Disabled
(Wired LAN Status) for wired network models
Press to configure the Wired LAN settings.
The icon displays the current wired network status.
7.
[Shortcuts]
Press to access the [Shortcuts] screen.
8. (Home screen)
Press to access the Home screens.
• New Fax (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
When [Fax Preview] is set to [On], the number of new faxes you received into the memory appears
at the top of the screen.
• Warning Icon
13
The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message. Press the message area
to view it, and then press to return to the Main Home screen.
2. Touchpanel
(Back)
Press to go back to the previous menu.
(Home)
Press to return to the Main Home screen.
(Cancel)
Press to cancel an operation.
3. LED Power Indicator
The LED lights up depending on the machine’s power status.
4.
Power On/Off
• Turn the machine on by pressing .
• Turn the machine off by holding down
. The LCD displays [Shutting Down] for a few seconds
before the machine turns off. If you have an external telephone or TAD connected, it is still available.
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
The control panel may vary depending on your model.
1
4
5
2
3
14
1. Near Field Communication (NFC) Reader (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Use card authentication, if applicable, by touching your Integrated Circuit Card (IC Card) to the NFC symbol
on the machine.
2. Touchscreen Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Access menus and options by pressing them on the touchscreen.
Your machine has eight tabbed screens (referred to as Home screens). Each Home screen can hold up to
eight icons which can be used for functions, machine settings and shortcuts. A total of 64 icons can be
placed on the Home screens as needed.
The Main Home screen can be selected from the Home screens.
Use the [Admin Settings] menu to group names on the tabs and rearrange the icons.
1. Date & Time
Displays the date and time set on the machine.
This area is also used to display error or maintenance messages.
2.
(Wired LAN Status)
Press to configure the Wired LAN settings.
The icon displays the current wired network status.
Wired LAN Disabled
(Grey)
Wired LAN Enabled
(Blue)
No cable connection
15
3. (Wireless Status)
Press to configure the wireless settings.
For certain models, the Home screens display the wireless status only when the optional Wireless Module
is installed.
If you are using a wireless connection, a four-level indicator displays the current wireless signal strength.
0 Max
Wireless LAN Disabled
4. (Toner)
Displays the remaining toner life. Press to access the [Toner] menu.
5. (Admin Settings)
Press to access the [Admin Settings] menu.
If required, enter the password you use to manage this machine in Web Based Management, and then
press [OK].
6. IP Address
If the IP Address setting in the Display Information menu has been turned on, your machine's IP Address
appears on the Home screens.
7. Function Icons, Setting Icons, and Shortcut Icons
The following descriptions explain basic icons and features. The available features vary depending on
your model.
•
[All Settings]
Press to access the machine's settings menu.
•
[Fax]
Press to access Fax mode.
• [Copy]
Press to access Copy mode.
•
[Scan]
Press to access Scan mode.
•
[Secure Print]
Press to access the [Secure Print] option.
• [USB]
Press to access the USB menu and select [Scan to USB] or [Direct Print] options.
• [Web]
Press to connect your machine to an Internet service.
•
[Apps]
Press to connect your machine to the Brother Apps service.
•
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
Press to access the 2 in 1 ID Copy option.
16
• [Eco Mode]
Press to access the [Eco Mode] menu.
• (Shortcuts)
Press to create Shortcuts for frequently-used operations, such as sending a fax, copying, scanning,
and using Web Connect.
8. Tabs Scroll Buttons
Press to display the Home screens.
9. Home Tabs
Press to display the screen for the Home.
• New Fax
When [Fax Preview] is set to [On], the number of new faxes you received into the memory appears
at the top of the screen.
• Warning icon
17
The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message. Press the message area
to view it, and then press to return to the Main Home screen.
3. Touchpanel
(Back)
Press to go back to the previous menu.
(Home)
Press to return to the Main Home screen.
(Cancel)
Press to cancel an operation.
4.
Power On/Off
• Turn the machine on by pressing .
• Turn the machine off by holding down
. The LCD displays [Shutting Down] for a few seconds
before the machine turns off. If you have an external telephone or TAD connected, it is still available.
5. LED Power Indicator
The LED lights up depending on the machine’s power status.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
18
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD
How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD
Press your finger on the LCD to operate it. To display and access all the options, swipe left, right, up, and down,
or press d, c, a, or b on the LCD to scroll through them.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT press the LCD with a sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It may damage the machine.
NOTE
DO NOT touch the LCD immediately after plugging in the power cord or turning the machine on. Doing this
may cause an error.
This product uses fonts owned by ARPHIC TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
19
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > How to Enter Text on Your Machine
How to Enter Text on Your Machine
• When you must enter text on your machine, a keyboard appears on the LCD.
• The characters that are available may differ depending on your country.
• The keyboard layout may differ depending on the operation you perform.
• The keyboard display may differ depending on your model.
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Press to cycle between letters,
numbers, and special characters.
• (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Press
to select letters,
numbers, and special characters.
• Press to cycle between lowercase and uppercase letters.
• To move the cursor to the left or right, press d or c.
Inserting spaces
• To enter a space, press [Space] or c.
Making corrections
• If you entered a character incorrectly and want to change it, press d or c to move the cursor to the incorrect
character, and then press
. Enter the correct character.
• To insert a character, press d or c to move the cursor to the correct place, and then enter the character.
• Press
for each character you want to erase, or press and hold to erase all the characters.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
20
Related Topics:
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
• Set Your Station ID
• Set the Setting Lock Password
• Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
• Download and Print Using Web Services
21
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Set the Main Home Screen
Set the Main Home Screen
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
You can change the LCD to display a specific Home screen or Shortcut screen.
When the machine is idle or you press , the touchscreen will return to the screen you set.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Screen Settings] > [Home
Screen].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the screen settings, and then press the setting you want.
3. Press .
The LCD displays the screen you selected. You can change this main screen as needed.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
22
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Customisation of Your Machine
Customisation of Your Machine
Related Models: MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
The [Admin Settings] menu allows you to rename the Home screens and rearrange the icons.
The [Home Screen Settings] menu and the [Other Screen Settings] menu provide the following
functions:
• Renaming Home screen tabs
• Adding, removing, and repositioning icons on Home screens
• Setting your Main Home screen
• Selecting screen background colour
• Selecting whether to display your machine's IP Address on the Home screens
• Changing the default functions for the Copy screen and the Scan screen
The [Admin Settings] menu allows you to manage permissions and restrictions.
The [Restriction Management] menu provides the following functions:
• User Restriction
- Secure Function Lock
- Active Directory Authentication
- LDAP Authentication
• Setting Lock
For more information, see Related Information. Security and Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
Related Topics:
• Security
• Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
23
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
Brother Utilities is an application launcher that offers convenient access to all Brother applications installed on
your computer.
1. Do one of the following:
• (Windows 11)
Click
> All apps > Brother > Brother Utilities.
• (Windows 10)
Click > Brother > Brother Utilities.
2. Select your machine.
3. Choose the option you want.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
• Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows)
24
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows) > Uninstall the Software and
Drivers (Windows)
Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows)
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Brother > Brother Utilities.
• Windows 10
Click > Brother > Brother Utilities.
2. Select your model from the drop-down list (if it is not already selected).
3. Click Tools in the left navigation bar.
• If the Software Update Notification icon is visible, select it, and then click Check now > Check for
Software Updates > Update. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• If the Software Update Notification icon is not visible, go to the next step.
4. Click Uninstall in the Tools section of Brother Utilities.
Follow the instructions in the dialog box to uninstall the software and drivers.
Related Information
• Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
25
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine
Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine
The input/output ports are located on the front and back of the machine.
4
1
5
6
3
2
1. LINE socket (For MFC models)
2. EXT. socket (For MFC models)
3. USB accessory port (Front)
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
4. 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T port (For network models)
5. USB port
6. USB accessory port (Rear)
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
When connecting the USB or network cable, follow the instructions in the software/driver installer.
To install the necessary driver and software for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
26
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Improve Machine Ventilation
Improve Machine Ventilation
Rotate the main vent cover to redirect the flow of air from inside of the machine.
CAUTION
• Be careful not to get burned when rotating the vent. It may get hot.
• Keep a minimum gap around the product as shown in the illustration.
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
Front
Side
11.8 in (300 mm)
5.9 in
(150 mm)
5.9 in
(150 mm)
5.9 in
(150 mm)
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Front
Side
4.0 in
(100 mm)
5.9 in
(150 mm)
11.8 in (300 mm)
5.9 in
(150 mm)
NOTE
DO NOT put the product in a location where any slot or opening is blocked or obstructed. These slots and
openings are provided for ventilation.
27
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper
Tray
Load Paper in the Paper Tray
• If, when the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, a message
appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type, change these settings, if
needed, following the LCD instructions.
• When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Press the green levers to slide the paper guides to fit the paper.
32
For Legal or Folio size paper, press the release button (1) in the bottom of the paper tray or the release
lever (2) in the back of the tray, and then pull out the back of the paper tray. (Legal and Folio size paper are
not available in some regions.)
For trays with a release button:
1
For trays with a release lever:
2
3. Fan the stack of paper well.
4. Load paper in the paper tray with the printing surface face down.
When you use letterhead or preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation.See Related
Information: Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray.
5. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b).
Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams.
6. Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine.
33
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper
Tray > Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray
Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper
Using the Paper Tray
When you use letterhead or preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings.
• DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may
cause the paper to jam or misfeed.
• If the print position is misaligned with the letterhead or preprinted objects, the print position is adjustable
using the Print Position setting for the paper tray.
• Some preprinted paper may cause print stains, depending on the printing method and ink type.
Orientation
For 1-sided printing
• face down
• top edge towards the front of the paper tray
For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)
• face up
• bottom edge towards the front of the paper tray
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2-
sided Feed].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
• Load Paper in the Paper Tray
35
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load and Print Thick Paper
Using the Paper Tray
Load and Print Thick Paper Using the Paper Tray
• If, when the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, a message
appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type, change these settings, if
needed, following the LCD instructions.
• When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Press the green levers to slide the paper guides to fit the paper.
36
For Legal or Folio size paper, press the release button (1) in the bottom of the paper tray or the release
lever (2) in the back of the tray, and then pull out the back of the paper tray. (Legal and Folio size paper are
not available in some regions.)
For trays with a release button:
1
For trays with a release lever:
2
3. Fan the stack of paper well.
4. Load paper in the paper tray with the printing surface face down.
DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may cause
the paper to jam or misfeed.
5. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b).
Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams.
6. Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine.
37
7. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
8. Open the paper stopper. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
9. Send your print job to the machine.
Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box.
10. When finished, close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Close the paper stopper, and then close the back cover.
Related Information
• Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
38
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
• Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
• Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
• Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
• Printing Problems
• Error and Maintenance Messages
39
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
• Plain Paper
• Thin Paper
• Thick Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Bond Paper
• Letterhead
• Coloured Paper
1. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face down output tray.
2. Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
40
3. Extend the MP tray support.
4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).
• When you use letterhead or preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation.See Related
Information: Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray.
Related Information
• Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
• Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray
41
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted
Paper Using the MP Tray
Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper
Using the MP Tray
When you use letterhead or preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings.
• DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may
cause the paper to jam or misfeed.
• If the print position is misaligned with the letterhead or preprinted objects, the print position is adjustable
using the Print Position setting for the MP tray.
• Some preprinted paper may cause print stains, depending on the printing method and ink type.
Orientation
For 1-sided printing
• face up
• top edge first
For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)
• face down
• bottom edge first
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2-
sided Feed].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
• Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
42
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
When you print on labels, open the back cover (face up output tray) and use the MP tray.
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
2. Open the paper stopper. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
3. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.
43
4. Extend the MP tray support.
5. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the labels you are using.
6. Load labels with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
Make sure the labels are below the maximum paper mark (1).
7. Change your print preferences in the Print screen.
8. Send your print job to the machine.
9. When finished, close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Close the paper stopper, and then close the back cover.
Related Information
• Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
44
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible.
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
2. Open the paper stopper. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
3. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.
45
4. Extend the MP tray support.
5. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the envelopes that you are using.
6. Load envelopes with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
Load the envelopes in the MP tray with the printing surface face up. Make sure the envelopes are below the
maximum paper mark (1).
7. Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box.
Settings Options for Envelopes
Paper Size Com-10
DL
C5
Monarch
Media Type Envelopes
Env. Thick
Env. Thin
8. Send your print job to the machine.
46
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
When you change the size and type of paper you load in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings on the LCD.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Paper
Type].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the option you want.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper type options, and then press the option you want.
4. Press
.
5. Press [Paper Size].
6. Press the option you want.
7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper size options, and then press the option you want.
8. Press .
Related Information
• Paper Settings
49
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Select the Paper Tray For Printing
Select the Paper Tray For Printing
Change the machine's default paper tray for printing copies, received faxes, and print jobs from your computer.
DCP models do not support the fax feature.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Tray Use: Copy], [Tray Use: Fax], or [Tray Use:
Print] option, and then press the option you want.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the option you want, and then press it. For example, when you
select the [MP>T1] option, the machine pulls paper from the MP tray until it is empty, and then from Tray 1.
4. Press
.
• When you make a copy using the ADF and give priority to multiple trays, the machine looks for the tray
with the most suitable paper and pulls paper from that tray.
• When you make a copy using the scanner glass, your document is copied from the higher priority tray
even if more suitable paper is in another paper tray.
• (For models with facsimile function) Use the following sizes of paper for printing faxes: Letter, A4, Legal,
Folio, Mexico Legal, or India Legal. When an appropriate size is not in any of the trays, the machine
stores received faxes and [Size Mismatch] appears on the touchscreen.
• (For models with facsimile function) If the tray is out of paper and received faxes are in the machine’s
memory, [No Paper] appears on the touchscreen. Load paper in the empty tray.
Related Information
• Paper Settings
50
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Check Paper Setting
Change the Check Paper Setting
When the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, or load paper in the
MP tray, a message appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type.
The default setting is On.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Check
Paper].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press
.
Related Information
• Paper Settings
51
Home > Paper Handling > Recommended Print Media
Recommended Print Media
To get the best print quality, we recommend using the paper listed in the table.
Paper Type Item
Plain Paper
Xerox Premier TCF 80 g/m
2
Xerox Business 80 g/m
2
Recycled Paper
Steinbeis Evolution White 80 g/m
2
Labels Avery laser label L7163
Envelopes Antalis River series (DL)
Related Information
• Paper Handling
52
Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents > Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF when copying or scanning multi page, standard-sized documents.
• The ADF can hold the following sheets and feed each sheet individually:
- (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
Up to 50 sheets
- (MFC-L6710DW)
Up to 70 sheets
- (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Up to 80 sheets
• Use standard 80 g/m
2
paper.
• Make sure documents with correction fluid or written in ink are completely dry.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT leave thick documents on the scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may jam.
• DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper-clipped, glued together, or
taped.
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper, or fabric.
• To avoid damaging your machine while using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.
Supported Document Sizes
Length:
147.3 to 355.6 mm
Width: 105 to 215.9 mm
Weight:
64 to 90 g/m
2
1. Unfold the ADF document output support flap.
2. Fan the pages well.
3. Stagger the pages of your document and load it into the ADF face up and top edge first, as shown in the
illustration.
4. Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of your document.
54
Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents > Load Documents on the Scanner Glass
Load Documents on the Scanner Glass
Use the scanner glass to fax, copy, or scan one page at a time.
Supported Document Sizes
Length:
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
Up to 300 mm
• (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Up to 355.6 mm
Width: Up to 216 mm
Weight: Up to 2kg
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must be empty.
1. Lift the document cover.
2. Place the document on the scanner glass face down.
3. Place the corner of the page in the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
4. Close the document cover.
If the document is a book or is thick, gently press on the document cover.
Related Information
• Load Documents
56
Home > Paper Handling > Unscannable and Unprintable Areas
Unscannable and Unprintable Areas
The measurements in the table below show the maximum unscannable and unprintable areas from the edges of
the most commonly-used paper sizes. These measurements may vary depending on the paper size or settings in
the application you are using.
1
3
24
Do not attempt to scan, copy, or print in these areas. Any content included in such areas will not be
reflected in the output.
Usage Document Size Top (1)
Bottom (3)
Left (2)
Right (4)
Fax (Sending) Letter, Legal 3.0 mm 4.0 mm
A4 3.0 mm (ADF)
1.0 mm
(Scanner Glass)
3.0 mm
Copy
1
Letter, Legal 4.0 mm 4.0 mm
A4 4.0 mm 3.0 mm
Scan Letter (ADF)
3.0 mm
(Scanner Glass)
3.0 mm
2
(ADF)
3.0 mm
(Scanner Glass)
3.0 mm
2
A4 (ADF)
3.0 mm
(Scanner Glass)
3.0 mm
2
(ADF)
3.0 mm
(Scanner Glass)
3.0 mm
2
Legal (ADF)
3.0 mm
(Scanner Glass)
3.0 mm
2
(ADF)
3.0 mm
(Scanner Glass)
3.0 mm
2
Print Letter, Legal 4.2 mm 4.2 mm
A4 4.2 mm 4.2 mm
1
A 1 in 1 copy and 100% document size copy
2
This number is adjustable to 0 mm depending on your model. If the number is set to 0 mm, a black shadow may appear around the edges
on the scanned image.
57
Home > Paper Handling > Using Special Paper
Using Special Paper
Always test paper samples before purchasing them to ensure desirable performance.
• DO NOT use inkjet paper; it may cause a paper jam or damage your machine.
• If you use bond paper, paper with a rough surface, or paper that is wrinkled or creased, the paper may exhibit
degraded performance.
Store paper in its original packaging and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from moisture, direct
sunlight, and heat.
IMPORTANT
Some types of paper may not perform well or may cause damage to your machine.
DO NOT use paper:
• that is highly textured
• that is extremely smooth or shiny
• that is curled or warped
• that is coated or has a chemical finish
• that is damaged, creased, or folded
• that exceeds the recommended weight specification in this guide
• with tabs and staples
• with letterhead using low temperature dyes or thermography
• that is multipart or carbonless
• that is designed for inkjet printing
If you use any of the types of paper listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage is not
covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement.
Related Information
• Paper Handling
59
Home > Print
Print
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
• Print from Your Computer (Mac)
• Print an Email Attachment
• Secure Print Using a USB Flash Drive
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
• Print Duplicate Copies
• Change Print Settings Using the Control Panel
• Cancel a Print Job
• Test Print
• Universal Print
60
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows)
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
• Print a Document (Windows)
• Print Settings (Windows)
• Secure Print (Windows)
• Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
•
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language
Emulation) (Windows)
• Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
61
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print a Document (Windows)
Print a Document (Windows)
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model's name, and then click the printing properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
4. Click the Paper Size drop-down list, and then select your paper size.
5. In the Orientation field, select the Portrait or Landscape option to set the orientation of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the
application.
6. Type the number of copies (1-999) you want in the Copies field.
7. Click the Media Type drop-down list, and then select the type of paper you are using.
8. To print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper or print one page of your document on multiple sheets,
click the Multiple Page drop-down list, and then select your options.
9. Change other printer settings, if needed.
10. Click OK.
11. Complete your print operation.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
62
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print Settings (Windows)
Print Settings (Windows)
>> Basic Tab
>> Advanced Tab
Basic Tab
1. Paper Size
Select the paper size you want to use. You can either choose from standard paper sizes or create a custom
paper size.
2. Orientation
Select the orientation (portrait or landscape) of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application.
3. Copies
Type the number of copies (1-999) that you want to print in this field.
Collate
Select this option to print sets of multi-page documents in the original page order. When this option is
selected, one complete copy of your document will print, and then reprint according to the number of
copies you choose. If this option is not selected, then each page will print according to the number of
copies chosen before the next page of the document is printed.
4. Media Type
Select the media type you want to use. To achieve the best print results, the machine automatically adjusts its
print settings according to the selected media type.
64
5. Resolution
Select the print resolution. As print resolution and speed are related, the higher the resolution, the longer it
will take to print the document.
6. Print Settings
Select the type of document you want to print.
Manual Settings...
Specify additional settings such as brightness, contrast, and other settings.
Graphics
Use Printer Halftone
Select this option to use the printer driver to express halftones.
Brightness
Adjust the brightness.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast.
Graphics Quality
Select either Graphics or Text for the best print quality, based on the type of document you are
printing.
Improve Grey Printing
Select this option to improve the image quality of shaded areas.
Improve Pattern Printing
Select this option to improve the pattern printing if printed fills and patterns are different from the
fills and patterns you see on your computer screen.
Improve Thin Line
Select this option to improve the image quality of thin lines.
Use System Halftone
Select this option to use Windows to express halftones.
TrueType Mode (available for certain models)
Mode
Select how the fonts are processed for printing.
Use Printer TrueType Fonts
Select whether to use built-in fonts for the font processing.
7. Multiple Page
Select this option to print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper, or print one page of your document on
multiple sheets.
Page Order
Select the page order when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Border Line
Select the type of border to use when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
8. 2-sided / Booklet
Select this option to print on both sides of the paper, or print a document in booklet format using 2-sided
printing.
2-sided Settings
Click this button to select the type of 2-sided binding. Four types of 2-sided bindings are available for each
orientation.
65
9. Paper Source
Select the paper source setting according to your print conditions or purpose.
First Page
Select the paper source to use for printing the first page.
Other Pages
Select the paper source to use for printing the second and subsequent pages.
Advanced Tab
1. Scaling
Select these options to enlarge or reduce the size of the pages in your document.
Fit to Paper Size
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages to fit a specified paper size. When you select
this option, select the paper size you want from the drop-down list.
Free [25 - 400%]
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages manually. When you select this option, type a
value into the field.
2. Reverse Print
Select this option to rotate the printed image 180 degrees.
3. Use Watermark
Select this option to print a logo or text on your document as a watermark. Select one of the preset
watermarks, add a new watermark, or use an image file you have created.
4. Header-Footer Print
Select this option to print the date, time, and login user name on the document.
66
5. Toner Save Mode
Select this feature to use less toner to print documents; printouts appear lighter, but are still legible.
6. Secure Print (available for certain models)
This feature ensures that confidential or sensitive documents are not printed out until you enter a password
on the machine's control panel.
7. Administrator
This feature allows you to change the administrator password and restrict various printing functions.
8. User Authentication (available for certain models)
This feature allows you to confirm the restrictions for each user.
9. Other Print Options
Sleep Time
Select this option to set the machine to enter sleep mode immediately after printing.
Macro (available for certain models)
Select this feature to print an electronic form (macro), which you have stored in your machine's memory,
as an overlay on the print job.
Density Adjustment
Specify the print density.
Improve Print Output
Select this option to reduce the amount of paper curling and improve the toner fixing.
Skip Blank Page
Select this option to allow the printer driver to automatically detect blank pages and exclude them from
printing.
Print Text in Black
Select this option when you want to print colour text in black.
Print Archive
Select this option to save the print data as a PDF file to your computer.
Eco settings
Select this option to reduce printing noise.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
• Print a Document (Windows)
67
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Secure Print (Windows)
Secure Print (Windows)
Use Secure Print to ensure that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on
the machine's control panel.
The secure data is deleted from the machine when you turn the machine off.
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model's name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Click the Settings button in the Secure Print field.
5. Select the Secure Print checkbox.
6. Type your four-digit password in the Password field.
7. Type the user name and job name in the User Name and Job Name fields, if needed.
8. Click OK to close the Secure Print Settings window.
9. Click OK.
10. Complete your print operation.
11. On the machine's control panel, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [Secure Print] option,
and then press it.
12. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display user names, and then press your user name.
13. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK].
14. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the print job, and then press it.
15. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK].
16. Press [Start].
The secured data will be cleared from the machine's memory after printing.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
68
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
When you change an application's print settings, the changes apply only to documents printed with that
application. To change print settings for all Windows applications, you must configure the printer driver
properties.
1. Do one of the following:
• For Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
• For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click your model's icon, and then select Printer properties. (If the printer driver options appear, select
your printer driver.)
The printer properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the General tab, and then click the Printing Preferences... or Preferences... button.
The printer driver dialog box appears.
• To configure the tray settings, click the Device Settings tab (available for certain models).
• To change the printer port, click the Ports tab.
4. Select the print settings you want to use as default for all of your Windows programs.
5. Click OK.
6. Close the printer properties dialog box.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
• Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
69
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Change the Default Print Settings
(Windows) > Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
Access your machine's Properties to auto-detect your machine's Optional Tray and check the machine's serial
number.
The printer driver automatically detects the Optional Tray during the driver installation. If you added the
Optional Tray after the driver installation, follow these steps:
1. Do one of the following:
• For Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
• For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click your model's icon, and then select Printer properties. (If the printer driver options appear, select
your printer driver.)
The printer properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Device Settings tab.
4. Click the Auto Detect button.
The Optional Tray and the machine's serial number are automatically detected.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. Close the printer properties dialog box.
The Auto Detect function is not available under the following machine conditions:
• The machine is turned off.
• The machine is shared via a Print Server.
• The machine and your computer are not connected.
Related Information
• Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
70
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer
Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language Emulation) (Windows)
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language Emulation) (Windows)
The BR-Script3 printer driver lets you print PostScript
®
data more clearly.
Go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads to install the PS driver (BR-Script3
printer driver).
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model with BR-Script3 in the name, and then click the printing properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Layout, Paper/Quality, or Secure Print tab to change basic print settings. (available for certain
models)
Click the Layout or Paper/Quality tab, and then click the Advanced... button to change advanced print
settings. Click OK.
4. Click OK.
5. Complete your print operation.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
71
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your
Computer (Windows)
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
The Status Monitor is a configurable software tool for monitoring the status of one or more machines, allowing
you to get immediate notification of errors.
Do one of the following:
- Double-click the
icon in the task tray.
- Launch
(Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model's name (if not
already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Status Monitor.
Troubleshooting
Click the Troubleshooting button to access the support website.
Looking for replacement supplies?
Click the Looking for replacement supplies? button for more information on Brother genuine supplies.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
• Printing Problems
72
Home > Print > Print an Email Attachment
Print an Email Attachment
You can print files by emailing them to your Brother machine.
• Make sure Web Based Management is set to On. For more information, see Related Information.
• You can attach up to 10 documents, 20 MB in total, to an email.
• This feature supports the following formats:
- Document files: PDF, TXT, and Microsoft Office files
- Image files: JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG, and TIFF
• The machine prints both the email content and attachments by default. To print only email attachments,
change the settings as necessary.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Online Functions > Online Functions Settings.
• Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
• If this function is locked, contact your network administrator for access.
5. Click the I accept the terms and conditions button.
6. Go to your machine, and then follow the machine's instructions to enable the settings.
7. On your computer, click General Settings.
The Email Print: General Settings screen appears.
8. Click the Enable button.
The machine prints the instruction sheet.
9. Send your email to the email address included on the sheet. The machine prints the email attachments.
• To change the settings, including email address and printer settings, click the Online Functions
Settings Page button.
• You can also configure the settings from your machine. Press [Apps] > [Online Functions], and
then follow the on-screen instructions.
Related Information
• Print
Related Topics:
• Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
75
Home > Print > Secure Print Using a USB Flash Drive
Secure Print Using a USB Flash Drive
Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
USB Storage Print allows you to save secure print data to the USB flash drive and print them later by entering a
password on the machine's control panel.
NOTE
USB flash drive requirements:
• Storage Size: 1 GB or more (Recommended: 16 GB or more)
• Format: FAT32/exFAT
• Data stored on a USB flash drive is encrypted, but this may not protect it from unauthorised access in all
circumstances. Make sure you securely manage and store your data and USB flash drive.
• Data on a USB flash drive can only be read on the machine whose data it stores. You cannot read the
data on another machine, device, or computer.
• When you no longer need the USB flash drive to store the data from your machine and want to use it for
other purposes, delete all stored data, and format the USB flash drive on your computer. To format or
clean the USB flash drive, refer to its user manual for instructions.
For more information on the printer driver settings, see Related Information.
1. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port (Rear).
2. Press .
3. On the machine's control panel, press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Job Save
Location].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
4. Press [USB flash drive(Rear port)].
A message appears on the LCD to initialise the USB flash drive.
NOTE
When you change the location where you save print jobs, all the stored job, Macro, Stream and Font data
in the machine's memory will be deleted.
5. Press and hold [OK] for two seconds to initialise.
The machine will restart to activate the USB Storage Print feature.
76
NOTE
When the machine restarts to activate the USB Storage Print feature, the Macro, Stream and Font data
will be deleted from the USB flash drive.
6. In the printer driver, complete the settings for the Secure Print option and execute the print command in your
application.
7. On the machine's control panel, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [Secure Print] option,
and then press it.
8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display user names, and then press your user name.
9. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK].
10. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the print job, and then press it.
11. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK].
12. Press [Start].
The machine prints the data and deletes the print job from the USB flash drive.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove the USB flash drive from the USB port (Rear) until the machine has finished printing.
Related Information
• Print
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
77
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
You can print photos directly from a digital camera or a USB flash drive.
Supported file types are PDF, JPEG, TIFF, XPS, and PRN.
• Compatible USB Flash Drives
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage
• Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)
78
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Compatible USB Flash Drives
Compatible USB Flash Drives
IMPORTANT
The USB direct interface supports only USB flash drives and digital cameras that use the USB mass storage
standard. Other USB devices are not supported.
Compatible USB Flash Drives
USB Class USB Mass Storage Class
USB Mass Storage Sub Class SCSI or SFF-8070i
Transfer Protocol Bulk transfer Only
Format
1
FAT12/FAT16/FAT32/exFAT
Sector Size Max. 4096 Byte
Encryption Encrypted devices are not supported.
1
NTFS format is not supported.
Related Information
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
79
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or
Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting
Mass Storage
• Make sure your digital camera is turned on.
• Your digital camera must be switched from PictBridge mode to Mass Storage mode.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to your machine, DO NOT connect any device other than a digital camera or USB flash
drive to the USB direct interface.
USB Port Location (Front View)
USB Port Location (Rear View)
The rear view illustration shows the MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910.
1. Connect your USB flash drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface. The touchscreen will
automatically display the USB menu to confirm that the USB flash drive or digital camera is correctly
connected.
80
• If an error occurs, the USB menu will not appear on the touchscreen.
• When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the touchscreen does not display any information even if
you connect a USB flash drive to the USB direct interface. Press the touchscreen to wake up the
machine.
• If your machine's Secure Function Lock is On, you may not be able to print from a USB flash drive or
digital camera.
• (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) If the machine prompts you to choose the USB port,
select it on the touchscreen.
2. Press [Direct Print].
3. Swipe up or down, or press a or b to display the file you want to print, and then select the file.
To print an index of the files stored on the USB flash drive or digital camera, press [Index Print] on the
touchscreen. Press [Yes] to print the data.
4. Do one of the following:
• To change the settings, press [Print Settings]. Go to the next step.
• If you want to use the default settings, enter the number of copies, and then press [Start].
5. Select the print settings you want to change:
• [Print Quality]
• [Tray Use]
• [Paper Type]
• [Paper Size]
• [Multiple Page]
• [Orientation]
• [2-sided]
• [Collate]
• [PDF Print Options]
• [PDF Fit to Page]
Depending on the file type, some of these settings may not appear.
6. Press [OK].
7. Enter the number of copies you want.
8. Press [Start] to print the data.
9. Press .
IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove the USB flash drive or digital camera from the USB direct interface until the machine
has finished printing.
Related Information
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
81
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Create a PRN File for Direct Printing
(Windows)
Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)
These instructions may vary depending on your print application and operating system.
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model, and then select the print to file option.
3. Complete your print operation.
4. Enter the required information to save the file.
If the computer prompts you to enter a file name only, you can also specify the folder where you want to
save the file by typing the directory name (for example: C:\Temp\FileName.prn).
If a USB flash drive is connected to your computer, you can save the file directly to the USB flash drive.
Related Information
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
82
Home > Print > Print Duplicate Copies
Print Duplicate Copies
Use the Carbon Copy function to make multiple copies of the same print data, as if printing on carbon paper.
Send the data to individual paper trays that you loaded with different paper types or colours.
For example, you may want to set the machine to send your print data to Tray 1, which you have pre-loaded with
blue coloured paper, and then reprint the data in a certain location on the page from the MP Tray, which you
have loaded with yellow coloured paper that already contains text.
If you load blue paper in Tray 1 and yellow paper in the MP tray, the printer will automatically feed paper for
Sheet 1 from Tray 1 and Sheet 2 from the MP Tray.
If you enable the Carbon Copy function, the machine will always make copies automatically.
Windows
The Carbon Copy function also allows you to select a different printing macro/stream for each page.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Carbon Menu] > [Carbon Copy] > [On].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copies] option, and then press the [Copies] option.
3. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copy1 Tray] option, and then press the [Copy1 Tray]
option.
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper tray you want to configure for the [Copy1 Stream]
option, and then press to select the paper tray.
Windows
a. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copy1 Macro] option, and then press it.
b. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the ID number of the macro you want to use, and then
press it.
6. Repeat these steps until you have selected all the tray settings for each copy.
7. Press
.
8. Send your print job to the machine.
Related Information
• Print
83
Home > Print > Change Print Settings Using the Control Panel
Change Print Settings Using the Control Panel
Select the type of document you want to print.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Print Settings].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Text] or [Graphics].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Print
84
Home > Print > Test Print
Test Print
If there are problems with print quality, follow these instructions to do a test print:
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Print Options] > [Test Print].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Print
Related Topics:
• Improve the Print Quality
86
Home > Print > Universal Print
Universal Print
• Universal Print Overview
• Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management
• Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
• Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
• Print Using Universal Print
• Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
87
Home > Print > Universal Print > Universal Print Overview
Universal Print Overview
Universal Print is a cloud-based print service from Microsoft. You can print documents, from anywhere on the
Internet, without installing a printer driver. Universal Print is available for Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) users
with a Microsoft 365 subscription.
1. Computer running Windows 10 20H1 or greater
2. Cloud server
Related Information
• Universal Print
88
Home > Print > Universal Print > Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based
Management
Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based
Management
• Make sure you set the correct date and time for your time zone.
• If your network uses a proxy server, configure the proxy server settings.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the Universal Print checkbox, and then click Advanced Settings.
6. Change your machine's name in the Device Name field if necessary.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
7. Click Register.
If an error occurs, follow the on-screen instructions.
8. A Universal Print user code appears. Click the Sign in button, and then type the user code.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the registration.
Related Information
• Universal Print
Related Topics:
• Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
89
Home > Print > Universal Print > Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
You can assign users to the Universal Print service only if your machine is registered on the Microsoft Azure
portal.
1. Access the Microsoft Azure portal.
URL: portal.azure.com
2. Log in as a Printer Administrator.
3. Select the Universal Print service.
4. Select the Printers option, and then select your machine from the list.
5. Select the Share option.
6. Select the users you want to assign to the Universal Print service, and then click Share Printer.
Related Information
• Universal Print
90
Home > Print > Universal Print > Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
1. Click > > Devices > Printers & scanners > Add a printer or scanner.
2. Select your machine registered as a Universal Print-enabled printer from the list, and then click Add device.
Related Information
• Universal Print
91
Home > Print > Universal Print > Print Using Universal Print
Print Using Universal Print
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select the machine you registered as a Universal Print-enabled printer, and then click the printer's properties
or preferences button.
3. Change the printer settings, if needed.
4. Complete your print operation.
Related Information
• Universal Print
92
Home > Print > Universal Print > Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
To deregister your machine, you must delete it from Web Based Management, and then delete it on the Microsoft
Azure portal.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Next to the Universal Print checkbox, click Advanced Settings.
6. Click Delete Registration Data, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
7. Access the Microsoft Azure portal.
URL:
portal.azure.com
8. Log in as a Printer Administrator.
9. Select the Universal Print service.
10. Select the Printers option, and then select your machine from the list.
11. Click Delete Printer Share.
12. Click Unregister.
Related Information
• Universal Print
93
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
• Scan Photos and Graphics
• Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File
• Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
• Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
• Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment
• Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient
• Scan to FTP
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
• Scan to Network (Windows)
• Scan to SharePoint
• Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
• Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
• Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs
• Disable Scanning from Your Computer
95
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan Photos and Graphics
Scan Photos and Graphics
Send scanned photos or graphics directly to your computer.
Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to Image].
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options],
and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to
change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
• [Scan Settings]
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings] (available only for certain models)
• [B&W TIFF Compress]
96
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected
to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
97
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF
File
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File
Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer as PDF files.
Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to File].
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options],
and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to
change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
• [Scan Settings]
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings] (available only for certain models)
• [B&W TIFF Compress]
98
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected
to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
99
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
Scan documents directly to a USB flash drive.
1. Load your document.
2. Insert a USB flash drive into your machine.
3. Press [Scan to USB].
4. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options],
and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to
change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [File Name]
• [File Name Style]
• [File Size]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Crop]
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings] (available only for certain models)
• [Document Separation]
• [B&W TIFF Compress]
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default]
option, and then press [Yes].
• To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset], and then press [Yes].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
5. Press [Start].
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
If the machine prompts you to select the USB host, make your selection.
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
100
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
Your machine can convert characters in a scanned document to text using the optical character recognition
(OCR) technology. You can edit this text using your preferred text-editing application.
• The Scan to OCR feature is available only for certain languages.
• Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to OCR].
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options],
and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to
change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
• [Scan Settings]
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings](available only for certain models)
102
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected
to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
103
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data as an Email
Attachment
Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment
Send the scanned data from your machine to your email application as an attachment.
• Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
• To use this feature with your machine's Scan button, make sure you select one of these applications in
Brother iPrint&Scan:
- Windows: Microsoft Outlook
- Mac: Apple Mail
For other applications and Webmail services, use the Scan to Image or Scan to File feature to scan a
document, and then attach the scanned file to an email message.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to E-mail].
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options],
and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to
change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
• [Scan Settings]
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
104
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings] (available only for certain models)
• [B&W TIFF Compress]
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected
to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
105
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient
Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient
Send scanned data directly from your machine to an email recipient without using a computer. This function
allows your machine to scan documents and send them to an email address without your machine being
connected to a computer. To send the scanned data as an attachment directly to your default email application
using the iPrint&Scan software on your computer or the Scan button on your machine, use the "Scan to Email
Attachment" function instead.
• To send scanned data to an email recipient, you must configure your machine to communicate with your
network and email server, which is used to send and receive emails.
• Configure these items from the machine's control panel or Web Based Management.
• To use the Scan to Email Server function, connect your machine to the network and access an SMTP
server. Set up the following SMTP email settings:
- Server address
- Port number
- User name
- Encryption type (SSL or TLS)
- Email server certificate (if used)
If you do not know these settings, contact your email service provider or network administrator.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to E-mail Server].
• If you registered your email address with your user ID, the [to My E-mail] option appears when you
log on to the machine using Secure Function Lock, Active Directory Authentication, or LDAP
Authentication.
• To send scanned data to your email address, press [to My E-mail]. When your email address
appears on the LCD, press [Next].
• To enable this feature in Web Based Management, go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan >
Scan to E-mail Server. In the Send to My E-mail field, select On. Click Submit.
3. Do one of the following to enter the destination email address:
• To enter the email address manually, press [Manual], and then enter the email address using the
keyboard on the LCD. When finished, press [OK].
• If the email address is stored in the machine's address book, press [Address Book], and then select
the email address.
Press [OK].
4. Confirm the email address, and then press [Next].
5. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options],
and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to
change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
106
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [File Name]
• [File Name Style]
• [File Size]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings] (available only for certain models)
• [Document Separation]
• [B&W TIFF Compress]
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default]
option, and then press [Yes].
• To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset], and then press [Yes].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
(This function may not be available depending on your machine conditions.)
6. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
107
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to FTP
Scan to FTP
Scan documents directly to an FTP server when you need to share the scanned information. For added
convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to FTP destinations.
• Set up a Scan to FTP Profile
• Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server
108
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to FTP > Set up a Scan to FTP
Profile
Set up a Scan to FTP Profile
Set up a Scan to FTP Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to an FTP location.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the FTP option, and then click Submit.
6. Click the Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64
characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The
default setting is port 21. In most cases, this setting does not need to be
changed.
Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the FTP server.
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
SSL/TLS Set the SSL/TLS option to scan securely using SSL/TLS
communication. Change the CA Certificate setting, if needed.
Store Directory Type the path to the folder on the FTP server where you want to send
your scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the
path (see example).
109
Option Description
File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from user-
defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be
the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the
flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you
choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select
a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure
the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
File Size Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically as the pages are scanned.
Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the
scanning results.
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank
pages.
2-sided Scan (MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the
document, depending on the layout of your original.
Remove Background Colour Change the amount of background colour that is removed.
Margin Settings (available only for
certain models)
Adjust your document's margins.
Document Separation Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save
the documents separately by using this function.
B&W TIFF Compress Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Brightness Select the brightness level.
Contrast Select the contrast level.
Passive Mode Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server
and network firewall configuration. The default setting is on. In most
cases, this setting does not need to be changed.
8. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Scan to FTP
110
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to FTP > Upload Scanned Data to an
FTP Server
Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server
Share scanned information by saving it to your FTP server.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to FTP/SFTP].
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the
profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or
file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan to FTP
111
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
Uses the Secure Shell Protocol to establish a private and safe data stream when scanning documents to a
network destination. For added convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to SFTP
destinations.
• Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile
• Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
• Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
• Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
• Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
112
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Set up a
Scan to SFTP Profile
Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile
Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to an SFTP location.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the SFTP option, and then click Submit.
6. Click the Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64
characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the SFTP server.
Auth. Method Select Password or Public Key.
Password When you select Password for the Auth. Method option, type the
password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you
typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype
password field.
Client Key Pair When you select Public Key for the Auth. Method option, select the
authentication type.
Server Public Key Select the authentication type.
Store Directory Type the path to the folder on the SFTP server where you want to send
your scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the
path (see example).
113
Option Description
File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from user-
defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be
the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the
flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you
choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select
a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure
the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
File Size Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically as the pages are scanned.
Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the
scanning results.
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank
pages.
2-sided Scan (MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the
document, depending on the layout of your original.
Remove Background Colour Change the amount of background colour that is removed.
Margin Settings (available only for
certain models)
Adjust your document's margins.
Document Separation Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save
the documents separately by using this function.
B&W TIFF Compress Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Brightness Select the brightness level.
Contrast Select the contrast level.
Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The
default setting is port 22. In most cases, this setting does not need to be
changed.
8. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
114
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Create a
Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Client Key Pair.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create New Client Key Pair.
6. In the Client Key Pair Name field, type the name (up to 20 characters) you want.
7. Click the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list, and then select the algorithm you want.
8. Click Submit.
The client key pair is created and saved in your machine's memory. The client key pair name and public key
algorithm will be displayed in the Client Key Pair List.
Related Information
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
115
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Export a
Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Client Key Pair.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Export Public Key shown with Client Key Pair List.
6. Click Submit.
7. Specify the location where you want to save the file.
The client key pair is exported to your computer.
Related Information
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
116
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Import a
Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Server Public Key.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import Server Public Key.
6. Specify the file that you want to import.
7. Click Submit.
The server public key is imported to your machine.
Related Information
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
117
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Upload
Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to FTP/SFTP].
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the
profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or
file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
118
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows)
Scan to Network (Windows)
Scan documents directly to a CIFS server on your local network. For added convenience, you can configure
different profiles to save your favourite Scan to Network destinations.
• Set up a Scan to Network Profile
• Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
119
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Set up a
Scan to Network Profile
Set up a Scan to Network Profile
Set up a Scan to Network Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to a folder on a CIFS server.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the Network option, and then click Submit.
If you want to send the data to your designated folder on the CIFS server, select On for the Send to My
Folder option.
6. Click the Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Network Folder Path Type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to send
your scanned data.
File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from user-
defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be
the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the
flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you
choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select
a setting each time they use the scan profile.
120
Option Description
Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure
the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
File Size Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically as the pages are scanned.
Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the
scanning results.
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank
pages.
2-sided Scan (MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the
document, depending on the layout of your original.
Remove Background Colour Change the amount of background colour that is removed.
Margin Settings (available only for
certain models)
Adjust your document's margins.
Document Separation Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save
the documents separately by using this function.
B&W TIFF Compress Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Brightness Select the brightness level.
Contrast Select the contrast level.
Use PIN for Authentication To PIN-protect this profile, select On and type a four-digit PIN in the PIN
Code field.
Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, Kerberos, or NTLMv2.
Username Type a user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the folder specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the
user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the
following styles:
• user@domain
• domain\user
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
Kerberos Server Address To set the Kerberos Server Address manually, type the Kerberos Server
Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
8. Click Submit.
9. You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) or set the date, time and time zone correctly on
the control panel for all authentication methods. The machine's time must match the time used by the
Kerberos Server and CIFS Server.
Related Information
• Scan to Network (Windows)
• Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
121
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Set up a
Scan to Network Profile > Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Make sure the date and time and the time zone settings are set correctly using Web Based Management or the
control panel. The machine's time must match the time used by the server providing authentication.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
• Ignore step 1, if you already have a Web Based Management window open.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Date&Time.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
122
5. Clear the Synchronize with SNTP server checkbox.
6. In the Date fields, enter the date.
7. Select the clock type from the Clock Type field.
8. In the Time fields, enter the time.
9. Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For example,
the time zone for Eastern time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.
10. In the Auto Daylight field, click On to set the machine to change automatically to Daylight Saving Time. It will
reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and back one hour in the autumn (available only for some
countries).
11. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Set up a Scan to Network Profile
123
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Upload
Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to Network].
• If you registered your user ID, the [to My Folder] option appears when you log on to the machine
using Active Directory Authentication or LDAP Authentication.
• To send scanned data to your designated folder on the CIFS server, press [to My Folder].
• To enable this feature in Web Based Management, click the Scan tab, and then click the Scan to FTP /
SFTP / Network / SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar. In the Send to My Folder field, select
On. Click Submit.
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the
profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or
file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan to Network (Windows)
124
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SharePoint
Scan to SharePoint
Scan documents directly to a SharePoint server when you need to share the scanned information. For added
convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to SharePoint destinations.
• Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile
• Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server
125
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SharePoint > Set up a Scan to
SharePoint Profile
Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile
Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to a SharePoint location.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the SharePoint option, and then click Submit.
6. Click the Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
NOTE
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option
Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
SharePoint Site Address Copy and paste the full destination address shown in the address bar of
your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared
%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or the IP address (for example:
http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx).
SSL/TLS If you enter the address starting from "https://" in the SharePoint Site
Address field, you can verify the server certificate by checking the
Verify Server Certificate check.
File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from user-
defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be
the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the
flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
126
Option Description
File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you
choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select
a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure
the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
File Size Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically as the pages are scanned.
Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the
scanning results.
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank
pages.
2-sided Scan (MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the
document, depending on the layout of your original.
Remove Background Colour Change the amount of background colour that is removed.
Margin Settings (available only for
certain models)
Adjust your document's margins.
Document Separation Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save
the documents separately by using this function.
B&W TIFF Compress Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Brightness Select the brightness level.
Contrast Select the contrast level.
Use PIN for Authentication To PIN-protect this profile, select On and type a four-digit PIN in the PIN
Code field.
Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, NTLMv2, Kerberos, or
Basic. If you choose Auto, the authentication method will be detected
automatically.
Username Type the user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission
to write data to the folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address
field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of
the following styles:
• user@domain
• domain\user
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
Kerberos Server Address To set the Kerberos Server Address manually, type the Kerberos Server
Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
8. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Scan to SharePoint
127
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SharePoint > Upload Scanned
Data to a SharePoint Server
Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to SharePoint].
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the
profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or
file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK]
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan to SharePoint
128
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and
Windows 11)
The Web Services protocol enables Windows 10 and Windows 11 users to scan using a Brother machine on the
network. You must install the driver via Web Services.
• Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner Driver (Windows 10 and Windows
11)
• Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services Protocol (Windows 10 and Windows
11)
• Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol
129
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner
Driver (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner Driver (Windows
10 and Windows 11)
• Make sure you have installed the correct software and drivers for your machine.
• Verify that the host computer and the Brother machine are on the same subnet, or that the router is
correctly configured to pass data between the two devices.
• You must configure the IP address on your Brother machine before you configure this setting.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add
a device.
• Windows 10
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device.
• The Web Services Name for the Brother machine is your model's name and the MAC Address.
• Move your mouse over the machine's name to display the machine's information.
2. Select the machine you want to install, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
To uninstall the drivers, click Uninstall or (Remove device).
Related Information
• Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
130
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services
Protocol (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services Protocol (Windows 10
and Windows 11)
If you have installed the scanner driver via Web Services, you can access the Web Services scanning menu on
your machine's LCD.
Certain characters in the messages displayed on the LCD may be replaced with spaces if the language
settings of your operating system and your machine are different.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [WS Scan].
3. Select the scan type.
4. Select the computer name where you want to send scanned data.
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning.
If you are requested to select a scanning application, select Windows Fax and Scan from the list.
Related Information
• Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
131
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol
Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
• Windows 10
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices
and printers.
2. Right-click the machine icon, and then select Scan profiles.... The Scan Profiles dialog box appears.
3. Select the scan profile you want to use.
4. Make sure the scanner selected in the Scanner list is a machine that supports Web Services for scanning,
and then click the Set as Default button.
5. Click Edit....
The Edit Default Profile dialog box appears.
6. Select the Source, Paper size, Colour format, File type, Resolution (DPI), Brightness and Contrast
settings.
7. Click the Save Profile button.
These settings will be applied when you scan using the Web Services protocol.
If the machine prompts you to select a scanning application, select Windows Fax and Scan from the list.
Related Information
• Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
132
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Change the Scan Button Settings from
Brother iPrint&Scan
Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
Brother iPrint&Scan allows you to change the machine's Scan Button settings.
1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan.
• Windows
Launch
(Brother iPrint&Scan).
• Mac
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon.
The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears.
2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then follow the on-screen
instructions to select your Brother machine.
3. Click the Machine Scan Settings button, and then follow the on-screen instructions to change the scan
settings, such as document size, colour, and resolution.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
133
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs
Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs
If you select Signed PDF for Scan features, you must configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based
Management.
To use Signed PDF, you must install a certificate on your machine and your computer.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Signed PDF.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Select the Certificate drop-down list, and then select the certificate.
6. Click Submit.
134
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Disable Scanning from Your Computer
Disable Scanning from Your Computer
To disable the scan function on your computer, disable the Pull Scan setting using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan from PC.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Pull Scan field, click Disabled.
6. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
136
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
There are several ways you can use your computer to scan photos and documents on your machine. Use the
software applications we provide or use your favourite scanning application.
• Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
•
Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other Windows Applications
• Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
137
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan.
• Windows
Launch (Brother iPrint&Scan).
• Mac
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon.
The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears.
2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then select your model's
name from the list. Click OK.
3. Click OK again.
4. Click the Scan icon, and then follow the on-screen instructions to scan your documents.
Related Information
• Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
• Brother iPrint&Scan
138
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other
Windows Applications
Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other Windows Applications
You can use the Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE application for scanning.
• To download the Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE application, click (Brother Utilities), select Do More in
the left navigation bar, and then click PaperPort.
• Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE supports Windows 10 and Windows 11.
• For detailed instructions on using each application, click the application's Help menu, and then click
Getting Started Guide in the Help ribbon.
The instructions for scanning in these steps are for PaperPort
™
14SE. For other Windows applications, the
steps will be similar. PaperPort
™
14SE supports both TWAIN and WIA drivers; the TWAIN driver
(recommended) is used in these steps.
1. Load your document.
2. Start PaperPort
™
14SE.
Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort.
• Windows 10
Click
> Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort.
3. Click the Desktop menu, and then click Scan Settings in the Desktop ribbon.
The Scan or Get Photo panel appears on the left side of the screen.
4. Click Select.
5. From the available Scanners list, select your model with TWAIN: TW in the name.
6. Click OK.
7. Select the Display scanner dialog box checkbox in the Scan or Get Photo panel.
8. Click Scan.
The Scanner Setup dialog box appears.
139
9. Adjust the settings in the Scanner Setup dialog box, if needed.
10. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size.
To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910):
Automatic 2-sided scan is available only when using the ADF.
You cannot use PreScan to preview the scanned image.
11. Click PreScan to preview your image and crop unwanted portions before scanning.
12. Click Start.
The machine starts scanning.
Related Information
• Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
• TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)
140
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other
Windows Applications > TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)
TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)
• Note that the item names and assignable values will vary depending on the machine.
• The Contrast option is available only when selecting the Grey (Error Diffusion), True Grey, or 24bit
Colour options from the Color Setting drop-down list.
1. Scan
Select the Photo, Web, or Text option depending on the type of document you want to scan.
Scan (Image Type)
Resolution Colour Setting
Photo Use for scanning photo images. 300 x 300 dpi 24bit Colour
Web Use for attaching scanned
images to web pages.
100 x 100 dpi 24bit Colour
Text Use for scanning text
documents.
200 x 200 dpi Black & White
2. Resolution
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and
transfer time, but produce a finer higher quality scanned image.
3. Color Setting
Select from a range of scan colour depths.
• Black & White
Use for text or line art images.
• Grey (Error Diffusion)
Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated grey
images without using true grey dots. Black dots are arranged in a specific pattern to give a grey
appearance.)
• True Grey
Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256
shades of grey.
• 24bit Colour
Use to create an image with the most accurate colour reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million
colours to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.
141
4. Document Size
Select the exact size of your document from a selection of preset scan sizes.
If you select Custom, the Custom Document Size dialog box appears and you can specify the document
size.
5. Brightness
Set the brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the scanned
image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a
higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the field to set the
brightness level.
6. Contrast
Increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises dark
and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a value
in the field to set the contrast level.
7. 2-sided Scanning
Scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan feature, you must select the
Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option from the 2-sided Scanning drop-down list, so that when
you turn the pages, they are facing the way you want.
(MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910)
8. Advanced Settings
Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.
• Document Correction
- Auto Deskew
Set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned.
- Detect End of Page (ADF)
Detects the end of page and automatically adjusts the size of a page when the length of the document
scanned from the ADF is shorter than the selected document size.
- Margin Settings (available only for certain models)
Adjust the margins in your document.
- Rotate Image
Rotate the scanned image.
- Fill With Color
Fill in the edges on four sides of the scanned image using the selected colour and range.
- Skip Blank Page
Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results.
• Image Quality
- Background Processing
• Remove Bleed-through / Pattern
Prevent bleed-through.
• Remove Background Colour
Remove the base colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
- Colour Drop
Select a colour to remove from the scanned image.
- Edge Emphasis
Make the characters of the original sharper.
- Reduce Noise
Improve the quality of your scanned images with this selection. The Reduce Noise option is available
when selecting the 24bit Colour option and the 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or 600 x 600 dpi scan
resolution.
• B&W Image Quality
142
- Character Correction
• Blurred Character Correction
Correct the broken or incomplete characters of the original to make them easier to read.
• Boldface Formatting
Emphasise the characters of the original by making them bold.
- B&W Inversion
Invert black and white in the monochrome image.
• Feed Control
- Layout
Select the layout.
- Continuous Scan
Select this option to scan multiple pages. After a page is scanned, select whether to continue
scanning or finish.
Related Information
• Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other Windows Applications
143
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
The Windows Fax and Scan application is another option that you can use for scanning.
• Windows Fax and Scan uses the WIA scanner driver.
• To crop a portion of a page after pre-scanning a document, you must scan using the scanner glass (also
called the flatbed).
1. Load your document.
2. Launch Windows Fax and Scan.
3. Click File > New > Scan.
4. Select the scanner you want to use.
5. Click OK.
The New Scan dialog box appears.
6. Adjust the settings in the dialog box, if needed.
The scanner resolution can be set to a maximum of 1200 dpi. If you want to scan at higher resolutions, use
the Scanner Utility software from Brother Utilities.
If your machine supports 2-sided scanning and you want to scan both sides of your document, select Feeder
(Scan both sides) from the Source drop-down list
7. Click Scan.
The machine starts scanning the document.
144
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan > WIA Driver
Settings (Windows)
WIA Driver Settings (Windows)
Profile
Select the scan profile you want to use from the Profile drop-down list.
Source
Select the Flatbed, Feeder (Scan one side), or Feeder (Scan both sides) option from the drop-down list.
Paper size
The Paper size option is available if you select the Feeder (Scan one side) or Feeder (Scan both sides)
option from the Source drop-down list.
Colour format
Select a scan colour format from the Colour format drop-down list.
File type
Select a file format from the File type drop-down list.
Resolution (DPI)
Set a scanning resolution in the Resolution (DPI) field. Higher resolutions take more memory and transfer
time, but produce a finer higher quality scanned image.
Brightness
Set the brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the scanned
image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a
146
higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the field to set the
brightness level.
Contrast
Increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises dark
and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a value in
the field to set the contrast level.
Related Information
• Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
147
Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management > Set the Scan File Name Using
Web Based Management
Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management
Set up a file name for scanned data using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan File Name.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the File Name Style from the drop-down list.
6. If you selected the option to include the date in File Name Style field, select the date format from the drop-
down list.
7. In the Time field, select On to include the time information in the file name.
8. In the Counter field, select Continuous or Reset after each job.
If you select Reset after each job, duplication of file names may occur.
9. If you want to create a user-defined file name prefix, type a file name in the user-defined fields of each scan
function.
Do not use the following characters: ? / \ *
10. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
150
Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management > Set the Scan Job Email Report
Using Web Based Management
Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management
When you scan a document, the machine will send a scan job email report automatically to the registered email
address.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan Job e-mail report.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Administrator Address field, type the email address.
6. For the scan functions you want, select On to send a scan job email report.
7. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
151
Home > Copy > Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided)
Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided)
>> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
2. Do one of the following:
• Place the document face up in the ADF.
(If you are copying multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)
• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
NOTE
For important or fragile documents, use the machine’s scanner glass, not the ADF.
153
3. Press [Copy].
The LCD displays:
4. Change the copy settings, if needed.
• (Number of copies)
Enter the number of copies in one of the following ways:
- Press
or on the LCD.
- Press
to display a numeric keypad on the LCD, and then enter the number of copies. Press
[OK].
•
[Options]
Press
to change the copy settings for the next copy only.
- When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
- After you have finished choosing new options, you can save them by pressing the [Save as
Shortcut] button.
Current setting
Press the following display area to change these settings for the next copy only. The icon displayed varies
depending on the model.
- [Quality]
- [Tray Use]
- [Enlarge/Reduce]
5. Press [Start].
To stop copying, press .
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
154
2. Do one of the following:
• Place the document face up in the ADF.
(If you are copying multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)
• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
NOTE
For important or fragile documents, use the machine’s scanner glass, not the ADF.
155
3. Press [Copy].
The LCD displays:
4. Change the copy settings, if needed.
• (Number of copies)
Enter the number of copies in one of the following ways:
- Press
or on the LCD.
- Press to display a numeric keypad on the LCD, and then enter the number of copies. Press
[OK].
• [Options]
Press
to change the copy settings for the next copy only.
- When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
- After you have finished choosing new options, you can save them by pressing the [Save as
Shortcut] button.
• Quick Copy
Press > to access the preset copy settings.
• Current setting
Press the following display area to change these settings for the next copy only.
- [Quality]
- [Tray Use]
- [Enlarge/Reduce]
- [Density]
5. Press [Start].
To stop copying, press .
156
Home > Copy > Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided)
Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided)
Reduce the amount of paper you use by copying onto both sides of the paper.
• You must choose a 2-sided copy layout from the following options before you can start 2-sided copying.
• The layout of your original document determines which 2-sided copy layout you should choose.
• For important or fragile documents, use the machine’s scanner glass, not the ADF.
• To use the automatic 2-sided copy feature, you must load your document in the ADF.
• When you manually make 2-sided copies from a 2-sided document, use the scanner glass.
• Select A4 sized paper when using the 2‑sided copy option.
Portrait
2–sided to 2–sided
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
Landscape
2–sided to 2–sided
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
1. Load your document.
158
NOTE
• (For MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910) Load your 2-sided document in the ADF. If you use the scanner glass for your 2-sided
document, select the [1-sided⇒2-sided] option.
• (For DCP-L5510DW) Load your 2-sided document to the scanner glass.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [2-sided Copy].
5. Do one of the following:
• To make 2-sided copies of a 2-sided document, press [2-sided⇒2-sided].
• To make 2-sided copies from a 1-sided document, follow these steps:
a. To change the layout options, press [Layout], and then press [Long Edge Flip] or [Short
Edge Flip].
b. Press [1-sided⇒2-sided].
NOTE
(For DCP-L5510DW) If you select [2-sided⇒2-sided], you cannot use the ADF. Use the scanner
glass.
6. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
7. Press [Start].
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
For a 2-sided document, turn the sheet over along the long edge to scan the other side.
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].
Related Information
• Copy
159
Home > Copy > Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images
Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images
Select an enlargement or reduction ratio to resize your copied data.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [Enlarge/Reduce].
5. Press the option you want.
6. Do one of the following:
• If you select [Enlarge] or [Reduce], press the enlargement or reduction ratio you want to use.
• If you select [Custom(25-400%)], press
(backspace) to erase the displayed percentage, or press
d to move the cursor, and then enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from [25] to [400].
Press [OK].
• If you selected [100%] or [Auto], go to the next step.
• [Auto] sets the machine to calculate the reduction ratio that best fits the size of paper.
• [Auto] is only available when using the ADF.
7. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
8. Press [Start].
Related Information
• Copy
160
Home > Copy > Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature
Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature
The N in 1 copy feature saves paper by copying two or four pages of your document onto one page of the copy.
>> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press
[Options] > [Page Layout].
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the options, and then press the option you want.
Option Description
2in1(Portrait)
2in1(Landscape)
4in1(Portrait)
4in1(Landscape)
6. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
7. Press [Start].
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].
161
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [Page Layout].
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the options, and then press the option you want.
Option Description
2in1(Portrait)
2in1(Landscape)
4in1(Portrait)
4in1(Landscape)
6. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
7. Press [Start].
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].
Related Information
• Copy
162
Home > Copy > Interrupt a Print Job with a Copy Job
Interrupt a Print Job with a Copy Job
Related Models: MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Interrupt the current print job to make urgently needed copies.
NOTE
This function cannot interrupt printing received faxes. The machine can interrupt the following jobs:
• print jobs from your computer or mobile devices
• copy jobs
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Interrupt].
5. Press [Start].
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
6. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].
7. After the machine has printed copies, press [Interrupt] to restart a print job that is waiting.
Related Information
• Copy
163
Home > Copy > Copy an ID Card
Copy an ID Card
You may copy an identification card only to the extent permitted under applicable laws. For more detailed
information, see the Product Safety Guide.
>> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
1. Place your identification card face down near the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
1
1: Distance 4.0 mm or greater (top, left)
2. Press [Copy].
3. Press [ID].
4. Enter the number of copies.
5. Press [Start].
The machine scans one side of the identification card.
6. After the machine has scanned the first side, turn over the identification card.
7. Press [Continue] to scan the other side.
164
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Place your identification card face down near the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
1
1: Distance 4.0 mm or greater (top, left)
2. Press [Copy].
3. Press > on the touchscreen, and then select [2in1(ID)].
4. Enter the number of copies.
5. Press [Start].
The machine scans one side of the identification card.
6. After the machine has scanned the first side, turn over the identification card.
7. Press [Continue] to scan the other side.
Related Information
• Copy
165
Home > Copy > Copy Options
Copy Options
>> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
To change the Copy settings, press [Options].
Menu selections Options
Quality
Select the copy quality for your type of document.
Tray Use
Select a paper tray for the next copy.
Enlarge/Reduce 100%
-
Enlarge
Select an enlargement ratio for the
next copy.
Reduce
Select a reduction ratio for the next
copy.
Auto
Adjusts the copy size to fit the
paper size you have set.
Custom(25-400%)
Enter an enlargement or reduction
ratio.
Density
Increase the density to make the text darker.
Decrease the density to make the text lighter.
2-sided Copy
Select to copy on both sides of the paper.
1-sided → 2-sided
1
2
1
2
2-sided → 2-sided
1
2
1
2
The available options will vary depending on your model.
2-sided Copy Page Layout
(Available only under certain settings)
Select long edge binding or short edge binding.
Contrast
Increase the contrast to make an image clearer.
Decrease the contrast to make an image more subdued.
166
Menu selections Options
Stack/Sort
Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
Stack
1
1
2
2
Sort
2
1
2
1
Page Layout
Make N in 1 copies.
4 in 1
Auto Deskew
Set the machine to automatically correct skewed copies.
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
To change the Copy settings, press [Options].
Menu selections
Options
Quality
Select the copy quality for your type of document.
Tray Use
Select a paper tray for the next copy.
Enlarge/Reduce 100%
-
Enlarge
Select an enlargement ratio for the
next copy.
Reduce
Select a reduction ratio for the next
copy.
Auto
Adjusts the copy size to fit the
paper size you have set.
Custom(25-400%)
Enter an enlargement or reduction
ratio.
Density
Increase the density to make the text darker.
Decrease the density to make the text lighter.
2-sided Copy
Select to copy on both sides of the paper.
167
Menu selections Options
1-sided → 2-sided
1
2
1
2
2-sided → 2-sided
1
2
1
2
The available options will vary depending on your model.
2-sided Copy Page Layout
(Available only under certain settings)
Select long edge binding or short edge binding.
Contrast
Increase the contrast to make an image clearer.
Decrease the contrast to make an image more subdued.
Stack/Sort
Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
Stack
1
1
2
2
Sort
2
1
2
1
Page Layout
Make N in 1 copies.
4 in 1
Auto Deskew
Set the machine to automatically correct skewed copies.
Related Information
• Copy
168
Home > Fax > Send a Fax
Send a Fax
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
• Send a Fax
• Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
• Send a Fax Manually
• Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
• Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
• Send a Fax in Real Time
• Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
• Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
• Cancel a Fax in Progress
• Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
• Fax Options
170
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax
Send a Fax
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Do one of the following:
• Place the document face up in the ADF.
(If you are faxing multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)
• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Enter the fax number.
• Using the dial pad
Press the digits to enter the fax number.
• Using the Address Book
171
Press [Address Book], and then do one of the following:
- Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it.
- Press
[Search], and then enter the name or the first letter of the name and press [OK]. Press
the name you want to dial.
When finished, press [Apply].
• Using the Call History
Press [Call History], and then press the [Outgoing Call] option.
Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the fax number you want, and then press it.
To send a fax, press [Apply].
4. Press [Fax Start].
The machine scans and sends the document.
If you placed the document on the scanner glass, follow the instructions in the table.
Option Description
Yes
To scan the next page, press the Yes option, and then place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press OK to scan the page.
No
After you have scanned the last page, press the No option.
The machine sends the document.
To stop faxing, press , and then press .
When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?], press [Yes].
Related Information
• Send a Fax
172
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You must select a 2-sided scanning format before sending a 2-sided fax. Select either the Long Edge or Short
Edge option, depending on the layout of your document.
>> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [2-sided Fax].
4. Do one of the following:
• If your document is flipped on the long edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Long Edge] option.
• If your document is flipped on the short edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Short Edge] option.
5. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting the time, press to return to the fax sending screen.
6. Enter the fax number.
7. Press [Fax Start].
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Load your document.
2. Press
[Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [2-sided Fax].
4. Do one of the following:
• If your document is flipped on the long edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Long Edge] option.
• If your document is flipped on the short edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Short Edge] option.
5. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting the time, press to return to the fax sending screen.
6. Enter the fax number.
7. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
• Send a Fax
173
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax Manually
Send a Fax Manually
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Manual fax transmission lets you hear the dialling, ringing and fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Pick up the handset of the external telephone.
4. Dial the fax number you want to call.
5. When you hear the fax tone, press [Fax Start].
If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send].
6. Replace the handset of the external telephone.
Related Information
• Send a Fax
174
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
At the end of a conversation, you can send a fax to the other party before you both hang up.
1. Ask the other party to wait for fax tones (beeps) and then to press the Start button before hanging up.
2. Load your document.
3. Press [Fax Start].
If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send].
4. Replace the handset.
Related Information
• Send a Fax
175
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Use the Broadcasting feature to send the same fax to multiple fax numbers at the same time.
• The same broadcast can include Groups, Address Book numbers, and up to 50 manually dialled numbers.
• Address Book numbers must be stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast.
• Group numbers must also be stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast.
Group numbers include many stored Address Book numbers for easier dialling.
>> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
If you did not use any of the Address Book numbers for Groups, you can broadcast faxes to the maximum
number of locations supported by your machine. For information about the broadcasting locations, see
Related Information: Specifications.
1. Load your document.
2. Press
[Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Broadcasting].
4. Press [Add Number].
You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways:
• Press [Add Number] and enter a number using the LCD.
Press [OK].
If you want to broadcast using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press
[OK].
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email
server feature.)
• Press [Add from Address book]. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want
to add to the broadcast. Select the checkboxes of the broadcast. After you select all the numbers you
want, press [OK].
• Press [Search in Address book]. Press the name and press [OK]. Press the name or the first
letter of the name, and then press the number you want to add.
5. When finished, press [OK].
If your machine displays , press it.
6. Press [Fax Start].
176
• The machine’s available memory will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the
numbers used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the maximum number available, you will not be able
to use dual access and delayed fax.
• If the [Out of Memory] message appears, press or [Quit] to stop the job. If more than one
page has been scanned, press [Send Now] to send the portion that is in the machine's memory.
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If you do not use any of the Address Book numbers for Groups, you can broadcast faxes to as many as 350
different numbers.
1. Load your document.
2. Press
[Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Broadcasting].
4. Press [Add Number].
You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways:
• Press [Add Number] and enter a number using the LCD.
Press [OK].
If you want to broadcast using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press
[OK].
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email
server feature.)
• Press [Add from Address book]. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want
to add to the broadcast. Select the checkboxes of the broadcast. After you select all the numbers you
want, press [OK].
• Press [Search in Address book]. Press the name and press [OK]. Press the name or the first
letter of the name, and then press the number you want to add.
5. When finished, press [OK].
If your machine displays , press it.
6. Press [Fax Start].
• The machine’s available memory will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the
numbers used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the maximum number available, you will not be able
to use dual access and delayed fax.
• If the [Out of Memory] message appears, press or [Quit] to stop the job. If more than one
page has been scanned, press [Send Now] to send the portion that is in the machine's memory.
Related Information
• Send a Fax
• Cancel a Broadcast in Progress
Related Topics:
• Specifications
177
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) > Cancel a
Broadcast in Progress
Cancel a Broadcast in Progress
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
While broadcasting multiple faxes, you can cancel just the fax currently being transmitted or cancel the whole
broadcast job.
1. Press .
2. Press
.
3. Do one of the following:
• To cancel the entire broadcast, press [Entire Broadcast].
When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?], press [Yes].
• To cancel the current job, press the name or number being dialled on the LCD.
When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?], press [Yes].
• To exit without cancelling, press .
Related Information
• Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
178
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax in Real Time
Send a Fax in Real Time
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
When sending a fax, the machine scans the document into the memory before sending it. As soon as the
telephone line is free, the machine starts dialling and sending. If you want to send an important document
immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve the scan from its memory, turn [Real Time TX] on.
• If the memory is full and you are sending a fax from the ADF, the machine sends the document in real time
(even if [Real Time TX] is set to [Off]). If the memory is full, faxes from the scanner glass cannot be
sent until you clear some of the memory.
• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic redial feature does not work when using the scanner glass.
• If [Real Time TX] is set to on, the option to scan 2-sided documents is not available.
>> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Real Time TX].
4. Press [On] or [Off].
5. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
6. Enter the fax number.
7. Press [Fax Start].
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Load your document.
2. Press
[Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Real Time TX].
4. Press [On] or [Off].
5. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting, press to return the fax sending screen.
6. Enter the fax number.
7. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
• Send a Fax
179
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can store up to 50 faxes in the machine's memory to be sent within the next twenty-four hour period.
>> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Delayed Fax] > [Delayed Fax].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [Set Time].
6. To enter the time you want the fax to be sent, do one of the following:
• If you set [12h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 12-hour format.
Press [AM] or [PM], and then press [OK].
NOTE
If your machine displays , press it.
• If you set [24h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 24-hour format and then press
[OK].
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
NOTE
If your machine displays , press it.
7. Press [OK].
If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting the time, press to return to the fax sending screen.
8. Enter the fax number.
9. Press [Fax Start].
10. Press .
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Load your document.
2. Press
[Fax].
180
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Delayed Fax] > [Delayed Fax].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [Set Time].
6. To enter the time you want the fax to be sent, do one of the following:
• If you set [12h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 12-hour format.
Press
to select [AM] or [PM], and then press [OK]
NOTE
If your machine displays , press it.
• If you set [24h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 24-hour format and then press
[OK].
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
NOTE
If your machine displays , press it.
7. Press [OK].
If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting the time, press to return to the fax sending screen.
8. Enter the fax number.
9. Press [Fax Start].
10. Press .
Related Information
• Send a Fax
181
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can add a cover page to the next fax or every outgoing fax.
• This feature will not work unless you have set up your Station ID.
• The cover page includes your Station ID, a comment, and the name stored in the Address Book.
>> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Coverpage Setup] > [Coverpage Setup].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [Coverpage Note].
6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to choose the comment you want to use, and then press the comment.
Press .
7. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
8. Enter the fax number.
9. Press [Fax Start].
The cover page will be added to the next fax. If you want to add the cover page to every outgoing fax, set the
settings as the new default.
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Load your document.
2. Press
[Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Coverpage Setup] > [Coverpage Setup].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [Coverpage Note].
6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to choose the comment you want to use, and then press the comment.
Press
.
7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to choose the comment you want to use, and then press the comment.
Press
.
182
If your machine displays , press it.
8. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting, press to return the fax sending screen.
9. Enter the fax number.
10. Press [Fax Start].
The cover page will be added to the next fax. If you want to add the cover page to every outgoing fax, set the
settings as the new default.
Related Information
• Send a Fax
• Create a Cover Page Message
183
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax > Create a Cover Page Message
Create a Cover Page Message
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Create up to two custom cover page messages to add to outgoing faxes.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Send] > [Coverpage Note].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [5.] or [6.] to store your customised message.
3. Enter the cover page message using the LCD. Press [OK].
Press to select numbers, letters, or special characters.
If your machine displays , press .
4. Press .
Related Information
• Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
184
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Cancel a Fax in Progress
Cancel a Fax in Progress
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press .
2. Press while the machine is dialling or sending a fax.
The LCD displays [Cancel Job?].
3. Press an option in the table to cancel or continue the fax job in progress.
Option Description
Yes
The machine cancels sending the fax job.
No
The machine does not cancel the fax job.
Related Information
• Send a Fax
185
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can cancel a fax job before it is sent, while it is stored in the memory.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remaining Jobs].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the waiting jobs, and then press the job you want to
cancel.
3. Press [Cancel].
4. Press [Yes] to cancel the fax job or press [No] to exit without cancelling.
5. When finished, press .
Related Information
• Send a Fax
186
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Fax Options
Fax Options
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
>> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
To change the fax-sending settings, press [Options].
Option
Description
Fax Resolution
Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
The fax quality often can be improved by changing the Fax
Resolution.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast.
If your document is very light or very dark, changing the contrast
may improve the fax quality.
2-sided Fax
(For automatic 2-sided scanning models)
Set the 2-sided scanning format.
Glass Scan Size
Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the
document.
Broadcasting
Send the same fax message to more than one fax number at the
same time.
Preview
Preview a fax message before you send it.
Delayed Fax
Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent.
Real Time TX
Send a fax immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve
the scan from its memory.
Coverpage Setup
Set the machine to automatically send a pre-programmed cover
page.
Overseas Mode
Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas.
Call History
Select a number from the Call History.
Address Book
Select a number from the Address Book.
Set New Default
Save your settings as the default.
Factory Reset
Restore all settings back to the factory settings.
You can save the current settings by pressing [Save as Shortcut].
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
To change the fax-sending settings, press the [Options] button.
Option
Description
Fax Resolution
Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
The fax quality often can be improved by changing the Fax
Resolution.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast.
187
Option Description
If your document is very light or very dark, changing the contrast
may improve the fax quality.
2-sided Fax
(For automatic 2-sided scanning models)
Set the 2-sided scanning format.
Glass Scan Size
Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the
document.
Broadcasting
Send the same fax message to more than one fax number at the
same time.
Preview
Preview a fax message before you send it.
Delayed Fax
Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent.
Real Time TX
Send a fax immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve
the scan from its memory.
Coverpage Setup
Set the machine to automatically send a pre-programmed cover
page.
Overseas Mode
Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas.
Call History
Select a number from the Call History.
Address Book
Select a number from the Address Book.
Set New Default
Save your settings as the default.
Factory Reset
Restore all settings back to the factory settings.
You can save the current settings by pressing [Save as Shortcut].
Related Information
• Send a Fax
188
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings
Receive Mode Settings
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
• Receive Modes Overview
• Choose the Correct Receive Mode
• Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
• Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring)
• Set Fax Detect
• Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
• Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
• Set the Fax Receive Stamp
• Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation
190
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Receive Modes Overview
Receive Modes Overview
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Some receive modes answer automatically (Fax Only Mode and Fax/Tel Mode). You may want to change the
Ring Delay before using these modes.
Fax Only Mode
([Fax Only] in the machine's menu)
Fax Only Mode automatically answers every call as a fax.
Fax/Tel Mode
([Fax/Tel] in the machine's menu)
Fax/Tel Mode helps you manage incoming calls, by recognising whether they are fax or voice calls and
handling them in the following ways:
• Faxes will be received automatically.
• Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you to pick up the call. The F/T ring is a fast pseudo/double-ring
made by your machine.
Manual Mode
([Manual] in the machine's menu)
Manual Mode turns off all automatic answering operations unless you are using the BT Call Sign feature.
To receive a fax in Manual Mode, lift the handset of the external telephone connected to the machine.
When you hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press the buttons in the table to receive a fax. Use the Fax
Detect feature to receive faxes when you have lifted a handset on the same line as the machine.
Applicable Models
To receive a fax
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Fax Start > Receive
External TAD Mode
([External TAD] in the machine's menu)
External TAD Mode lets an external answering device manage your incoming calls.
Incoming calls will be handled in the following ways:
• Faxes will be received automatically.
• Voice callers can record a message on the external TAD.
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
191
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Choose the Correct Receive Mode
Choose the Correct Receive Mode
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You must choose a Receive Mode depending on the external devices and telephone services you have on your
line.
By default, your machine will automatically receive any faxes that are sent to it. The diagram below will help you
select the correct mode.
Do you want to use the telephone feature of your machine (if available), an external
telephone or external telephone answering device connected on the same line as
the machine?
No
Fax Only Mode
Yes
Are you using the voice message function of an external telephone answering
device?
Yes
External TAD Mode
No
Do you want the machine to answer fax and telephone calls automatically?
Yes
Fax/Tel Mode
No
Manual Mode
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Receive Mode].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
(U.K. only) If you cannot change the [Receive Mode] option, make sure the BT Call Sign feature is set to
Off.
2. Press [Fax Only], [Fax/Tel], [External TAD], or [Manual].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
Related Topics:
• Telephone and Fax Problems
192
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine
Answers (Ring Delay)
Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
When somebody calls your machine, you will hear the normal telephone ring sound. The number of rings is set in
the Ring Delay option.
• The Ring Delay setting sets the number of times the machine rings before it answers in the Fax Only and
Fax/Tel Modes.
• If you have external or extension telephones on the same line as the machine, choose the maximum
number of rings.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Ring Delay].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the number of rings you want.
If you select [0], the machine will answer immediately and the line will not ring at all (available only for
some countries).
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
Related Topics:
• Telephone and Fax Problems
193
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring)
Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
When you set the Receive Mode to Fax/Tel Mode, if the call is a fax, your machine will automatically receive it.
However, if it is a voice call, the machine will sound the F/T ring (fast double-ring) for the time you set in the F/T
Ring Time option. When you hear the F/T ring, it means that a voice caller is on the line.
The F/T Ring Time feature works when you set Fax/Tel Mode as the Receive Mode.
Because the F/T ring is made by the machine, extension and external telephones will not ring; however, you can
still answer the call on any telephone.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [F/T Ring Time].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press how long you want the machine to ring to alert you that you have a voice call.
3. Press .
Even if the caller hangs up during the pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will continue to ring for the set
time.
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
194
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set Fax Detect
Set Fax Detect
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If Fax Detect is On: The machine receives a fax call automatically, even if you answer the call. When you
see [Receiving] on the LCD or when you hear “chirps” through the handset you are using, just replace
the handset. Your machine will do the rest.
If Fax Detect is Off: If you are at the machine and answer a fax call by lifting the handset, press the
buttons in the following table to receive the fax. If you answered at an extension or external telephone,
press *51.
Applicable Models
To receive a fax
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910
Fax > Fax Start > Receive
• If this feature is set to [On], but your machine does not connect a fax call when you lift an extension
or external telephone handset, press the remote activation code *51.
• If you send faxes from a computer on the same telephone line and the machine intercepts them, set
Fax Detect to [Off].
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Fax Detect].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
195
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If you enable the auto reduction function, the machine reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on your paper.
The machine calculates the reduction ratio by using the fax page size and your Paper Size setting.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Auto Reduction].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
196
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Your machine prints received faxes on both sides of the paper when [2-sided] is set to [On].
• Use A4 size paper (60 to 105 g/m
2
) for this function.
• When 2-sided printing is enabled, incoming faxes are automatically reduced to fit the paper in the paper
tray.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [2-sided].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
197
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the Fax Receive Stamp
Set the Fax Receive Stamp
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can set the machine to print the received date and time at the top centre of each received fax page.
• Make sure you have set the current date and time on the machine.
• The received time and date will not appear when using Internet Fax.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Fax Rx Stamp].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
198
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone
Conversation
Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If you are speaking on the telephone connected to your machine and the other party is also speaking on a
telephone connected to his fax machine, at the end of the conversation, the other party can send you a fax
before you both hang up.
Your machine's ADF must be empty.
1. Ask the other party to place the document in their machine and to press Start or Send.
2. When you hear the CNG tones (slowly repeating beeps), press [Fax Start].
If the machine is in Automatic Redial, wait until it is finished and try again.
3. Press [Receive] to receive a fax.
4. Replace the external handset.
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
199
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options
Memory Receive Options
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Use the Memory Receive options to direct incoming faxes while you are away from the machine. You can use
only one Memory Receive option at a time.
Memory Receive can be set to:
• PC-Fax Receive
• Fax Forwarding
• Fax Storage
• Forward to Cloud (The machine forwards your received faxes to online services.)
• Forward to Network (The machine forwards your received faxes to a network destination.)
• Off
• Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)
• Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
• Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
• Change Memory Receive Options
• Turn Memory Receive Off
• Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
• Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
200
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received
Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)
Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer
(Windows only)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Turn the PC-Fax Receive feature on to automatically store incoming faxes to your machine's memory, and then
send them to your computer. Use your computer to view and store these faxes.
To transfer the received faxes to your computer you must have the PC-FAX Receiving software running on
your computer.
Even if you have turned computer off (at night or on the weekend, for example), your machine will receive and
store your faxes in its memory.
When you start your computer and the PC-FAX Receiving software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to
your computer automatically.
If you selected [Backup Print: On], the machine will also print the fax.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [PC Fax Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On].
3. Press [OK], and then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• PC-Fax Receive is not available for macOS.
• If you get an error message and the machine cannot print the faxes in the memory, you can use this
setting to transfer your faxes to your computer.
4. Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer you want to receive faxes if you are on a network, and then
press [OK].
5. Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off].
6. Press
.
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
201
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Use the Fax Forwarding feature to automatically forward your incoming faxes to another machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Fax Forward].
3. Do one of the following:
• Press [Manual] to enter the recipient's fax number (up to 20 digits) or email address using the LCD.
Press [OK].
To forward a fax using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK].
Select the file type you want.
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email
server feature.)
• Press [Address Book].
Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where you want
your faxes to be forwarded.
Press the fax number or email address you want.
Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off]. If you select [Backup Print: On], the
machine also prints a copy of received faxes at your machine.
4. Press .
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
202
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Use the Fax Storage feature to store incoming faxes in the machine's memory. Retrieve your stored fax
messages from your fax machine when you are at another location using the Remote Retrieval commands. Your
machine will print a backup copy of each stored fax.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Fax Storage].
Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off]. If you select [Backup Print: On], the
machine also prints a copy of received faxes at your machine.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
203
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Change Memory Receive Options
Change Memory Receive Options
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If received faxes are in your machine's memory when you change the Remote Fax operations, the LCD will ask
you one of the following questions:
If received faxes have been printed automatically, the LCD displays [Erase all documents?]
• Do one of the following:
- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be erased before the setting changes.
- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged.
If unprinted faxes are in the machine's memory, the LCD displays [Print all faxes?]
• Do one of the following:
- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be printed before the setting changes.
- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be printed and the setting will be unchanged.
If received faxes are left in the machine’s memory when you change to [PC Fax Receive] from another
option ([Fax Forward] or [Fax Storage]).
• Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer if you are on a network, and then press [OK]. You will be asked
if you want to turn on Backup Print.
The LCD displays:
[Send Fax to PC?]
- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be sent to your computer before the setting changes.
- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged.
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
204
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Turn Memory Receive Off
Turn Memory Receive Off
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Turn Memory Receive off if you do not want the machine to save or transfer incoming faxes.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Off].
The LCD displays options if there are received faxes still in your machine's memory.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
205
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If you select [Fax Storage], you can still print a fax from the machine's memory.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Print Document].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
206
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network
Destination
Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Set up a profile to forward incoming faxes directly to a folder on an FTP, SFTP, CIFS, or SharePoint server.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Network Profile.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the FTP, SFTP, Network, or SharePoint option, and then click Submit.
6. Set up the profile for your server, using one of the following tables:
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
FTP
Option
Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64
characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The
default setting is port 21. In most cases, this setting does not need to be
changed.
Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the FTP server.
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
SSL/TLS Set the SSL/TLS option to forward securely using SSL/TLS
communication. Change the CA Certificate setting, if needed.
207
Option Description
Store Directory Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the FTP server
where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at
the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
Passive Mode Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server
and network firewall configuration. The default setting is on. In most
cases, this setting does not need to be changed.
SFTP
Option
Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64
characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the SFTP server.
Auth. Method Select Password or Public Key.
Password When you select Password for the Auth. Method option, type the
password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you
typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype
password field.
Client Key Pair When you select Public Key for the Auth. Method option, select the
authentication type.
Server Public Key Select the authentication type.
Store Directory Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the SFTP server
where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at
the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The
default setting is port 22. In most cases, this setting does not need to be
changed.
Network
Option
Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric
characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Network Folder Path Type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to
forward incoming faxes.
Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, Kerberos, or
NTLMv2.
Username Type a user name (up to 96 characters) that has permission to write
data to the folder specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the
user name is part of a domain, type the user name in one of the
following styles:
user@domain
domain\user
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user
name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in
the Retype password field.
Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must
type the Kerberos Server Address (for example:
kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
208
You must configure the SNTP (network time server) or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly
on the control panel. The time must match the time used by the Kerberos Server and CIFS Server.
SharePoint
Option Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
SharePoint Site Address Copy and paste the full destination address shown in the address bar of
your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared
%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or the IP address (for example:
http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx).
SSL/TLS If the address in the SharePoint Site Address field starts with "https://",
you can verify the server certificate by selecting the Verify Server
Certificate checkbox.
Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, NTLMv2, Kerberos, or
Basic. If you choose Auto, the authentication method will be detected
automatically.
Username Type the user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission
to write data to the folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address
field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of
the following styles:
• user@domain
• domain\user
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type
the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up
to 64 characters).
7. Click Submit.
8. To set the Fax Forward feature, go to the navigation menu, and then click Fax > Remote Fax Options.
9. Select Forward to Network from the Fwd/Store/Cloud/Network drop-down list.
10. Select the file type you want to use.
11. To print a backup copy of incoming faxes, select On for Backup print.
12. Select the profile you want to use from the Network Profile drop-down list.
13. Type a three-digit Remote Access Code in the Remote Access Code field, if needed.
• You can use the numbers 0 through 9, *, or # for the Remote Access Code.
• The Remote Access Code must be different from the remote codes for the Fax features.
14. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
• Network Features
209
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval
Remote Fax Retrieval
Use Remote Retrieval to call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine, and use a remote
access code and remote commands to retrieve fax messages.
• Set a Remote Access Code
• Use Your Remote Access Code
• Remote Retrieval Commands
• Forward Faxes Remotely
• Change the Fax Forwarding Number
210
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Set a Remote Access Code
Set a Remote Access Code
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Set a Remote Access Code to access and control your machine even when you are away from it.
Before you can use the remote access and retrieval features, you must set up your own code. The factory
default code is the inactive code (---*).
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remote Access].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter a three-digit code using the numbers [0] to [9], [*] or [#] using the LCD (the preset '*' cannot be
changed), and then press [OK].
• DO NOT use the same code used for your Remote Activation Code (*51) or Remote Deactivation Code
(#51).
• To make your code inactive, press and hold to restore the inactive setting (---*), and then press
[OK].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Remote Fax Retrieval
211
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Use Your Remote Access Code
Use Your Remote Access Code
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone.
2. When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *).
3. The machine signals if it has received messages:
• One long beep -- Fax messages
• No beeps -- No messages
4. When the machine gives two short beeps, enter a command.
• The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30 seconds to enter a command.
• The machine will beep three times if you enter an invalid command.
5. Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you are finished.
6. Hang up.
This function may not be available in some countries or supported by your local telephone company.
Related Information
• Remote Fax Retrieval
212
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Remote Retrieval Commands
Remote Retrieval Commands
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Use the Remote Commands in this table to access fax commands and options when you are away from your
machine. When you call the machine and enter your remote access code (three digits followed by *), the system
will sound two short beeps and you must enter a Remote Command (column 1), followed by one of the options
(column 2) for that command.
Remote
Command
Option Description
95 Change the Fax Forwarding, or Fax
Storage settings
1 OFF You can select Off after you retrieve or erase all
your messages.
2 Fax Forwarding One long beep means the change is accepted. If
you hear three short beeps, you cannot make a
change because one of the settings may not be
configured correctly (for example, a Fax
Forwarding number has not been registered). You
can register your Fax Forwarding number by
entering 4. After you register the number, Fax
Forwarding will work.
4 Fax Forwarding number
6 Fax Storage
96 Retrieve a fax
2 Retrieve all faxes Enter the fax number of a remote fax machine to
receive stored fax messages.
3 Erase faxes from memory If you hear one long beep, fax messages have
been erased from memory.
97 Check the receiving status
1 Fax Check whether your machine has received any
faxes. If yes, you will hear one long beep. If not,
you will hear three short beeps.
98 Change the Receive Mode
1 External TAD One long beep means the change has been
accepted.
2 Fax/Tel
3 Fax Only
90 Exit Press 9 0 to stop remote retrieval. Wait for the long
beep, then hang up.
Related Information
• Remote Fax Retrieval
213
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Forward Faxes Remotely
Forward Faxes Remotely
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine to forward incoming faxes to another machine.
You must turn Fax Storage on to use this feature.
1. Dial your fax number.
2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one
long beep, you have messages.
3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 6 2.
4. Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine where you
want your fax messages sent, followed by # # (up to 20 digits).
You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause.
5. Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will call the other fax machine, which will then print
your fax messages.
Related Information
• Remote Fax Retrieval
214
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Change the Fax Forwarding Number
Change the Fax Forwarding Number
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can change your fax forwarding number from another touch-tone telephone or fax machine.
1. Dial your fax number.
2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one
long beep, you have messages.
3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 5 4.
4. Wait for the long beep, enter the new number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax machine you want your fax
messages forwarded to using the dial pad, then enter # #.
You will hear one long beep.
You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause.
5. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when you have finished.
6. Hang up after you hear your machine beep.
Related Information
• Remote Fax Retrieval
215
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel
Receive Mode
Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will use the F/T Ring (fast double-ring) to alert you to pick up a voice
call.
If you are at the machine, lift the external telephone’s handset, and then press the button in the following table to
answer:
Applicable Models
To pick up a voice call
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910
Pickup
If you are at an extension telephone, lift the handset during the F/T Ring, and then press #51 between the fast
double-rings. If no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the machine by
pressing *51.
Related Information
• Voice Operations
218
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Store Address Book Numbers
Store Address Book Numbers
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].
2. Do the following steps:
a. Press [Edit].
b. Press [Add New Address].
c. Press [Name].
d. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters), and then press [OK].
e. Press [Address].
f. Enter the fax or telephone number using the LCD (up to 20 digits), and then press [OK].
To store an email address to use with Internet Fax or Scan to Email server, press and enter the
email address and press [OK].
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email
server feature.)
g. Press [OK].
To store another Address Book number, repeat these steps.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Store Fax Numbers
• Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book
220
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Store Address Book
Numbers > Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book
Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can copy numbers from your Outgoing Call history and save them in your Address Book.
1. Press [Fax] > [Call History] > [Outgoing Call].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it.
3. Press [Edit] > [Add to Address Book] > [Name].
To delete the number, press [Edit] > [Delete]. Press [Yes] to confirm.
4. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters).
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [OK] to confirm the fax or telephone number you want to store.
7. Press
.
Related Information
• Store Address Book Numbers
221
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Change or Delete Address
Book Names or Numbers
Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit].
2. Do one of the following:
Press [Change] to edit the names or fax or telephone numbers.
Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to change, and then press it.
- To change the name, press [Name]. Enter the new name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then
press [OK].
- To change the fax or telephone number, press [Address]. Enter the new fax or telephone number (up to
20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
Press [OK] to finish.
How to enter text:
To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then
press .
Enter the new character.
To delete numbers, press [Delete].
Select the fax or telephone numbers you want to delete by pressing them to display a check mark, and then
press [OK].
3. Press
.
Related Information
• Store Fax Numbers
222
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups
Set up Broadcasting Groups
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
A broadcasting group can be stored in the Address Book. It allows you to send the same fax message to many
fax numbers.
Store fax numbers in the Address Book and add them to a broadcasting group as needed.
Applicable Models
Maximum number of groups Maximum numbers in a group
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
20 299
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].
2. Do the following steps:
a. Press [Edit] > [Setup Groups] > [Name].
b. Enter the Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
c. Press [Add/Delete].
d. Add Address Book numbers to the Group by pressing them to display a check mark, and then press
[OK].
e. Read and confirm the displayed list of names and numbers you have chosen, and then press [OK] to
save your Group.
To store another Group for broadcasting, repeat these steps.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
• Change a Broadcasting Group Name
• Delete a Broadcasting Group
• Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member
223
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups > Change a
Broadcasting Group Name
Change a Broadcasting Group Name
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Press [Name].
4. Enter the new Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
How to change the stored name:
To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then
press .
Enter the new character.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press .
Related Information
• Set up Broadcasting Groups
224
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups > Delete a Broadcasting
Group
Delete a Broadcasting Group
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Delete].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press .
Related Information
• Set up Broadcasting Groups
225
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups > Add or Delete a
Broadcasting Group Member
Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Add/Delete] option, and then press [Add/Delete].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to add or delete.
5. Do the following for each number you want to change:
• To add a number to the Group, press the checkbox of the number to add a check mark.
• To delete a number from the Group, press the checkbox of the number to remove the check mark.
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [OK].
8. Press .
Related Information
• Set up Broadcasting Groups
226
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Combine Address Book Numbers
Combine Address Book Numbers
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Sometimes you may want to choose from several long-distance carriers when you send a fax. Rates may vary
depending on the time and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access codes of long-
distance carriers and credit card numbers as Address Book numbers.
You can store these long dialling sequences by dividing them and setting them up as separate Address Book
numbers in any combination. You can even include manual dialling using the dial pad.
For example: You might have stored '01632' and '960555' in your machine as shown in the following table.
Applicable Models
'01632' stored in '960555' stored in
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910
Address Book: Brother 1 Address Book: Brother 2
You can use them both to dial '01632-960555' by using the following procedure.
>> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 1.
3. Press the number.
4. Press [Apply].
5. Press
[Options].
6. Press a or b to display the [Address Book] option, and then press it.
7. Press [OK].
8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 2.
9. Press the number.
10. Press [Apply].
11. Press [Fax Start].
The machine will dial '01632-960555'.
To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number by pressing it using the LCD. For
example, to change the number to '01632-960556', you could enter the number (Brother 1: 01632) using the
Address Book, press [Apply], and then enter 960556 using the LCD.
If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the dialling sequence, create a pause in the
number by pressing [Pause].
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 1.
3. Press the number.
4. Press [Apply].
227
5. Press [Address Book].
6. Press [OK].
7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 2.
8. Press the number.
9. Press [Apply].
10. Press [Fax Start].
The machine will dial '01632-960555'.
To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number by pressing it using the LCD. For
example, to change the number to '01632-960556', you could enter the number (Brother 1: 01632) using the
Address Book, press [Apply], and then enter 960556 using the LCD.
If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the dialling sequence, create a pause in the
number by pressing [Pause].
Related Information
• Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
228
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices
Telephone Services and External Devices
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
• Use BT Call Sign
• Set the Telephone Line Type
• External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
• External and Extension Telephones
• Multi-line Connections (PBX)
229
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Use BT Call Sign
Use BT Call Sign
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
This feature lets you use the BT Call Sign subscriber service which allows you to have at least two separate
telephone numbers on one telephone line. Each telephone number has its own distinctive ringing pattern, so you
know which telephone number is ringing. This is one way you can have a separate telephone number for your
machine.
Your machine has a BT Call Sign compatible distinctive ringing function, allowing you to dedicate a second
telephone number (on the same telephone line) just for receiving faxes.
• This feature is available only in the U.K.
• You can switch BT Call Sign Off temporarily, then turn it back on. When you get a new fax number,
make sure you reset this function. This machine will automatically answer incoming calls that use your
new fax number.
• When you set the BT Call Sign feature to On, the receive mode is set to [Manual] automatically. The
[Manual] mode will not respond to incoming telephone calls, because the number you use for
telephone calls will use the normal ring pattern.
Related Information
• Telephone Services and External Devices
• Enable the Machine to Work with BT Call Sign
230
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Use BT Call Sign > Enable the Machine to Work
with BT Call Sign
Enable the Machine to Work with BT Call Sign
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
• This feature is available only in the U.K.
• This feature will only work with your external phone.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Miscellaneous] > [BT Call Sign].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
If you turn BT Call Sign off, the receive mode stays in Manual mode. You will need to set the receive mode again.
Related Information
• Use BT Call Sign
231
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Set the Telephone Line Type
Set the Telephone Line Type
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If you are connecting the machine to a line that features PBX or ISDN to send and receive faxes, you must select
a Telephone Line Type that matches your line's features.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Phone Line Set].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Normal], [PBX], or [ISDN].
3. If you selected [PBX], do the following:
a. Press [On] or [Always].
• If you select [On], the machine dials a prefix number before the fax number only when [R] is pressed.
• If you select [Always], the machine always dials a prefix number before the fax number.
b. Press [Dial Prefix].
c. Enter the prefix number using the LCD, and then press [OK].
Use the numbers 0 to 9, #, * and !. You cannot use ! with any other numbers or characters.
4. Press .
Related Information
• Telephone Services and External Devices
• PBX and TRANSFER
232
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Set the Telephone Line Type > PBX and
TRANSFER
PBX and TRANSFER
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
The machine's [Phone Line Set] default setting is [Normal], which lets the machine connect to a standard
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) line. However, many offices use a central telephone system or
Private Branch Exchange (PBX). Your machine can be connected to most types of PBX. The machine's recall
feature supports timed break recall only (TBR). TBR will work with most PBX systems allowing you to gain
access to an outside line, or transfer calls to another extension. To use this feature, press the button in the table.
Applicable Models
To use the machine's recall feature
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
R
Assign a telephone number to the button stored in the Address Book (One Touch Dial and Speed Dial in
some models). When programming the Address Book number (One Touch Dial number and Speed Dial
number in some models), press the button first (the LCD displays ‘!’), then enter the telephone number. This
avoids having to press the button each time before you dial from the Address Book (One Touch Dial or
Speed Dial). Your Telephone Line Type must be set to PBX on the machine to use this feature.
Related Information
• Set the Telephone Line Type
233
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Connect an external Telephone Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as your machine. When the TAD
answers a call, your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine. If it hears
them it will take over the call and receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will let your TAD take a voice
message and the LCD will show [Telephone].
The external TAD must answer within four rings (we recommend setting it to two rings). This is because your
machine cannot hear the CNG tones until the external TAD has picked up the call. The sending machine will
send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds longer. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your
external TAD if it needs more than four rings to activate it.
1
1
(Example for U.K.)
1 TAD
IMPORTANT
DO NOT connect a TAD elsewhere on the same telephone line.
If you have problems receiving faxes, reduce the Ring Delay setting on your external TAD.
Related Information
• Telephone Services and External Devices
• Connect an External TAD
• Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
234
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering
Device) > Connect an External TAD
Connect an External TAD
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Set your external TAD to the minimum number of rings allowed. For more information, contact your telephone
provider. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting does not apply.)
2. Record an outgoing message on your external TAD.
3. Set the TAD to answer calls.
4. Set the Receive Mode on your machine to [External TAD].
Related Information
• External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
235
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering
Device) > Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. This allows your machine time to listen for
fax tones.
2. Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
3. End your 20-second message by giving your Remote Activation Code for those who may need to send faxes
manually. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and start to send a fax.”
NOTE
We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial five-second silence because the machine cannot hear
fax tones over a loud voice. You may try leaving out this pause, but if your machine has trouble receiving
faxes, then you should re-record the OGM to include it.
Related Information
• External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
236
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones
External and Extension Telephones
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
• Connect an External or Extension Telephone
• Operation from External and Extension Telephones
• Use Extension Telephones
• If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
• Use the Remote Codes
237
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Connect
an External or Extension Telephone
Connect an External or Extension Telephone
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can connect a separate telephone to your machine as shown in the diagram below.
1
2
(Example for U.K.)
1 Extension telephone
2 External telephone
Make sure you use an external telephone with a cable no more than three metres long.
Related Information
• External and Extension Telephones
238
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Operation
from External and Extension Telephones
Operation from External and Extension Telephones
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If you answer a fax call at an extension or an external telephone, you can make your machine take the call by
using the Remote Activation Code. When you press the Remote Activation Code *51, the machine starts to
receive the fax.
If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at an
extension telephone by pressing the Remote Deactivation Code #51.
If you answer a call and no one is on the line:
You are receiving a manual fax.
Press *51 and wait for the chirp or until the LCD displays [Receiving], and then hang up.
You can also use the Fax Detect feature to make your machine automatically take the call.
Related Information
• External and Extension Telephones
239
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use
Extension Telephones
Use Extension Telephones
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Your premises may already be wired with parallel extension telephones, or you may plan to add extension
telephones to your line, as well as your machine. While the simplest arrangement is a straightforward parallel
connection, there are some problems with this. The most obvious is inadvertent interruption of a fax transmission
caused by someone picking up an extension telephone to make an outgoing call. Also, the remote activation
code feature may not operate reliably in such a simple configuration.
This machine may also be set to make a delayed transmission (a transmission at a preset time). This preset job
may coincide with someone picking up an extension handset.
These problems can be eliminated, if you arrange modification of your extension wiring circuit, such that
extension devices are connected “downstream” of your machine in a master/slave configuration (see Figure 1).
In this configuration the machine can always detect whether a telephone is in use. Thus it will not attempt to use
the line during that time. This is known as “telephone off-hook detection.”
The inadvisable configuration is shown in figure 2, and the recommended master/slave configuration is shown in
figure 1.
This new connection configuration can be arranged by contacting BT, Kingston upon Hull Telecommunications,
your PBX maintainer, or a qualified telephone installation company. The extension telephone circuit should be
terminated on a normal modular plug (BT 431A style), which in turn should be put into the modular socket of the
white “T”-shaped connector provided as part of the line cord assembly.
Connection of Extension Sockets: Recommended (Figure 1)
FAX
1
1
2
3
1. Extension socket
2. Master socket
3. Incoming line
Connection of Extension Sockets: Not Recommended (Figure 2)
FAX
1 2
1
3
1. Extension socket
2. Master socket
3. Incoming line
The fax machine must be plugged into the master socket.
These telephones are now connected as external devices, because they are connected to the machine via
the T-connector.
Related Information
• External and Extension Telephones
240
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > If You Use
a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is connected to the telephone line cord and you typically carry the
cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during the Ring Delay.
If you let the machine answer first, you must go to the machine so you can press [Pickup] or Tel/R to transfer
the call to the cordless handset.
Related Information
• External and Extension Telephones
241
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use the
Remote Codes
Use the Remote Codes
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Remote Activation Code
If you answer a fax call on an extension or external telephone, you can tell your machine to receive it by pressing
the Remote Activation Code *51. Wait for the chirping sounds, and then replace the handset.
If you answer a fax call at the external telephone, you can make the machine receive the fax by pressing the
buttons in the following table:
Applicable Models
To make the machine receive a fax
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Fax Start and then Receive
Remote Deactivation Code
If you receive a voice call and the machine is in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T ring (fast double-ring) after
the initial ring delay. If you pick up the call on an extension telephone you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing
#51 (make sure you press this between the rings).
If the machine answers a voice call and fast double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the
external telephone by pressing the button in the following table:
Applicable Models
To pick up a voice call
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Pickup
Related Information
• External and Extension Telephones
• Change the Remote Codes
242
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use the
Remote Codes > Change the Remote Codes
Change the Remote Codes
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
The preset Remote Activation Code is *51. The preset Remote Deactivation Code is #51. If you are always
disconnected when accessing your External TAD remotely, try changing the three-digit remote codes using the
numbers 0-9, * or #.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Remote Codes].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Do one of the following:
• To change the Remote Activation Code, press [Act.Code]. Enter the new code, and then press [OK].
• To change the Remote Deactivation Code, press [Deact.Code]. Enter the new code, and then press
[OK].
• If you do not want to change the Codes, go to the next step.
• To turn off (or turn on) the Remote Codes, press [Remote Codes], and then press [Off] (or [On]).
3. Press .
Related Information
• Use the Remote Codes
243
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Multi-line Connections (PBX)
Multi-line Connections (PBX)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
We suggest you ask the company that installed your PBX to connect your machine. If you have a multi-line
system we suggest you ask the installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the
machine from being activated each time the system receives telephone calls. If all incoming calls are answered
by a switchboard operator, we recommend setting the Receive Mode to [Manual].
We cannot guarantee that your machine will operate correctly under all circumstances when connected to a PBX.
Any difficulties with sending or receiving faxes should be reported first to the company that handles your PBX.
Related Information
• Telephone Services and External Devices
244
Home > Fax > Fax Reports > Print a Transmission Verification Report
Print a Transmission Verification Report
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can use the Transmission Verification Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists the receiving
party's name or fax number, the time and date of transmission, duration of transmission, number of pages sent,
and whether or not the transmission was successful.
There are several settings available for the Transmission Verification Report:
On
Prints a report after every fax you send.
On(+Image)
Prints a report after every fax you send.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Error only
Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
Error only (+Image)
Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Off
Your machine does not print any reports after sending faxes.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [XMIT Report].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the option you want.
If you select [On(+Image)] or [Error only(+Image)], the image will not appear on the Transmission
Verification Report if Real Time Transmission is set to [On].
3. Press .
If the transmission is successful, OK appears next to RESULT on the Transmission Verification Report. If the
transmission is not successful, NG appears next to RESULT.
Related Information
• Fax Reports
246
Home > Fax > Fax Reports > Print a Fax Journal
Print a Fax Journal
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can set the machine to print a Fax Journal at specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7
days).
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [Journal Period] >
[Journal Period].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the interval you want, and then press it.
• Every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days
The machine will print the report at the selected time and then erase all reception and transmission log
data from its memory. If the machine's memory becomes full with 200 log data before the time you
selected has passed, the machine will print the Journal early and then erase all jobs from the memory. If
you want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it without erasing the log data from the
memory.
• Every 50 Faxes
The machine will print the Journal when the machine has stored 50 reception and transmission log data.
3. If you selected every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, do one of the following to enter the time to start printing:
• If you selected [12h Clock] as the format in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time (in 12-hour
format) using the LCD. Press
to select [AM] or [PM].
Press [OK].
• If you set [24h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, press [Time], and then enter the time (in 24-
hour format) using the LCD.
Press [OK].
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
4. If you selected [Every 7 Days], press [Day].
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Every Monday], [Every Tuesday], [Every
Wednesday], [Every Thursday], [Every Friday], [Every Saturday] or [Every Sunday] option,
and then press the first day of the 7-day countdown.
6. Press
.
Related Information
• Fax Reports
247
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows)
PC-FAX Overview (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Reduce paper consumption and save time by using the Brother PC-FAX software to send faxes directly from
your computer.
• Configure PC-FAX (Windows)
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
250
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure PC-FAX
(Windows)
Configure PC-FAX (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Before sending faxes using PC-FAX, personalise the send options in each tab of the PC-FAX Setup dialog box.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Setup Sending.
The PC-FAX Setup dialog box appears.
3. Do one of the following:
• Click the User Information tab, and then type your user information in the fields.
Each Microsoft account can have its own customised User Information screen for custom fax headers and
cover pages.
• Click the Sending tab, and then type the number needed to access an outside line (if needed) in the
Outside line access field. Select the Include header checkbox to include the header information.
• Click the Address Book tab, and then select the address book you want to use for PC-FAX from the
Select Address Book drop-down list.
4. Click OK.
Related Information
• PC-FAX Overview (Windows)
251
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows)
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Add, edit, and delete members and groups to personalise your Address Book.
• Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
• Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
• Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
• Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
• Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
• Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
252
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Add new people and their fax information to the PC-Fax Address Book if you want to send a fax using the
Brother PC-Fax software.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click to add new members.
The Address Book Member Setup dialog box appears.
4. Type the member's information in the corresponding fields. The Name field is required.
5. Click OK.
Related Information
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
253
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Create a group to broadcast the same PC-FAX to several recipients at once.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click to add a new group.
The Address Book Group Setup dialog box appears.
4. Type the name of the new group in the Group Name field.
5. In the Available Names field, select each name you want to include in the group, and then click Add >>.
Members added to the group appear in the Group Members box.
6. When finished, click OK.
Each group can contain up to 50 members.
Related Information
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
254
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book
(Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Select the member or group you want to edit.
4. Click
(Properties).
5. Change the member or group information.
6. Click OK.
Related Information
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
255
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Select the member or group you want to delete.
4. Click (Delete).
5. When the confirmation dialog box appears, click OK.
Related Information
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
256
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can export the Address Book as an ASCII text file (*.csv) or a vCard (an electronic business card) and save
it on your computer.
You cannot export the group settings when you export the Address Book data.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click File > Export.
4. Select one of the following:
• Text
The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to the next step.
• vCard
You must select the member you want to export from your address book before selecting this option.
Browse to the folder where you want to save the vCard, type the vCard name in the File name field,
and then click Save.
5. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to export, and then click Add >>.
Select and add the items in the order you want them listed.
6. If you are exporting to an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to
separate the data fields.
7. Click OK.
8. Browse to the folder on your computer where you want to save the data, type the file name, and then click
Save.
257
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can import ASCII text files (*.csv) or vCards (electronic business cards) into your Address Book.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click File > Import.
4. Select one of the following:
• Text
The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to step 5.
• vCard
Go to step 8.
5. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to import, and then click Add >>.
You must select and add fields from the Available Items list in the same order they are listed in the import
text file.
6. If you are importing an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to
separate the data fields.
7. Click OK.
8. Browse to the folder where you want to import the data, type the file name, and then click Open.
Related Information
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
259
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows)
Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
PC-FAX supports only monochrome faxes. A monochrome fax will be sent even if the original data is in colour
and the receiving fax machine supports colour faxes.
1. Create a file in any application on your computer.
2. Select the print command in your application.
3. Select Brother PC-FAX as your printer, and then complete your print operation.
The Brother PC-FAX dialog box appears.
4. Type a fax number using one of the following methods:
• Click the numbers on the dial pad to type the number, and then click Add Send Address.
If you select the Dial Restriction checkbox, a confirmation dialog box will appear for you to re-type the fax
number using the keyboard. This feature helps to prevent transmissions to the wrong destination.
• Click the Address Book button, and then select a member or group from the Address Book.
If you make a mistake, click All Clear to delete all entries.
5. To include a cover page, select the Add Cover Page checkbox. You can also click to create or edit a
cover page.
6. Click Start to send the fax.
• To cancel the fax, click Cancel.
• To redial a number, click Redial to show the last five fax numbers, select a number, and then click Start.
Related Information
• PC-FAX for Windows
260
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)
Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Use the Brother PC-FAX software to receive faxes on your computer, view them, and print only the faxes you
want.
• Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
261
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
The Brother PC-FAX Receive software lets you view and store faxes on your computer. It is automatically
installed when you install your machine's software and drivers and works on locally or network-connected
machines.
PC-FAX Receive supports only monochrome faxes.
When you turn your computer off, your machine will continue to receive and store faxes in your machine's
memory. The machine's LCD will display the number of stored faxes received. When you start this application,
the software will transfer all received faxes to your computer at once. You can enable the Backup Print option if
you want the machine to print a copy of the fax before the fax is sent to your computer, or before the computer is
switched off. You can configure the Backup Print settings from your machine.
Related Information
• Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)
• Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
• View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows)
262
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If PC-FAX receiving is disabled on your machine, enable the setting before trying to run PC-FAX Receive.
For information on how to enable this function, , see Related Information: Configure PC-FAX Receive Using
Web Based Management.
We recommend selecting the Start PC-FAX Receive on computer startup checkbox so that the software
runs automatically and transfers any faxes when you turn your computer on.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive.
3. Confirm the message and click Yes.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears. The
(PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon also appears in your
computer task tray.
Related Information
• Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
• Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
• Add Your Machine to PC-FAX Receive Devices (Windows)
Related Topics:
• Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management
263
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) >
Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
2. Click Settings.
3. Configure these options as needed:
Preferences
Configure to start PC-FAX Receive automatically when you start Windows.
Save
Configure the path to save PC-FAX files and select the received document format.
Upload to
Configure the path to the server and select the option to upload automatically or manually (available only
for administrators).
Device
Select the machine where you want to receive PC-FAX files.
Lock (available only for administrators)
Restrict users who do not have administrator privileges from configuring the settings options shown above.
4. Click OK.
264
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) >
Add Your Machine to PC-FAX Receive Devices (Windows)
Add Your Machine to PC-FAX Receive Devices (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If you installed your machine following the on-screen instructions, the machine should be ready for use.
1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
2. Click Settings.
3. Click Device > Add.
4. Select the correct connection method.
Select your machine from the automatic search results below.
A list of connected machines appears. Select the machine you want. Click OK.
Specify your machine by IP address
Type the machine's IP address in the IP Address field, and then click OK.
5. To change the computer name that will appear on the machine's LCD, type the new name in the Enter your
PC display name (Max 15 Characters) field.
6. Click OK.
Related Information
• Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
266
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows)
View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Receiving Status
Icon
Status
Standby mode
No unread messages
Receiving messages
Messages received
Unread messages
1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
2. Click any faxes in the list to view them.
3. When finished, close the window.
267
Home > Network > Supported Basic Network Features
Supported Basic Network Features
The machine supports various features depending on the operating system. Use this table to see which network
features and connections are supported by each operating system.
Operating Systems Windows Windows Server macOS
Printing Yes Yes Yes
Scanning Yes Yes
PC Fax Send (available for
certain models)
Yes Yes
PC Fax Receive (available for
certain models)
Yes
Web Based Management
1
Yes Yes Yes
Status Monitor Yes
Driver Deployment Wizard Yes Yes
1
The default password to manage your machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". We recommend
immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorised access.
• When connecting your machine to an outside network such as the Internet, make sure your network
environment is protected by a separate firewall or other means in order to prevent information leaks due
to inadequate settings or unauthorised access by malicious third parties.
• When your machine is connected to the global network, a warning appears. When you see this warning,
we strongly recommend confirming your network settings, and then re-connecting to a secure network.
• Enabling your machine's global network communication filtering feature blocks access from the global
network. The global network communication filtering feature may prevent the machine from receiving
certain print or scan jobs from a computer or mobile device that uses a global IP address.
Related Information
• Network
Related Topics:
• Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
271
Home > Network > Configure Network Settings > Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel
Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel
To configure the machine for your network, use the control panel's [Network] menu selections.
• For information about the network settings you can configure using the control panel, see Related
Information: Settings Tables.
• You can also use Web Based Management, to configure and change your machine's network settings.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the network option you want, and then press it. Repeat this step
until you access the menu you want to configure, and then follow the LCD instructions.
Related Information
• Configure Network Settings
Related Topics:
• Settings Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
• Settings Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
• Settings Tables (DCP-L5510DW)
• Supported Basic Network Features
273
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network
Use the Wireless Network
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
• Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your
Computer
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel
Setup Wizard
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi
Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected
Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
• Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
275
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Before Configuring Your
Machine for a Wireless Network
Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910:
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
Before attempting to configure a wireless network, confirm the following:
• If you are using an enterprise wireless network, you must know the User ID and Password.
• To achieve optimum results with normal everyday document printing, place your machine as close to the
wireless LAN access point/router as possible with minimal obstructions. Large objects and walls between the
two devices and interference from other electronic devices can affect the data transfer speed of your
documents.
Due to these factors, wireless may not be the best method of connection for all types of documents and
applications. If you are printing large files, such as multi-page documents with mixed text and large graphics,
you may want to consider selecting wired Ethernet for faster data transfer (supported models only), or USB
for the fastest throughput speed.
• Although your machine can be used in a wired and wireless network (supported models only), only one
connection method can be used at a time. However, a wireless network connection and Wi-Fi Direct
connection, or a wired network connection (supported models only) and Wi-Fi Direct connection can be used
at the same time.
• If there is a signal in the vicinity, wireless LAN allows you to freely make a LAN connection. However, if
security settings are not correctly configured, the signal may be intercepted by malicious third-parties,
possibly resulting in:
- Theft of personal or confidential information
- Improper transmission of information to parties impersonating the specified individuals
- Dissemination of transcribed communication contents that were intercepted
Make sure you know your wireless router/access point's Network Name (SSID) and Network Key
(Password). If you cannot find this information, consult the manufacturer of your wireless router/access
point, your system administrator, or Internet provider. Brother cannot provide this information.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
276
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your Computer
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard
from Your Computer
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
1. Download the installer from your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
2. Start the installer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Select Wireless Network Connection (Wi-Fi) or Wireless Network Connection (Wi-Fi) (Optional), and
then click Next.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
You have completed the wireless network setup.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
277
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's
Control Panel Setup Wizard
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings of the computer to which you are connecting.
Network Name (SSID)
Network Key (Password)
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Network Key (Password)
12345
• Your access point/router may support the use of multiple WEP keys, but your Brother machine supports
the use of only the first WEP key.
• If you need assistance during setup and want to contact Brother customer service, make sure you have
your SSID (Network Name) and Network Key (Password) ready. We cannot assist you in locating this
information.
• If you do not know this information (SSID and Network Key), you cannot continue with the wireless
setup.
How can I find this information?
a. Check the documentation provided with your wireless access point/router.
b. The initial SSID could be the manufacturer's name or the model name.
c. If you do not know the security information, consult the router manufacturer, your system
administrator, or your Internet provider.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
Network].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
278
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs.
If a list of SSIDs is displayed, swipe up or down or press a or b to display the SSID to which you want to
connect, and then press the SSID.
5. Press [OK].
6. Do one of the following:
• If you are using an authentication and encryption method that requires a Network Key, enter the Network
Key you wrote down in the first step.
When you have entered all the characters, press [OK].
• If your authentication method is Open System and your encryption mode is None, go to the next step.
7. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and
then press
.
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
279
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push
Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
If your wireless access point/router supports WPS (PBC: Push Button Configuration), you can use WPS from
your machine's control panel menu to configure your wireless network settings.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [WPS/Push Button].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
3. When the touchscreen displays [Start WPS on your wireless access point/router, then
press [OK].], press the WPS button on your wireless access point/router. Then press [OK] on your
machine. Your machine will automatically detect your wireless access point/router and try to connect to your
wireless network.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and
then press
.
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your
machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
280
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method
of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
If your wireless LAN access point/router supports WPS, you can use the Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Method to configure your wireless network settings.
The PIN Method is one of the connection methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance
®
. By submitting a PIN
created by an Enrollee (your machine) to the Registrar (a device that manages the wireless LAN), you can set up
the wireless network and security settings. For more information on how to access WPS mode, see the
instructions provided with your wireless access point/router.
Type A
Connection when the wireless LAN access point/router (1) doubles as the Registrar:
1
Type B
Connection when another device (2), such as a computer, is used as the Registrar:
281
2
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [WPS/PIN Code].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
3. The LCD displays an eight-digit PIN and the machine starts searching for a wireless LAN access point/router.
4. Using a computer connected to the network, in your browser's address bar, type the IP address of the device
you are using as the Registrar (for example: http://192.168.1.2).
5. Go to the WPS settings page and type the PIN, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
• The Registrar is usually the wireless LAN access point/router.
• The settings page may differ depending on the brand of wireless LAN access point/router. For more
information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
If you are using a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, complete the following steps:
6. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add
a device.
• Windows 10
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device.
• To use a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, you must register it to your network in
advance. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/
router.
• If you use Windows 10 or Windows 11 as a Registrar, you can install the printer driver after the wireless
configuration by following the on-screen instructions. To install the driver and software necessary to use
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
7. Select your machine and click Next.
8. Type the PIN displayed on the machine's LCD, and then click Next.
9. Click Close.
282
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and
then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
283
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not
Broadcast
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and write down the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key
Open System NONE -
WEP
Shared Key WEP
WPA/WPA2-PSK AES
TKIP
WPA3-SAE AES
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key
WPA2-PSK AES 12345678
If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as the first WEP key. Your Brother machine
supports the use of the first WEP key only.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
Network].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a
or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].
5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].
6. Select the Authentication Method.
7. Do one of the following:
284
• If you selected the [Open System] option, press the Encryption type [None] or [WEP].
If you selected the [WEP] option for Encryption type, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [Shared Key] option, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [WPA/WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE] option, press the Encryption type [TKIP+AES] or
[AES].
Enter the WPA
™
key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [WPA3-SAE] option, press the Encryption type [AES].
Enter the WPA
™
key, and then press [OK].
Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.
8. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and
then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
285
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for an
Enterprise Wireless Network
Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method Encryption Mode User ID Password
EAP-FAST/NONE AES
TKIP
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
EAP-FAST/GTC AES
TKIP
PEAP/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
PEAP/GTC AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/CHAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/PAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TLS AES -
TKIP -
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method Encryption Mode User ID Password
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 AES Brother 12345678
286
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate
issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client
certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate
name you want to use.
• If you verify your machine using the common name of the server certificate, we recommend writing
down the common name before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the
common name of the server certificate.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
Network].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a
or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].
5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].
6. Select the Authentication Method.
7. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [EAP-FAST], [PEAP] or [EAP-TTLS] option, select the Inner Authentication method
[NONE], [CHAP], [MS-CHAP], [MS-CHAPv2], [GTC] or [PAP].
Depending on your Authentication method, the Inner Authentication method selections may differ.
Select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].
Select the verification method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID].
- If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID, user ID, and password (if
required), and then press [OK] for each option.
- For other selections, enter the user ID and Password, and then press [OK] for each option.
If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine displays [No Verification].
• If you selected the [EAP-TLS] option, select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].
The machine will display a list of available Client Certificates, and then select the certificate.
Select the verification method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID].
- If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID and user ID, and then press [OK]
for each option.
- For other selections, enter the user ID, and then press [OK].
8. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and
then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
287
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
> Wi-Fi Direct Overview
Wi-Fi Direct Overview
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
Wi-Fi Direct is one of the wireless configuration methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance
®
. It allows you to
securely connect your mobile device to your machine without using a wireless router/access point.
2
1
1. Mobile device
2. Your machine
• You can use Wi-Fi Direct with the wired or wireless network connection at the same time.
• The Wi-Fi Direct-supported device can become a Group Owner. When configuring the Wi-Fi Direct
network, the Group Owner serves as an access point.
Related Information
• Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
Related Topics:
• Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
• Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
289
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
> Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
Manually
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
Configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the machine's control panel:
When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi Direct
connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] appears on the LCD. Press [OK] to
connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Manual].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. The machine will display the SSID (Network Name) and Password (Network Key). Go to your mobile device's
wireless network settings screen, select the SSID, and then enter the password.
3. When your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
Related Information
• Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
Related Topics:
• Wi-Fi Direct Overview
• Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
290
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
> Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using
the Push Button Method
Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi Direct
connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] appears on the LCD. Press [OK] to
connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Push Button] on
your machine's LCD.
• If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, do the following:
a. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Group
Owner], and then press [On].
b. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [Push Button].
• If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings]
menu.
2. When the [Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] message appears,
turn your mobile device‘s Wi-Fi Direct function on (for more information, see your mobile device’s user‘s
guide). Press [OK] on your machine.
3. Do one of the following:
• If your mobile device displays a list of machines with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your Brother machine.
• If your Brother machine displays a list of mobile devices with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your mobile
device. To search for available devices again press [Rescan].
4. When your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
Related Information
• Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
Related Topics:
• Wi-Fi Direct Overview
• Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
291
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Enable/Disable Wireless LAN
Enable/Disable Wireless LAN
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [WLAN Enable] option. Press [WLAN Enable].
3. Do one of the following:
• To enable Wi-Fi, select [On].
• To disable Wi-Fi, select [Off].
4. Press
.
Related Information
• Wireless Network Settings
292
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Print the WLAN Report
Print the WLAN Report
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
The WLAN Report shows your machine's wireless status. If the wireless connection fails, check the error code on
the printed report.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [WLAN Report].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
The machine will print the WLAN Report.
3. Press .
If the WLAN Report does not print, check your machine for errors. If there are no visible errors, wait for one
minute and then try to print the report again.
Related Information
• Wireless Network Settings
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
Related Topics:
• My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
293
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Print the WLAN Report > Wireless LAN Report Error
Codes
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
If the Wireless LAN Report shows that the connection failed, check the error code on the printed report and see
the corresponding instructions in the table:
Error Code
Problem and Recommended Solutions
TS-01 The WLAN (Wi-Fi) is not enabled.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Enable the WLAN setting on your machine.
• If a network cable is connected to your machine, disconnect it.
TS-02 The wireless router/access point cannot be detected.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Make sure the wireless router/access point is on.
• Temporarily place your machine closer to the wireless router/access point when you are
configuring the wireless settings.
• If your wireless router/access point is using MAC address filtering, confirm that the MAC
address of the machine is allowed in the filter. You can find the MAC address by printing the
Network Configuration Report.
• If you manually entered the Network Name (SSID) and security information (authentication
method/encryption method), the information may be incorrect. Check the Network Name and
security information again and re-enter the correct information.
• Restart your wireless router/access point. If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and
security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point,
or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
TS-03
The wireless enterprise network and security settings you entered may be incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
Verify the following information:
- Network Name (SSID) you selected to configure your machine.
- Security information you selected to configure your machine (such as the authentication
method, encryption method, or User ID).
If you still cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the
documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router
manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
294
Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions
TS-04 Your machine does not support the authentication and encryption methods used by the selected
wireless router/access point.
For infrastructure mode (Most common)
Change the authentication and encryption methods of the wireless router/access point. Your
machine supports the following authentication and encryption methods:
• WPA-Personal:
TKIP / AES
• WPA2-Personal:
TKIP / AES
• WPA3-Personal:
AES
• OPEN:
WEP / NONE (without encryption)
• Shared key:
WEP
If your issue is not resolved, the Network Name (SSID) or security settings you entered may be
incorrect. Check that all wireless network settings are correct for your network.
TS-05
The Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password) are incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Confirm the Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password).
• If your Network Key contains upper-case and lower-case letters, make sure you type them
correctly.
• If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation
provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your
system administrator, or Internet service provider.
• If your wireless router/access point uses WEP encryption with multiple WEP keys, write
down and use only the first WEP key.
TS-06
The wireless security information (authentication method/encryption method/Network Key
(Password)) is incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Confirm the Network Key. If your Network Key contains upper-case and lower-case letters,
make sure you type them correctly.
• Confirm whether the authentication method entered and the authentication method or
encryption method supported by the wireless router/access point are the same.
• If the Network key, authentication method, and encryption method have been confirmed,
restart your wireless router/access point and the machine.
• If your wireless router/access point's Stealth Mode is on, you may need to disable it to
connect to the wireless network.
If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation
provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system
administrator, or Internet service provider.
TS-07
The machine cannot detect a wireless router/access point that has WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
enabled.
Check the following points and try again:
• To check if your wireless router/access point supports WPS, look for the WPS symbol
displayed on the router/access point. For more information, see the documentation provided
with your wireless router/access point.
• To set up your wireless connection using WPS, you must configure both your machine and
the wireless router/access point. For more information, see the user's guide.
• If you do not know how to set up your wireless router/access point using WPS, see the
documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router
manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
295
Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions
TS-08 Two or more wireless routers or access points that have WPS enabled are detected.
Check the following points and try again:
• Make sure that only one wireless router/access point within range has WPS enabled, and
then try to connect again.
• Try to connect again after a few minutes to avoid interference from other access points/
routers.
How to confirm wireless security information (SSID/authentication method/encryption method/Network Key)
of your WLAN access point/router:
1. The default security settings may be provided on a label attached to the WLAN access point/router. Or
the manufacturer's name or model number of the WLAN access point/router may be used as the default
security settings.
2. See the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router for information on how to find the
security settings.
• If the WLAN access point/router is set to not broadcast the SSID, the SSID will not automatically be
detected. You will have to manually enter the SSID name.
• The Network Key may also be described as the Password, Security Key, or Encryption Key.
If you do not know the SSID and wireless security settings of your WLAN access point/router or how to
change the configuration, see the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router, ask the
manufacturer of your access point/router or ask your Internet provider or network administrator.
Related Information
• Print the WLAN Report
Related Topics:
• My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
• Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
296
Home > Network > Network Features
Network Features
• Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
• Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
• Configure and Operate LDAP Search
• Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
• Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
• Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
• Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
297
Home > Network > Network Features > Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Based Mgmt].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press to select the option you want.
If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Print an Email Attachment
298
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based
Management
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured using Web
Based Management:
• Proxy server address
• Port number
• User Name
• Password
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the Proxy checkbox is selected, and then click Submit.
6. In the Proxy field, click Advanced Settings.
7. Enter the proxy server information.
8. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
299
Home > Network > Network Features > Print the Network Configuration Report
Print the Network Configuration Report
The Network Configuration Report lists the network configuration, including the network print server settings.
• The Node Name appears on the Network Configuration Report. The default Node Name is
"BRN123456abcdef" for a wired network or "BRW123456abcdef" for a wireless network (where
"123456abcdef" is your machine's MAC Address / Ethernet Address.)
• If the IP Address on the Network Configuration Report shows 0.0.0.0, wait for one minute and try
printing it again.
• You can find your machine's settings, such as the IP address, subnet mask, node name, and MAC
Address on the report, for example:
- IP address: 192.168.0.5
- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
- Node name: BRN000ca0000499
- MAC Address: 00-0c-a0-00-04-99
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Network Configuration].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Check Your Machine's Network Settings
• Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
• Error Messages
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
• Access Web Based Management
• Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
300
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management
Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Use Web Based Management to configure your PC Fax Receiving in a web browser.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the PC Fax Receive checkbox, and then click Submit.
6. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
301
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
With Internet Fax (I-Fax), you can send and receive fax documents using the Internet. Documents are
transmitted in email messages as attached TIFF-F files. Your computer can send and receive documents as long
as it has an application that can create and view TIFF-F files. You can use any TIFF-F viewer application.
Documents sent via the machine will be converted into a TIFF‑F format automatically. To send and receive
messages to and from your machine, your computer's email application must support Multipurpose Internet Mail
Extensions (MIME).
2
4
4
4
3
3
1
1. Sender
2. Internet
3. Receiver
4. Email server
I-Fax supports sending and receiving documents in Letter or A4 format and in monochrome only.
Related Information
• Network Features
• Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• Poll the Server Manually
• I-Fax Options
Related Topics:
• Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
302
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Important Information about
Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
I-Fax communication on a LAN is very similar to communication via email; however, it is different from fax
communication using standard phone lines. Make sure you read the following information about using I-Fax:
• Factors such as the receiver's location, structure of the LAN and how busy the circuit (such as the Internet) is
may cause the system to take longer than usual to send an error mail.
• When sending confidential documents, we recommend using standard phone lines instead of the Internet
(due to its low level of security).
• If the receiver's mail system is not MIME-compatible, you cannot use I-Fax to send documents. If possible,
check this in advance, and note that some servers will not send an error reply.
• If a document is too large to send via I-Fax, it may not reach the receiver.
• You cannot change the font or size of the text in any Internet mail you receive.
Related Information
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
303
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Before using I-Fax, configure your Brother machine to communicate with your network and mail server. You can
configure these items using the machine's control panel or Web Based Management. Make sure the following
items are configured on your machine:
• IP address (If you are already using your machine on your network, the machine's IP address has been
configured correctly.)
• Email address
• SMTP, POP3, IMAP4 server address/port/Authentication method/Encryption method/Server Certificate
Verification
• Mailbox name and password
If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator.
Related Information
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
• Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
Related Topics:
• I-Fax Options
304
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Before sending your I-Fax, use the control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following
optional items:
• E-mail Subject
• E-mail Message
• Size Limit
• Request Delivery Notification (Send)
If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator.
Related Information
• Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
305
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > How Your Brother Machine
Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
When your Brother machine receives an incoming I-Fax, it will print the I-Fax automatically. To receive an I-
Fax, we recommend using the control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following optional
items:
• Auto Polling
• Polling Frequency
• Print Mail Header
• Delete/Read Receive Error Mail
• Send Delivery Notification (Receive)
There are two ways you can receive email messages:
• POP3/IMAP4 receiving at regular intervals
307
• POP3/IMAP4 receiving, manually initiated
When using POP3/IMAP4 receiving, the machine polls your email server to receive data. Polling can occur at set
intervals (for example, you can configure the machine to poll the email server every ten minutes) or you can
manually poll the server.
• If your machine starts to receive email data, the LCD displays [Receiving].The email will be printed
automatically.
• If your machine is out of paper when receiving data, the received data will be held in the machine's
memory. This data will be printed automatically after paper is reloaded in the paper tray.
• When the machine's Temporary Fax Backup Function is turned on, received data will be stored for a
certain period of time.
• If the received mail is not in a plain text format, or an attached file is not in the TIFF-F format, the error
message "ATTACHED FILE FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED." will be printed.
• If the received mail is too large, the error message "E-MAIL FILE TOO LARGE." will be printed.
• If Delete/Read Receive Error Mail is On (default), then the error mail will be deleted from the email
server automatically.
Related Information
• Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Topics:
• How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
• Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
308
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
When a computer receives an I-Fax document, the document is attached to an email message that notifies you
in its Subject field that your email server has received an I-Fax. You can either wait for your Brother machine to
poll the email server, or you can manually poll the email server to receive the incoming data.
Related Information
• Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Topics:
• How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
309
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Sending an I-Fax is like sending a normal fax. Make sure that your recipient's information is saved in your email
address book, and load the document you want to I-Fax into your Brother machine.
• If the computer to which you want to send a document is not running Windows Server 2012/2012
R2/2016/2019/2022, Windows 10 or Windows 11, ask the computer's owner to install software that can
view TIFF files.
• To send multiple pages, use the ADF.
1. Load your document.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off], press [Fax].
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes].
3. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the fax-sending settings, press
[Options]. (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) To change the fax-sending settings, press
[Options].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the fax settings. When the setting you want appears, press
it and select your preference. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is
displayed.)
5. Do one of the following:
• Press
, enter the email address using the touchscreen, and then press [OK].
• Press [Address Book], select the email address of your recipient, and then press [Apply].
6. Press [Fax Start].
The machine starts scanning. After the document is scanned, it is transmitted to the recipient via your SMTP
server. You can cancel the send operation by pressing
during scanning.
7. Press .
Related Information
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
310
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Poll the Server Manually
Poll the Server Manually
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail] > [Manual Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes] to confirm.
3. The LCD displays [Receiving] and your machine will print the data from the email server.
Related Information
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
311
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options
I-Fax Options
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
• Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
• Relay Broadcast
• Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
• Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
312
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Forward Received
Email and Fax Messages
Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Use Brother's I-Fax feature to forward email or standard fax messages to another computer, to a fax machine, or
to another I-Fax machine. Enable the Forwarding feature using your machine's control panel.
To enable email forwarding using your machine's control panel:
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive] >
[Fax Forward].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press [Manual] to enter the recipient's fax number (up to 20 digits) or email address using the LCD.
Press [OK].
• Press [Address Book].
Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where you want
your faxes to be forwarded.
Press the fax number or email address you want.
3. If you select the email address, select the file type you want.
Press [Backup Print: On] to print received faxes at your machine so you will have a copy.
4. Press .
Related Information
• I-Fax Options
Related Topics:
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
• Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
313
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Relay Broadcast
Relay Broadcast
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
A Relay Broadcast is when your Brother machine receives a message over the Internet and then relays it to
another fax machine using conventional telephone lines. If you must fax a document over a long distance or
abroad, use the Relay Broadcast Function to save the communication fee.
2
33
1
1. The Internet
2. Telephone line
3. Email server
Use the Brother machine's control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following items:
• Relay Broadcast Function
Set the Relay Broadcast Function to On.
• Relay Domain
Configure your machine's domain name on the machine that will broadcast the document to the conventional
fax machine. If you wish to use your machine as a relay broadcast device, you must specify the trusted
domain name (the portion of the name after the "@" sign) at the machine. Use care in selecting a trusted
domain: any user on a trusted domain will be able to send a relay broadcast. You can register up to ten
domain names.
• Relay Broadcast Report
Specify whether or not you want a report to print after the machine completes the relay broadcast.
314
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Relay
Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine
Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send an email from your machine to a conventional fax machine.
Confirm the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are selected in Web Based
Management. If the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are not selected, select the
POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes. Click Submit, and then restart your machine.
FAX@brother.com UKFAX@brother.co.uk 123456789
1
UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)
r
1. The Internet
In this example, your machine's email address is FAX@brother.com and you want to send a document from your
machine to a standard fax machine in England with the email address UKFAX@brother.co.uk, and you want your
machine to send the document using a conventional telephone line.
1. Load your document.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off], press [Fax].
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes].
3. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Press [Options].(MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Press [Options].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Broadcasting] option.
5. Press [Broadcasting].
6. Press [Add Number].
7. You can add email addresses to the broadcast in the following ways:
• Press [Add Number] and press , enter the email address and press [OK].
• Press [Add from Address book]. Press the checkbox of the email address you want to add to the
broadcast. After you have selected all the email addresses you want, press [OK].
• Press [Search in Address book]. Enter the name or the first letter of the name and press [OK].
The search results will be displayed. Press the name and then press the email address you want to add
to the broadcast.
The following is an example of how to enter the email address and phone number:
316
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Relay
Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Computer
Relay Broadcast from Your Computer
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send an email from your computer to a conventional fax machine.
• Some email applications do not support sending an email to multiple fax numbers. If your email application
cannot support multiple fax numbers, you can relay to only one fax machine at a time.
1
UKFAX@brother.co.uk 123456789
UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)
1. The Internet
• Confirm the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are selected in Web Based
Management. If the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are not selected, select the
POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes. Click Submit, and then restart your machine.
If you are sending an email to a conventional fax machine, the method of entering the fax machine's fax number
will vary, depending on the mail application you are using.
1. In your email application, create a new email message and type the email address of the relay machine and
fax number of the first fax machine in the "TO" box.
The following is an example of how to enter the email address and fax number:
UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)
email address
Fax Phone Number
The word "fax#" must be
included with the phone
number inside the parenthesis.
For Microsoft Outlook, the address information must be entered into the address book as follows:
Name: fax#123456789
Email address: UKFAX@brother.co.uk
2. Type the email address of the relay machine and fax number of the second fax machine in the "TO" box.
3. Send the email.
Related Information
• Relay Broadcast
318
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-
Fax) Verification Mail
Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
• Verification Mail for sending allows you to request notification from the receiving station where your I-Fax or
email was received and processed.
• Verification Mail for receiving allows you to transmit a default report back to the sending station after
successfully receiving and processing an I-Fax or email.
To use this feature, set the [Notification] options in the [Setup Mail RX] and [Setup Mail TX]
options of your machine's control panel menu.
Related Information
• I-Fax Options
• Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
• Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
• I-Fax Error Mail
319
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-
Fax) Verification Mail > Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail TX] >
[Notification].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Select [On] or [Off] to enable or disable the Send Notification feature.
When Send Notification is On, the fax includes an additional field, named Message Disposition Notification
(MDN), that contains message delivery information. By default, Send Notification is set to Off.
Your fax recipient's machine must support the MDN field in order to send a notification report.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
320
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-
Fax) Verification Mail > Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail RX] >
[Notification].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press one of the three possible settings:
Option Description
Receive
Notification On
When Receive Notification is set to On, a template is sent back to the sender to
indicate successful receipt and processing of the message.
These templates depend on the operation requested by the sender.
Example:
SUCCESS : Received From <Mail Address>
Receive
Notification MDN
When Receive Notification is set to MDN, a report to indicate successful receipt and
processing is sent back to the sender if the originating station sent a request
confirmation to the MDN (Message Disposition Notification) field.
Receive
Notification Off
When Receive Notification is set to Off, all forms of receipt notification are disabled
and no message is sent back to the sender regardless of the request.
• To send TX Verification Mail, the Sender must configure these settings:
- Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail TX] to [On].
- Switch [Header] in [Setup Mail RX] to [All] or [Subject+From+To].
• To receive TX Verification Mail, the Receiver must configure these settings:
Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail RX] to [On].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
321
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-
Fax) Verification Mail > I-Fax Error Mail
I-Fax Error Mail
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If there is a delivery error while sending an I-Fax, the mail server will send an error message back to the Brother
machine and the error message will be printed.
If there is an error while receiving an I-Fax, an error message will be printed, for example, "The message being
sent to the machine was not in a TIFF format."
To receive the error mail and have these printed on your machine, in [Setup Mail RX], switch the [Header]
option to [All] or to [Subject+From+To].
Related Information
• Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
322
Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
The Fax to Server feature allows the machine to scan a document and send it over the network to a separate fax
server. The document will then be sent from the server as fax data to the destination fax number over standard
phone lines. When the Fax to Server feature is set to On, all automatic fax transmissions from the machine will
be sent to the fax server for fax transmission.
You can send a fax directly from the machine using the manual fax feature when the Send to Server feature is
on.
Related Information
• Network Features
• Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server
• Enable Fax to Server
• Operate Fax to Server
323
Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Before Sending a Fax to the
Fax Server
Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
To send a document to the fax server, the correct syntax for that server must be used. The destination fax
number must be sent with a prefix and a suffix that match the parameters used by the fax server. In most cases,
the syntax for the prefix is “fax=” and the syntax for the suffix would be the domain name of the fax server email
gateway. The suffix must also include the “@” symbol at the beginning of the suffix. The prefix and the suffix
information must be stored in the machine before you can use the Fax to Server function. Destination fax
numbers can be saved in the address book or entered using the dial pad (up to 40-digit numbers). For example:
if you wanted to send a document to a destination fax number of 123-555-0001, use the following syntax:
Your fax server application must support an email gateway.
Related Information
• Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
324
Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Enable Fax to Server
Enable Fax to Server
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Store the prefix/suffix address for the fax server in your Brother machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Fax to Server].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Fax to Server].
3. Press [On].
4. Press [Prefix].
5. Enter the prefix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK].
6. Press [Suffix].
7. Enter the suffix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK].
8. Press
.
Related Information
• Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
325
Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Operate Fax to Server
Operate Fax to Server
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Place the document in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off], press [Fax].
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes].
3. Enter the fax number.
4. Press [Fax Start].
The machine will send the message over a TCP/IP network to the fax server.
Related Information
• Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
326
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search
Configure and Operate LDAP Search
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910: standard
The LDAP feature allows you to search for information, such as fax numbers and email addresses, on your
server. When you use the Fax, I-Fax, or Scan to Email server feature, you can use the LDAP search to find fax
numbers or email addresses.
• The LDAP feature does not support simplified Chinese, traditional Chinese, or Korean.
• The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3.
• The LDAP feature does not support SSL/TLS.
Related Information
• Network Features
• Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
• Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
327
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search > Change LDAP
Configuration Using Web Based Management
Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
Use Web Based Management to configure your LDAP settings in a web browser.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the LDAP checkbox, and then click Submit.
6. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
7. On your computer, in Web Based Management, go to the navigation menu, and then click Address Book >
LDAP.
• LDAP Search
• LDAP Server Address
• SSL/TLS
• Port (The default port number is 389.)
• Authentication
• Username
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
• Password
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
- If the LDAP server supports Kerberos authentication, we recommend selecting Kerberos for the
Authentication settings. It provides strong authentication between the LDAP server and your machine.
- You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time
zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication.
• Kerberos Server Address
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
• Search Root
• Attribute of Card ID (Search Key)
• Attribute of Name
• Timeout for LDAP
• Attribute of Name (Search Key)
• Attribute of E-mail
• Attribute of Fax Number
• Optional Attribute
8. When finished, click Submit. Make sure the Status field reads OK.
328
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search > Perform an LDAP Search
Using Your Machine's Control Panel
Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
When you have configured LDAP settings, you can use the LDAP search feature to find fax numbers or email
addresses to use for:
• Sending a Fax (not available for DCP models)
• Sending an Internet Fax (I-Fax) (not available for DCP models)
• Scanning to Email Server
• The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3.
• The LDAP feature does not support SSL/TLS.
• You may need to use Kerberos Authentication or Simple Authentication to connect to your LDAP server,
depending on the security policy set by your network administrator.
• You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time
zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication.
1. Press to search.
2. Enter the initial characters for your search using the LCD.
3. Press [OK].
The LDAP search result will be shown on the LCD; the icon appears before the fax number (local) or
the email (local) address book search results.
If there is no match on the server or in the local address book, the LCD displays [Results cannot be
found.] for about 60 seconds.
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the name you want.
5. Press the name.
To view the details of the name, press [Detail].
6. If the result includes more than one fax number or email address, the machine will prompt you to select just
one. Press [Apply]. Do one of the following:
• If you are sending a fax or an I-Fax, press [Fax Start].
• If you are scanning to the Email Server, load your document, press [Next], and then press [Start].
Related Information
• Configure and Operate LDAP Search
Related Topics:
• Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
330
Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management
Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is used to synchronise the time used by the machine for
authentication with the SNTP time server. (This is not the time displayed on the machine's LCD.) You can
automatically or manually synchronise the machine's time with the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) provided
by the SNTP time server.
• Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
• Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
• Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
• Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
331
Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management > Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Configure the date and time to synchronise the time used by the machine with the SNTP time server.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Date&Time.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Verify the Time Zone settings.
Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For
example, the time zone for Eastern Time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.
6. Select the Synchronize with SNTP server checkbox.
7. Click Submit.
You can also configure date and time manually.
Related Information
• Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management
332
Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management > Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
Configure the SNTP protocol to synchronise the time the machine uses for authentication with the time kept by
the SNTP time server.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the SNTP checkbox to activate the settings.
6. Click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
8. Next to the SNTP checkbox, click Advanced Settings.
9. Configure the settings.
Option
Description
Status Displays whether the SNTP protocol is enabled or disabled.
Synchronization Status Confirm the latest synchronisation status.
SNTP Server Method Select AUTO or STATIC.
• AUTO
If you have a DHCP server on your network, the SNTP server will
obtain the address from that server automatically.
• STATIC
Type the address you want to use.
Primary SNTP Server Address
Secondary SNTP Server Address
Type the server's address (up to 64 characters).
The secondary SNTP server's address is used as a backup to the
primary SNTP server's address. If the primary server is unavailable,
the machine will contact the secondary SNTP server.
Primary SNTP Server Port
Secondary SNTP Server Port
Type the port number (1-65535).
The secondary SNTP server port is used as a backup to the primary
SNTP server port. If the primary port is unavailable, the machine will
contact the secondary SNTP port.
Synchronization Interval Type the number of hours between server synchronisation attempts
(1-168 hours).
10. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
333
Home > Network > Network Features > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Your machine supports 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet. To connect to a 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet Network,
you must set the machine’s Ethernet link mode to Auto from the machine’s control panel or Web Based
Management (web browser).
Use a Category 5e (or greater) network cable. The machine can automatically negotiate the highest
supported network speed, for example: to achieve 1000BASE-T network speeds, all connecting
infrastructure, including network switches and cables must also support 1000BASE-T speeds. Otherwise
the machine will communicate at either 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX.
Related Information
• Network Features
• Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
334
Home > Network > Network Features > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) > Configure the Gigabit
Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Wired > Ethernet.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Auto from the Ethernet Mode drop-down list.
6. Click Submit.
7. To activate the settings, click Yes to restart your machine.
You can confirm your settings by printing the Network Configuration Report.
Related Information
• Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
335
Home > Network > Network Features > Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Set up a profile to forward incoming faxes directly to a folder on an FTP, SFTP, CIFS, or SharePoint server.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Network Profile.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the FTP, SFTP, Network, or SharePoint option, and then click Submit.
6. Set up the profile for your server, using one of the following tables:
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
FTP
Option
Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64
characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The
default setting is port 21. In most cases, this setting does not need to be
changed.
Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the FTP server.
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
SSL/TLS Set the SSL/TLS option to forward securely using SSL/TLS
communication. Change the CA Certificate setting, if needed.
336
Option Description
Store Directory Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the FTP server
where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at
the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
Passive Mode Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server
and network firewall configuration. The default setting is on. In most
cases, this setting does not need to be changed.
SFTP
Option
Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64
characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the SFTP server.
Auth. Method Select Password or Public Key.
Password When you select Password for the Auth. Method option, type the
password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you
typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype
password field.
Client Key Pair When you select Public Key for the Auth. Method option, select the
authentication type.
Server Public Key Select the authentication type.
Store Directory Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the SFTP server
where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at
the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The
default setting is port 22. In most cases, this setting does not need to be
changed.
Network
Option
Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric
characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Network Folder Path Type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to
forward incoming faxes.
Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, Kerberos, or
NTLMv2.
Username Type a user name (up to 96 characters) that has permission to write
data to the folder specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the
user name is part of a domain, type the user name in one of the
following styles:
user@domain
domain\user
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user
name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in
the Retype password field.
Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must
type the Kerberos Server Address (for example:
kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
337
You must configure the SNTP (network time server) or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly
on the control panel. The time must match the time used by the Kerberos Server and CIFS Server.
SharePoint
Option Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
SharePoint Site Address Copy and paste the full destination address shown in the address bar of
your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared
%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or the IP address (for example:
http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx).
SSL/TLS If the address in the SharePoint Site Address field starts with "https://",
you can verify the server certificate by selecting the Verify Server
Certificate checkbox.
Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, NTLMv2, Kerberos, or
Basic. If you choose Auto, the authentication method will be detected
automatically.
Username Type the user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission
to write data to the folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address
field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of
the following styles:
• user@domain
• domain\user
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type
the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up
to 64 characters).
7. Click Submit.
8. To set the Fax Forward feature, go to the navigation menu, and then click Fax > Remote Fax Options.
9. Select Forward to Network from the Fwd/Store/Cloud/Network drop-down list.
10. Select the file type you want to use.
11. To print a backup copy of incoming faxes, select On for Backup print.
12. Select the profile you want to use from the Network Profile drop-down list.
13. Type a three-digit Remote Access Code in the Remote Access Code field, if needed.
• You can use the numbers 0 through 9, *, or # for the Remote Access Code.
• The Remote Access Code must be different from the remote codes for the Fax features.
14. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
• Network Features
338
Home > Network > Network Features > Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
You can use your machine's control panel to reset the machine's network settings to its default factory settings.
This resets all information, such as the password and IP address.
• This feature restores all network settings to the factory settings.
• You can also reset the print server to its factory settings using Web Based Management.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Network Reset].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. [Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.]
appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm.
The machine will restart.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Reset Your Machine
339
Home > Security
Security
• Before Using Network Security Features
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
• Use SSL/TLS
• Use SNMPv3
• Use IPsec
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
• Use Active Directory Authentication
• Use LDAP Authentication
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Send or Receive an Email Securely
• Store Print Log to Network
• Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
• Use Global Network Detection Features
340
Home > Security > Before Using Network Security Features
Before Using Network Security Features
Your machine employs some of the latest network security and encryption protocols available today. These
network features can be integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and prevent
unauthorised access to the machine.
We recommend disabling the Telnet, FTP server, and TFTP protocols. Accessing the machine using these
protocols is not secure.
Related Information
• Security
• Network Security
• Disable Unnecessary Protocols
341
Home > Security > Before Using Network Security Features > Disable Unnecessary Protocols
Disable Unnecessary Protocols
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Clear any unnecessary protocol checkboxes to disable them.
6. Click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Before Using Network Security Features
342
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security
Configure Certificates for Device Security
You must configure a certificate to manage your networked machine securely using SSL/TLS. You must use Web
Based Management to configure a certificate.
• Supported Security Certificate Features
• How to Create and Install a Certificate
• Create a Self-signed Certificate
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate
Authority (CA)
• Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
• Import and Export a CA Certificate
• Manage Multiple Certificates
343
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Supported Security Certificate Features
Supported Security Certificate Features
Your machine supports the use of multiple security certificates, which allows secure management, authentication,
and communication with the machine. The following security certificate features can be used with the machine:
• SSL/TLS communication
• SSL communication for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 (only available for certain models)
• IEEE 802.1x authentication
• IPsec
Your machine supports the following:
• Pre-installed certificate
Your machine has a pre-installed self-signed certificate. This certificate enables you to use SSL/TLS
communication without creating or installing a different certificate.
The pre-installed self-signed certificate protects your communication up to a certain level. We recommend
using a certificate that is issued by a trusted organisation for better security.
• Self-signed certificate
This print server issues its own certificate. Using this certificate, you can easily use the SSL/TLS
communication without creating or installing a different certificate from a CA.
• Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
There are two methods for installing a certificate from a CA. If you already have a certificate from a CA or if
you want to use a certificate from an external trusted CA:
- When using a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) from this print server.
- When importing a certificate and a private key.
• Certificate Authority (CA) Certificate
To use a CA certificate that identifies the CA and owns its private key, you must import that CA certificate
from the CA before configuring the security features of the Network.
• If you are going to use SSL/TLS communication, we recommend contacting your system administrator
first.
• When you reset the print server back to its default factory settings, the certificate and the private key
that are installed will be deleted. If you want to keep the same certificate and the private key after
resetting the print server, export them before resetting, and then reinstall them.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
344
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > How to Create and Install a Certificate
How to Create and Install a Certificate
There are two options when choosing a security certificate: use a self-signed certificate or use a certificate from a
Certificate Authority (CA).
Option 1
Self-Signed Certificate
1. Create a self-signed certificate using Web Based Management.
2. Install the self-signed certificate on your computer.
Option 2
Certificate from a CA
1. Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) using Web Based Management.
2. Install the certificate issued by the CA on your Brother machine using Web Based Management.
3. Install the certificate on your computer.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
345
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Self-signed Certificate
Create a Self-signed Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create Self-Signed Certificate.
6. Enter a Common Name and a Valid Date.
• The length of the Common Name is less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP address, node
name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS communication. The node
name is displayed by default.
• A warning will appear if you use the IPPS or HTTPS protocol and enter a different name in the URL than
the Common Name that was used for the self-signed certificate.
7. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit).
8. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
346
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from
a Certificate Authority (CA)
If you already have a certificate from an external trusted Certificate Authority (CA) , you can store the certificate
and private key on the machine and manage them by importing and exporting. If you do not have a certificate
from an external trusted CA, create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR), send it to a CA for authentication, and
install the returned certificate on your machine.
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
• Install a Certificate on Your Machine
347
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
A Certificate Signing Request (CSR) is a request sent to a Certificate Authority (CA) to authenticate the
credentials contained within the certificate.
We recommend installing a Root Certificate from the CA on your computer before creating the CSR.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create CSR.
6. Type a Common Name (required) and add other information about your Organization (optional).
• Your company details are required so that a CA can confirm your identity and verify it to the outside
world.
• The length of the Common Name must be less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP
address, node name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS
communication. The node name is displayed by default. The Common Name is required.
• A warning will appear if you type a different name in the URL than the Common Name that was used for
the certificate.
• The length of the Organization, the Organization Unit, the City/Locality, and the State/Province
must be less than 64 bytes.
• The Country/Region should be a two-character ISO 3166 country code.
• If you are configuring an X.509v3 certificate extension, select the Configure extended partition
checkbox, and then select Auto (Register IPv4) or Manual.
7. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit).
8. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256.
9. Click Submit.
The CSR appears on your screen. Save the CSR as a file or copy and paste it into an online CSR form
offered by a Certificate Authority.
10. Click Save.
348
• Follow your CA's policy regarding the method to send a CSR to your CA.
• If you are using the Enterprise root CA of Windows Server 2012/2012 R2/2016/2019/2022, we
recommend using the Web Server for the certificate template to securely create the Client Certificate. If
you are creating a Client Certificate for an IEEE 802.1x environment with EAP-TLS authentication, we
recommend using User for the certificate template.
Related Information
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
349
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Install a Certificate on Your Machine
Install a Certificate on Your Machine
When you receive a certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA), follow the steps below to install it on the print
server:
Only a certificate issued with your machine's Certificate Signing Request (CSR) can be installed on your
machine. When you want to create another CSR, make sure that the certificate is installed before creating the
new CSR. Create another CSR only after installing the certificate on the machine, otherwise the CSR created
before installing the new CSR will be invalid.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Install Certificate.
6. Browse to the file that contains the certificate issued by the CA, and then click Submit.
The certificate has been created and saved in your machine's memory successfully.
To use SSL/TLS communication, the Root Certificate from the CA must be installed on your computer. Contact
your network administrator.
Related Information
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
350
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and
Private Key
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Store the certificate and private key on your machine and manage them by importing and exporting them.
• Import a Certificate and Private Key
• Export the Certificate and Private Key
351
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and
Private Key > Import a Certificate and Private Key
Import a Certificate and Private Key
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import Certificate and Private Key.
6. Browse to the file you want to import.
7. Type the password if the file is encrypted, and then click Submit.
The certificate and private key are imported to your machine.
Related Information
• Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
352
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and
Private Key > Export the Certificate and Private Key
Export the Certificate and Private Key
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Export shown with Certificate List.
6. Enter the password if you want to encrypt the file.
If a blank password is used, the output is not encrypted.
7. Enter the password again for confirmation, and then click Submit.
8. Click Save.
The certificate and private key are exported to your computer.
You can also import the certificate to your computer.
Related Information
• Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
353
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export a CA Certificate > Import
a CA Certificate
Import a CA Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > CA Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import CA Certificate.
6. Browse to the file you want to import.
7. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Import and Export a CA Certificate
355
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export a CA Certificate > Export
a CA Certificate
Export a CA Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > CA Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the certificate you want to export and click Export.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click b next to Save, and then specify the location where you want to save the file.
Related Information
• Import and Export a CA Certificate
356
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Manage Multiple Certificates
Manage Multiple Certificates
The multiple certificate feature allows you to use Web Based Management to manage each certificate installed
on your machine. In Web Based Management, navigate to the Certificate or CA Certificate screen to view
certificate content, delete, or export your certificates.
Maximum Number of Certificates Stored on Brother Machine
Self-signed Certificate or
Certificate Issued by a CA
6
CA Certificate 9
We recommend storing fewer certificates than allowed, reserving an empty spot in case of certificate expiration.
When a certificate expires, import a new certificate into the reserved spot, and then delete the expired certificate.
This ensures that you avoid configuration failure.
• When you use HTTPS/IPPS, IEEE 802.1x, or Signed PDF, you must select which certificate you are
using.
• When you use SSL for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 communications (only available for certain models), you do
not have to choose the certificate. The necessary certificate will be chosen automatically.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
357
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS
Introduction to SSL/TLS
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) is an effective method of protecting data sent over
a local or wide area network (LAN or WAN). It works by encrypting data, such as a print job, sent over a network,
so anyone trying to capture it will not be able to read it.
SSL/TLS can be configured on both wired and wireless networks and will work with other forms of security such
as WPA keys and firewalls.
Related Information
• Use SSL/TLS
• Brief History of SSL/TLS
• Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
359
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Brief History of SSL/TLS
Brief History of SSL/TLS
SSL/TLS was originally created to secure web traffic information, particularly data sent between web browsers
and servers. SSL is now used with additional applications, such as Telnet, printer, and FTP software, in order to
become a universal solution for online security. Its original design intentions are still being used today by many
online retailers and banks to secure sensitive data, such as credit card numbers, customer records, etc.
SSL/TLS uses extremely high levels of encryption and is trusted by banks all over the world.
Related Information
• Introduction to SSL/TLS
360
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
The primary benefit of using SSL/TLS is to guarantee secure printing over an IP network by restricting
unauthorised users from reading data sent to the machine. SSL's most important benefit is that it can be used to
print confidential data securely. For example, a Human Resource (HR) Department in a large company may be
printing wage slips on a regular basis. Without encryption, the data contained on these wages slips can be read
by other network users. However, with SSL/TLS, anyone trying to capture the data will see a page of code and
not the actual wage slip.
Related Information
• Introduction to SSL/TLS
361
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
• Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
• Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
• Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrator
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
362
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Configure a
Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
Configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based Management before you use SSL/TLS
communication.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click HTTP Server Settings.
6. Select the certificate you want to configure from the Select the Certificate drop-down list.
7. Click Submit.
8. Click Yes to restart your print server.
Related Information
• Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
363
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Access
Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
To manage your network machine securely, use Web Based Management with the HTTPS protocol.
• To use HTTPS protocol, HTTPS must be enabled on your machine. The HTTPS protocol is enabled by
default.
• You can change the HTTPS protocol settings using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name
that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name).
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. You can now access the machine using HTTPS.
Related Information
• Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
364
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Install the
Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrator
Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrator
• The following steps are for Microsoft Edge. If you use another web browser, refer to your web browser's
documentation or online help for instructions on how to install certificates.
• Make sure you have created your self-signed certificate using Web Based Management.
1. Right-click the Microsoft Edge icon, and then click Run as administrator.
If the User Account Control screen appears, click Yes.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If your connection is not private, click the Advanced button, and then continue to the web page.
4. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
5. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
6. Click Export.
7. To encrypt the output file, type a password in the Enter password field. If the Enter password field is blank,
your output file will not be encrypted.
8. Type the password again in the Retype password field, and then click Submit.
9. Click the downloaded file to open it.
10. When the Certificate Import Wizard appears, click Next.
11. Click Next.
12. If required, type a password, and then click Next.
13. Select Place all certificates in the following store, and then click Browse....
14. Select the Trusted Root Certification Authorities, and then click OK.
15. Click Next.
16. Click Finish.
17. Click Yes, if the fingerprint (thumbprint) is correct.
18. Click OK.
Related Information
• Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
365
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS > Print Documents Using
IPPS
Print Documents Using IPPS
To print documents securely with IPP protocol, use the IPPS protocol.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the IPP checkbox is selected.
If the IPP checkbox is not selected, select the IPP checkbox, and then click Submit.
Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
After the machine restarts, return to the machine's web page, type the password, go to the navigation
menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
6. Click HTTP Server Settings.
7. Select the HTTPS checkbox in the IPP area, and then click Submit.
8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Communication using IPPS cannot prevent unauthorised access to the print server.
Related Information
• Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
367
Home > Security > Use SNMPv3 > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3
The Simple Network Management Protocol version 3 (SNMPv3) provides user authentication and data
encryption to manage network devices securely.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name
that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name).
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the SNMP setting is enabled, and then click Advanced Settings.
6. Configure the SNMP settings.
Option Description
SNMP v1/v2c
read-write
access
The print server uses version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol. You can use all of
your machine's applications in this mode. However, it is not secure since it will not
authenticate the user and data will not be encrypted.
SNMPv3 read-
write access
and v1/v2c read-
only access
The print server uses the read-write access of version 3 and the read-only access of
version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol.
When you use the SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only
access mode, some of your machine's applications that access the print
server do not work correctly since they authorise the read-only access of
version 1 and version 2c. If you want to use all applications, we recommend
using the SNMP v1/v2c read-write access mode.
SNMPv3 read-
write access
The print server uses version 3 of the SNMP protocol. If you want to manage the print
server securely, use this mode.
When you use the SNMPv3 read-write access mode, note the following:
Except for BRAdmin Professional, all applications that use SNMPv1/v2c will
be restricted. To allow the use of SNMPv1/v2c applications, use the SNMPv3
read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access or SNMP v1/v2c read-
write access mode.
7. Click Submit.
If your machine displays the protocol setting options, select the options you want.
8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Use SNMPv3
369
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Introduction to IPsec
Introduction to IPsec
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a security protocol that uses an optional Internet Protocol function to prevent
data manipulation and ensure the confidentiality of data transmitted as IP packets. IPsec encrypts data carried
over a network, such as print data sent from computers to a printer. Because the data is encrypted at the network
layer, applications that employ a higher-level protocol use IPsec even if the user is not aware of its use.
IPsec supports the following functions:
• IPsec transmissions
According to the IPsec setting conditions, a network-connected computer sends data to and receives data
from a specified device using IPsec. When devices start communicating using IPsec, keys are exchanged
using Internet Key Exchange (IKE) first, and then the encrypted data is transmitted using the keys.
In addition, IPsec has two operation modes: the Transport mode and Tunnel mode. The Transport mode is
used mainly for communication between devices and the Tunnel mode is used in environments such as a
Virtual Private Network (VPN).
For IPsec transmissions, the following conditions are necessary:
- A computer that can communicate using IPsec is connected to the network.
- Your machine is configured for IPsec communication.
- The computer connected to your machine is configured for IPsec connections.
• IPsec settings
The settings that are necessary for connections using IPsec. These settings can be configured using Web
Based Management.
To configure the IPsec settings, you must use the browser on a computer that is connected to the network.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
371
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
The IPsec connection conditions comprise two Template types: Address and IPsec. You can configure up to 10
connection conditions.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Configure the settings.
Option
Description
Status Enable or disable IPsec.
Negotiation Mode Select Negotiation Mode for IKE Phase 1. IKE is a protocol that is
used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted
communication using IPsec.
In the Main mode, the processing speed is slow, but the security is
high. In the Aggressive mode, the processing speed is faster than in
the Main mode, but the security is lower.
All Non-IPsec Traffic Select the action to be taken for non-IPsec packets.
When using Web Services, you must select Allow for All Non-IPsec
Traffic. If you select Drop, Web Services cannot be used.
Broadcast/Multicast Bypass Select Enabled or Disabled.
Protocol Bypass Select the checkboxes for the option or options you want.
Rules Select the Enabled checkbox to activate the template. When you
select multiple checkboxes, the lower numbered checkboxes have
priority if the settings for the selected checkboxes conflict.
Click the corresponding drop-down list to select the Address
Template that is used for the IPsec connection conditions. To add an
Address Template, click Add Template.
Click the corresponding drop-down list to select the IPsec Template
that is used for the IPsec connection conditions. To add an IPsec
Template, click Add Template.
6. Click Submit.
If the machine must be restarted to activate the new settings, the restart confirmation screen will appear.
If there is a blank item in the template you enabled in the Rules table, an error message appears. Confirm
your choices and click Submit again.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
Related Topics:
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
372
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec Address Template.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Delete button to delete an Address Template. When an Address Template is in use, it cannot be
deleted.
6. Click the Address Template that you want to create. The IPsec Address Template appears.
7. Configure the settings.
Option
Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Local IP Address • IP Address
Specify the IP address. Select ALL IPv4 Address, ALL IPv6
Address, ALL Link Local IPv6, or Custom from the drop-down
list.
If you select Custom from the drop-down list, type the IP address
(IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.
• IP Address Range
Type the starting and ending IP addresses for the IP address
range in the text boxes. If the starting and ending IP addresses
are not standardised to IPv4 or IPv6, or the ending IP address is
smaller than the starting address, an error will occur.
• IP Address / Prefix
Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.
For example: 192.168.1.1/24
Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask
(255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the addresses 192.168.1.###
are valid.
Remote IP Address
• Any
If you select Any, all IP addresses are enabled.
• IP Address
Type the specified IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.
• IP Address Range
Type the first and last IP addresses for the IP address range. If
the first and last IP addresses are not standardised to IPv4 or
IPv6, or the last IP address is smaller than the first address, an
error will occur.
• IP Address / Prefix
Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.
For example: 192.168.1.1/24
373
Option Description
Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask
(255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the addresses 192.168.1.###
are valid.
8. Click Submit.
When you change the settings for the template currently in use, restart your machine to activate the
configuration.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
374
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec Template.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Delete button to delete an IPsec Template. When an IPsec Template is in use, it cannot be
deleted.
6. Click the IPsec Template that you want to create. The IPsec Template screen appears. The configuration
fields differ based on the Use Prefixed Template and Internet Key Exchange (IKE) settings you select.
7. In the Template Name field, type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
8. If you selected Custom in the Use Prefixed Template drop-down list, select the Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) options, and then change the settings if needed.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
• IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
• IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
• Manual Settings for an IPsec Template
375
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv1
Settings for an IPsec Template
IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
Option Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Use Prefixed Template Select Custom, IKEv1 High Security or IKEv1 Medium Security. The
setting items are different depending on the selected template.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption
keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To
carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption
algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption
keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication
that is limited to IKE is carried out.
If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv1.
Authentication Type
• Diffie-Hellman Group
This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely
exchanged over an unprotected network. The Diffie-Hellman key
exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the
secret key, to send and receive open information that was
generated using a random number and the secret key.
Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14.
• Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
Encapsulating Security
• Protocol
Select ESP, AH, or AH+ESP.
- ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication
using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated
contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet
comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which
follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP
packet also includes information regarding the encryption
method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so
on.
- AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the
sender and prevents manipulation (ensures the
completeness) of the data. In the IP packet, the data is
inserted immediately after the header. In addition, the
packets include hash values, which are calculated using an
equation from the communicated contents, secret key, and
so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and
manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated
contents are not encrypted, and the data is sent and
received as plain text.
• Encryption (Not available for the AH option.)
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
None can be selected only when ESP is selected in Protocol.
376
Option Description
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this
information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication
method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares
information, such as the encryption method and encryption key,
in order to establish a secure communication channel before
communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA
used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges
the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition,
the SA is updated periodically.
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt
messages. In addition, if a key that is used to encrypt a message was
derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other
keys. Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be
limited only to the messages that were encrypted using that key.
Select Enabled or Disabled.
Authentication Method Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key or
Certificates.
Pre-Shared Key When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and
shared beforehand using another channel.
If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type
the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32 characters).
• Local/ID Type/ID
Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
• Remote/ID Type/ID
Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
Certificate
If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the
certificate.
You can select only the certificates that were created using the
Certificate page of Web Based Management's Security
configuration screen.
Related Information
• Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
377
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv2
Settings for an IPsec Template
IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
Option Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Use Prefixed Template Select Custom, IKEv2 High Security, or IKEv2 Medium Security.
The setting items are different depending on the selected template.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption
keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To
carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption
algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption
keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication
that is limited to IKE is carried out.
If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv2.
Authentication Type
• Diffie-Hellman Group
This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely
exchanged over an unprotected network. The Diffie-Hellman key
exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the
secret key, to send and receive open information that was
generated using a random number and the secret key.
Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14.
• Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
Encapsulating Security
• Protocol
Select ESP.
ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication
using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated
contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet
comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which follows
the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also
includes information regarding the encryption method and
encryption key, the authentication data, and so on.
• Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this
information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
378
Option Description
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication
method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares
information, such as the encryption method and encryption key,
in order to establish a secure communication channel before
communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA
used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges
the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition,
the SA is updated periodically.
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt
messages. In addition, if a key that is used to encrypt a message was
derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other
keys. Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be
limited only to the messages that were encrypted using that key.
Select Enabled or Disabled.
Authentication Method Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key,
Certificates, EAP - MD5, or EAP - MS-CHAPv2.
EAP is an authentication protocol that is an extension of PPP.
By using EAP with IEEE802.1x, a different key is used for user
authentication during each session.
The following settings are necessary only when EAP - MD5 or
EAP - MS-CHAPv2 is selected in Authentication Method:
• Mode
Select Server-Mode or Client-Mode.
• Certificate
Select the certificate.
• User Name
Type the user name (up to 32 characters).
• Password
Type the password (up to 32 characters). The password
must be entered two times for confirmation.
Pre-Shared Key
When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and
shared beforehand using another channel.
If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type
the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32 characters).
• Local/ID Type/ID
Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
• Remote/ID Type/ID
Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
Certificate
If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the
certificate.
379
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > Manual
Settings for an IPsec Template
Manual Settings for an IPsec Template
Option Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Use Prefixed Template Select Custom.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption
keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To
carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption
algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption
keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication
that is limited to IKE is carried out.
Select Manual.
Authentication Key (ESP, AH)
Type the In/Out values.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template, Manual is selected for Internet Key Exchange
(IKE), and a setting other than None is selected for Hash for
Encapsulating Security section.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the
setting you chose for Hash in the Encapsulating Security
section.
If the length of the specified authentication key is different than
the selected hash algorithm, an error will occur.
• MD5: 128 bits (16 bytes)
• SHA1: 160 bits (20 bytes)
• SHA256: 256 bits (32 bytes)
• SHA384: 384 bits (48 bytes)
• SHA512: 512 bits (64 bytes)
When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the
characters in double quotation marks (").
Code key (ESP)
Type the In/Out values.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected in Use
Prefixed Template, Manual is selected in Internet Key Exchange
(IKE), and ESP is selected in Protocol in Encapsulating Security.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the
setting you chose for Encryption in the Encapsulating
Security section.
If the length of the specified code key is different than the
selected encryption algorithm, an error will occur.
• DES: 64 bits (8 bytes)
• 3DES: 192 bits (24 bytes)
• AES-CBC 128: 128 bits (16 bytes)
• AES-CBC 256: 256 bits (32 bytes)
When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the
characters in double quotation marks (").
SPI
These parameters are used to identify security information. Generally, a
host has multiple Security Associations (SAs) for several types of IPsec
communication. Therefore, it is necessary to identify the applicable SA
when an IPsec packet is received. The SPI parameter, which identifies
the SA, is included in the Authentication Header (AH) and
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) header.
381
Option Description
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template, and Manual is selected for Internet Key
Exchange (IKE).
Enter the In/Out values. (3-10 characters)
Encapsulating Security • Protocol
Select ESP or AH.
- ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication
using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated
contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet
comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which
follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP
packet also includes information regarding the encryption
method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so
on.
- AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the
sender and prevents manipulation of the data (ensures the
completeness of the data). In the IP packet, the data is
inserted immediately after the header. In addition, the
packets include hash values, which are calculated using an
equation from the communicated contents, secret key, and
so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and
manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated
contents are not encrypted, and the data is sent and
received as plain text.
• Encryption (Not available for the AH option.)
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
None can be selected only when ESP is selected in Protocol.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this
information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication
method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares
information, such as the encryption method and encryption key,
in order to establish a secure communication channel before
communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA
used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges
the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition,
the SA is updated periodically.
Related Information
• Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
382
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
• What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
• Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based
Management (Web Browser)
• IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
383
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > What Is IEEE
802.1x Authentication?
What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
IEEE 802.1x is an IEEE standard that limits access from unauthorised network devices. Your Brother machine
sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server (Authentication server) through your access point or hub.
After your request has been verified by the RADIUS server, your machine can access the network.
Related Information
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
384
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > Configure IEEE
802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)
Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network
Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate issued
by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client certificate. If
you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate name you want to
use.
• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the
server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to confirm
whether a CA certificate import is necessary.
You can also configure IEEE 802.1x authentication using the Wireless Setup Wizard from the control panel
(Wireless network).
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Do one of the following:
• For the wired network
Click Wired > Wired 802.1x Authentication.
• For the wireless network
Click Wireless > Wireless (Enterprise).
6. Configure the IEEE 802.1x authentication settings.
• To enable IEEE 802.1x authentication for wired networks, select Enabled for Wired 802.1x status on
the Wired 802.1x Authentication page.
• If you are using EAP-TLS authentication, you must select the client certificate installed (shown with
certificate name) for verification from the Client Certificate drop-down list.
• If you select EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TTLS, or EAP-TLS authentication, select the verification method
from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list. Verify the server certificate using the CA
certificate, imported to the machine in advance, issued by the CA that signed the server certificate.
385
Select one of the following verification methods from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list:
Option Description
No Verification The server certificate can always be trusted. The verification is not performed.
CA Cert. The verification method to check the CA reliability of the server certificate, using the
CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the server certificate.
CA Cert. + ServerID The verification method to check the common name
1
value of the server certificate,
in addition to the CA reliability of the server certificate.
7. When finished with configuration, click Submit.
For wired networks: After configuring, connect your machine to the IEEE 802.1x supported network. After a
few minutes, print the Network Configuration Report to check the <Wired IEEE 802.1x> status.
Option Description
Success The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled and the authentication was successful.
Failed The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled; however, the authentication failed.
Off The wired IEEE 802.1x function is not available.
Related Information
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
1 The common name verification compares the common name of the server certificate to the character string configured for the Server ID.
Before you use this method, contact your system administrator about the server certificate's common name and then configure Server ID.
386
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > IEEE 802.1x
Authentication Methods
IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
EAP-FAST
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunneling (EAP-FAST) has been
developed by Cisco Systems, Inc., which uses a user ID and password for authentication, and symmetric key
algorithms to achieve a tunnelled authentication process.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentication methods:
• EAP-FAST/NONE
• EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-FAST/GTC
EAP-MD5 (Wired network)
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Message Digest Algorithm 5 (EAP-MD5) uses a user ID and password for
challenge-response authentication.
PEAP
Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is a version of EAP method developed by Cisco
Systems, Inc., Microsoft Corporation and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL)/Transport Layer Security (TLS) tunnel between a client and an authentication server, for sending a user
ID and password. PEAP provides mutual authentication between the server and the client.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• PEAP/MS-CHAPv2
• PEAP/GTC
EAP-TTLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Tunneled Transport Layer Security (EAP-TTLS) has been developed by
Funk Software and Certicom. EAP-TTLS creates a similar encrypted SSL tunnel to PEAP, between a client
and an authentication server, for sending a user ID and password. EAP-TTLS provides mutual authentication
between the server and the client.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• EAP-TTLS/CHAP
• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP
• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-TTLS/PAP
EAP-TLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) requires digital certificate
authentication both at a client and an authentication server.
Related Information
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
387
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication
Use Active Directory Authentication
• Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
• Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management
• Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active
Directory Authentication)
388
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
Active Directory Authentication restricts the use of your machine. If Active Directory Authentication is enabled,
the machine's control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID
and password.
Active Directory Authentication offers the following features:
• Stores incoming print data
• Stores incoming fax data
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Obtains the email address from the Active Directory server based on your User
ID, when sending scanned data to an email server.
To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting and LDAP + kerberos
authentication method. Your email address will be set as the sender when the machine sends scanned data
to an email server, or as the recipient if you want to send the scanned data to your email address.
When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the
machine prints the stored fax data.
You can change the Active Directory Authentication settings using Web Based Management.
Related Information
• Use Active Directory Authentication
389
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Configure Active Directory Authentication Using
Web Based Management
Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based
Management
Active Directory authentication supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication. You must
configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS server configuration for authentication.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Active Directory Authentication.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click Active Directory Authentication.
8. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Storage Fax RX Data Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax
data after you log on to the machine.
Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID.
Active Directory Server
Address
Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ad.example.com) of
the Active Directory Server.
Active Directory Domain
Name
Type the Active Directory domain name.
Protocol & Authentication
Method
Select the protocol and authentication method.
SSL/TLS Select the SSL/TLS option.
LDAP Server Port Type the port number to connect the Active Directory server via LDAP
(available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2 authentication
method).
LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP +
NTLMv2 authentication method).
Get Mail Address Select this option to obtain logged on user's email address from the Active
Directory server (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2
authentication method).
390
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the
Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory Authentication)
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control
Panel (Active Directory Authentication)
When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter
your User ID and password on the machine's control panel.
1. On the machine's control panel, enter your User ID.
2. Press [OK].
3. Enter your password.
4. Press [OK].
5. Press [OK] again.
6. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel unlocks, and the LCD displays the Home
screen.
Related Information
• Use Active Directory Authentication
392
Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Introduction to LDAP Authentication
Introduction to LDAP Authentication
LDAP Authentication restricts the use of your machine. If LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control
panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID and password.
LDAP Authentication offers the following features:
• Stores incoming print data
• Stores incoming fax data
• Obtains the email address from the LDAP server based on your User ID, when sending scanned data to an
email server.
To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting. Your email address will be set as
the sender when the machine sends scanned data to an email server, or as the recipient if you want to send
the scanned data to your email address.
When LDAP Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the machine
prints the stored fax data.
You can change the LDAP Authentication settings using Web Based Management.
Related Information
• Use LDAP Authentication
394
Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based
Management
Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select LDAP Authentication.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click the LDAP Authentication menu.
8. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Storage Fax RX Data Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax
data after you log on to the machine.
Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID.
LDAP Server Address Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ldap.example.com) of
the LDAP server.
SSL/TLS Select the SSL/TLS option to use LDAP over SSL/TLS.
LDAP Server Port Type the LDAP server port number.
LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root directory.
Attribute of Name (Search
Key)
Type the attribute you want to use as a search key.
Get Mail Address Select this option to obtain the logged user's email address from the LDAP
server.
Get User's Home
Directory
Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to Network
destination.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use LDAP Authentication
395
Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the
Machine's Control Panel (LDAP Authentication)
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control
Panel (LDAP Authentication)
When LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter your User ID
and password on the machine's control panel.
1. On the machine's control panel, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Press [OK].
3. Enter your password.
4. Press [OK].
5. Press [OK] again.
6. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel unlocks, and the LCD displays the Home
screen.
Related Information
• Use LDAP Authentication
396
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Secure Function Lock 3.0 increases security by restricting the functions available on your machine.
• Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
• Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Configure Personal Home Screen Settings Using Web Based Management
• Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
• Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel
397
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use Secure Function Lock to configure passwords, set specific user page limits, and grant access to some or all
of the functions listed here.
You can configure and change the following Secure Function Lock 3.0 settings using Web Based Management:
• Print
Print includes print jobs sent via AirPrint, Brother iPrint&Scan, and Brother Mobile Connect.
If you register user login names in advance, the users do not need to enter their passwords when they use
the print function.
• Copy
• Scan
Scan includes scan jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan and Brother Mobile Connect.
• Send (supported models only)
• Receive (supported models only)
• USB Direct Print (supported models only)
• Scan to USB (supported models only)
• Web Connect (supported models only)
• Apps (supported models only)
• Page Limits
• Page Counters
• Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)
If you register user Card IDs in advance, registered users can activate the machine by touching their
registered cards to the machine's NFC symbol.
Touchscreen LCD models:
When Secure Function Lock is enabled, the machine automatically enters Public Mode and some of the
machine's functions become restricted to authorised users only. To access the restricted machine functions,
press
, select your user name, and enter your password.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
398
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based
Management
Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Secure Function Lock.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click the Restricted Functions menu.
8. In the User List / Restricted Functions field, type a group name or user name.
9. In the Print and the other columns, select a checkbox to allow, or clear a checkbox to restrict, the function
listed.
10. To configure the maximum page count, select the On checkbox in the Page Limits column, and then type the
maximum number in the Max. Pages field.
11. Click Submit.
12. Click the User List menu.
13. In the User List field, type the user name.
14. In the Password field, type a password.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on your model.
15. (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) In the E-mail Address field, type the user's email address (available for certain
models).
16. To register the user's Card ID, type the card number in the Card ID (NFC ID) field (available for certain
models).
17. Select User List / Restricted Functions from the drop-down list for each user.
18. (For MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Select Home Screen from the drop-down list for each
user.
19. Click Submit.
You can also change the user list lockout settings in the Secure Function Lock menu.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
399
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Setting Scan restrictions (for administrators)
Secure Function Lock 3.0 allows an administrator to restrict which users are allowed to scan. When the Scan
feature is set to Off for the public user setting, only users who have the Scan checkbox selected will be able to
scan.
Using the Scan feature (for restricted users)
• To scan using the machine's control panel:
Restricted users must enter their passwords on the machine's control panel to access Scan mode.
• To scan from a computer:
Restricted users must enter their passwords on the machine's control panel before scanning from their
computers. If the password is not entered on the machine's control panel, an error message will appear on
the user's computer.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
400
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use the Secure Function Lock screen to set up Public Mode, which limits the functions available to public users.
Public users will not need to enter a password to access the features made available through Public Mode
settings.
Public Mode includes print jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan and Brother Mobile Connect.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Secure Function Lock.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click the Restricted Functions menu.
8. In the Public Mode row, select a checkbox to allow, or clear a checkbox to restrict, the function listed.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
401
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Personal Home Screen Settings Using Web
Based Management
Configure Personal Home Screen Settings Using Web Based
Management
Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
As an Administrator, you can specify which tabs users can view on their personal home screens. These tabs
provide quick access to users' favourite shortcuts, which they can assign to their personal home screen tabs
from the machine's control panel.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Secure Function Lock.
6. In the Tab Settings field, select Personal for the tab names you want to use as your personal home screen.
7. Click Submit.
8. Click the Restricted Functions menu.
9. In the User List / Restricted Functions field, type a group name or user name.
10. Click Submit.
11. Click the User List menu.
12. In the User List field, type the user name.
13. In the Password field, type a password.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the model.
14. To register the user's Card ID, type the card number in the Card ID (NFC ID) field (available for certain
models).
15. Select User List / Restricted Functions from the drop-down list for each user.
16. Select the tab name from the Home Screen drop-down list for each user.
17. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Related Topics:
• Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
402
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
Configure the following features in the Secure Function Lock screen:
All Counter Reset
Click All Counter Reset, in the Page Counters column, to reset the page counter.
Export to CSV file
Click Export to CSV file, to export the current and last page counter including User List / Restricted
Functions information as a CSV file.
Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)
Click the User List menu, and then type a user's Card ID in the Card ID (NFC ID) field. You can use your IC
card for authentication.
Last Counter Record
Click Last Counter Record if you want the machine to retain the page count after the counter has been reset.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
403
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control
Panel
Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel
Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Touch the Near-Field Communication (NFC) symbol on the machine with a registered Integrated Circuit Card
(IC Card).
2. Touch your user ID on the machine.
3. Press [Register Card].
4. Touch a new IC Card to the NFC symbol.
The new IC Card's number is registered to the machine.
For the supported IC Card types, visit support.brother.com and click the FAQs & Troubleshooting page.
5. Press [OK].
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
404
Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web
Based Management
Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure secured email sending with user authentication,
or email sending and receiving using SSL/TLS.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client field, click Advanced Settings and make sure the status of POP3/IMAP4/
SMTP Client is Enabled.
6. Configure the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client settings.
• Confirm that the email settings are correct after configuration by sending a test email.
• If you do not know the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet
Service Provider (ISP).
7. When finished, click Submit.
The Test Send/Receive E-mail Configuration dialog box appears.
8. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to test the current settings.
Related Information
• Send or Receive an Email Securely
406
Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send an Email with User Authentication
Send an Email with User Authentication
Your machine supports the SMTP-AUTH method to send email via an email server that requires user
authentication. This method prevents unauthorised users from accessing the email server.
You can use the SMTP-AUTH method for email notification, email reports and I-Fax.
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure the SMTP authentication.
Email Server Settings
You must configure your machine's SMTP authentication method to match the method used by your email server.
For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider
(ISP).
To enable SMTP server authentication: in the Web Based Management POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client screen,
under Server Authentication Method, you must select SMTP-AUTH.
Related Information
• Send or Receive an Email Securely
407
Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send or Receive an Email Securely Using
SSL/TLS
Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS
Your machine supports SSL/TLS communication methods. To use an email server that is using SSL/TLS
communication, you must configure the following settings.
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure SSL/TLS.
Verify Server Certificate
Under SSL/TLS, if you choose SSL or TLS, the Verify Server Certificate checkbox will be selected
automatically.
• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed
the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to
confirm if importing a CA certificate is necessary.
• If you do not need to verify the server certificate, clear the Verify Server Certificate checkbox.
Port Number
If you select SSL, or TLS, the Port value will be changed to match the protocol. To change the port number
manually, type the port number after you select SSL/TLS settings.
You must configure your machine's communication method to match the method used by your email server. For
details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or your ISP.
In most cases, the secured webmail services require the following settings:
SMTP
Port 25
Server Authentication Method SMTP-AUTH
SSL/TLS TLS
POP3 Port 995
SSL/TLS SSL
IMAP4 Port 993
SSL/TLS SSL
Related Information
• Send or Receive an Email Securely
Related Topics:
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
408
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network
Store Print Log to Network
• Store Print Log to Network Overview
• Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management
• Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting
• Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0
409
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Store Print Log to Network Overview
Store Print Log to Network Overview
The Store Print Log to Network feature allows you to save the print log file from your machine to a network server
using the Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol. You can record the ID, type of print job, job name, user
name, date, time and the number of printed pages for every print job. CIFS is a protocol that runs over TCP/IP,
allowing computers on a network to share files over an intranet or the Internet.
The following print functions are recorded in the print log:
• Print jobs from your computer
• USB Direct Print (supported models only)
• Copy
• Received Fax (supported models only)
• Web Connect Print (supported models only)
• The Store Print Log to Network feature supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication.
You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time
zone correctly on the control panel for authentication.
• You can set the file type to TXT or CSV when storing a file to the server.
Related Information
• Store Print Log to Network
410
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using
Web Based Management
Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based
Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Store Print Log to Network.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Print Log field, click On.
6. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Network Folder
Path
Type the destination folder where your print log will be stored on the CIFS server (for
example: \\ComputerName\SharedFolder).
File Name Type the file name you want to use for the print log (up to 32 characters).
File Type Select the TXT or CSV option for the print log file type.
Time Source
for Log
Select the time source for the print log.
Auth. Method Select the authentication method required for access to the CIFS server: Auto,
Kerberos, or NTLMv2. Kerberos is an authentication protocol which allows devices or
individuals to securely prove their identity to network servers using a single sign-on.
NTLMv2 is the authentication method used by Windows to log into servers.
• Auto: If you select Auto, NTLMv2 will be used to the authentication method.
• Kerberos: Select the Kerberos option to use Kerberos authentication only.
• NTLMv2: Select the NTLMv2 option to use NTLMv2 authentication only.
• For the Kerberos and NTLMv2 authentication, you must also configure
the Date&Time settings or the SNTP protocol (network time server) and
DNS server.
• You can also configure the Date & Time settings from the machine's
control panel.
Username Type the user name for the authentication (up to 96 characters).
If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the
following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
Password Type the password for the authentication (up to 32 characters).
411
Option Description
Kerberos
Server Address
(if needed)
Type the Key Distribution Center (KDC) host address (for example:
kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example:
192.168.56.189).
Error Detection
Setting
Choose what action should be taken when the print log cannot be stored to the server
due to a network error.
7. In the Connection Status field, confirm the last log status.
You can also confirm the error status on the LCD of your machine.
8. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.
To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.
To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically.
9. The machine will test your settings.
10. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.
If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.
Related Information
• Store Print Log to Network
412
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection
Setting
Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting
Use Error Detection Settings to determine the action that is taken when the print log cannot be stored to the
server due to a network error.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Store Print Log to Network.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Error Detection Setting section, select the Cancel Print or Ignore Log & Print option.
Option Description
Cancel
Print
If you select the Cancel Print option, the print jobs are cancelled when the print log cannot be
stored to the server.
Even if you select the Cancel Print option, your machine will print a received fax.
(For MFC models)
Ignore
Log &
Print
If you select the Ignore Log & Print option, the machine prints the documentation even if the
print log cannot be stored to the server.
When the Store Print Log function has recovered, the print log is recorded as follows:
a. If the print log cannot be stored at the end of printing, the number of printed pages will not
be recorded.
b. If the print log cannot be stored at the beginning and the end of printing, the print log of the
job will not be recorded. When the function has recovered, the error is reflected in the print
log.
6. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.
To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.
To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically.
7. The machine will test your settings.
8. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.
If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.
413
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock
3.0
Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0
When Secure Function Lock 3.0 is active, the names of the registered users for copy, Fax RX (for MFC models),
Web Connect Print and USB Direct Print (if available) are recorded in the Store Print Log to Network report.
When the Active Directory Authentication is enabled, the user name is recorded in the Store Print Log to Network
report:
Related Information
• Store Print Log to Network
415
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Before turning the machine's Setting Lock on, write down and save your password. If you forget the password,
you must reset all passwords stored in the machine by contacting your administrator or Brother customer service.
• Setting Lock Overview
416
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview
Setting Lock Overview
Use the Setting Lock feature to block unauthorised access to machine settings.
When Setting Lock is set to On, you cannot access the machine settings without entering the password.
• Set the Setting Lock Password
• Change the Setting Lock Password
• Turn Setting Lock On
• Restrict Specific Machine Settings
417
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Set the
Setting Lock Password
Set the Setting Lock Password
>> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
>> MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter a four-digit number for the password.
3. Press [OK].
4. When the LCD displays [Verify:], re-enter the password.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press .
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Admin Settings].
2. Type the current Administrator password, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Password].
4. Type the current Administrator password again, and then press [OK].
5. Type the password you want to use (8 to 32 characters), and then press [OK].
This password is also valid for other [Admin Settings] features and Web Based Management login.
6. When the LCD displays [Verify], retype the password, and then press [OK].
7. When the machine prompts you to select the next step, make your selection.
8. Press .
Related Information
• Setting Lock Overview
Related Topics:
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
418
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Change
the Setting Lock Password
Change the Setting Lock Password
>> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
>> MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Set
Password].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter the current four-digit password.
3. Press [OK].
4. Enter a new four-digit password.
5. Press [OK].
6. When the LCD displays [Verify:], re-enter the password.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press .
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press
[Admin Settings].
2. Type the current password, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Password].
4. Type the current password again, and then press [OK].
5. Type a new password you want to use (8 to 32 characters), and then press [OK].
6. When the LCD displays [Verify], retype the password, and then press [OK].
7. Press
.
Related Information
• Setting Lock Overview
419
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Turn
Setting Lock On
Turn Setting Lock On
>> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
>> MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Lock
Off⇒On].
2. Enter the current four-digit password.
3. Press [OK].
To turn Setting Lock off, press on the LCD, enter the current four-digit password, and then press [OK].
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Admin Settings].
2. Type the current password, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Restriction Management] > [Setting Lock] > [On].
4. When the machine prompts you to select the next step, make your selection, and then press [OK].
To turn Setting Lock off, repeat steps 1 and 2, and then press [Restriction Management] >
[Setting Lock] > [Off].
5. Press .
Related Information
• Setting Lock Overview
420
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Restrict
Specific Machine Settings
Restrict Specific Machine Settings
Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Admin Settings].
2. Enter the current Administrator password, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Restriction Management] > [Setting Lock Details].
4. When the machine prompts you to select the next step, make your selection, and then press [OK].
To turn Setting Lock off, repeat steps 1 and 2, and then press [Restriction Management] >
[Setting Lock] > [Off].
5. Press .
Related Information
• Setting Lock Overview
421
Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features
Use Global Network Detection Features
When you use your machine on a private network, use the Global Network Detection feature to avoid a risk from
unexpected attacks from the global network.
• Enable Global IP Address Detection
• Block Communications from the Global Network
422
Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features > Enable Global IP Address Detection
Enable Global IP Address Detection
Use this feature to check your machine's IP address. When your machine is assigned to a global IP address, an
alert is displayed on the machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Global Detect] > [Allow Detect] >
[On].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
• Use Global Network Detection Features
423
Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features > Block Communications from the Global
Network
Block Communications from the Global Network
When you enable this feature, it limits receiving jobs from devices with global IP addresses
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Global Detect] > [Reject Access] >
[On].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
• Use Global Network Detection Features
424
Home > Administrator > Security Features
Security Features
Your machine uses some of the latest network security and encryption protocols. These network features can be
integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and prevent unauthorised access to
the machine.
• Network Security
• User Authentication
427
Home > Administrator > Security Features > Network Security > Before Using Network Security Features
Before Using Network Security Features
Your machine employs some of the latest network security and encryption protocols available today. These
network features can be integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and prevent
unauthorised access to the machine.
We recommend disabling the Telnet, FTP server, and TFTP protocols. Accessing the machine using these
protocols is not secure.
Related Information
• Security
• Network Security
• Disable Unnecessary Protocols
429
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect
Brother Web Connect
• Brother Web Connect Overview
• Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
• Set Up Brother Web Connect
• Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect
• Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
• FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
433
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Overview
Brother Web Connect Overview
Certain websites provide services that allow users to upload and view images and files on the websites. Your
Brother machine can scan images and upload them to these services, and also download and print images that
are already uploaded to these services.
1. Printing
2. Scanning
3. Photos, images, documents, and other files
4. Web Service
To use Brother Web Connect, your Brother machine must be connected to a network that has access to the
Internet, through either a wired or wireless connection.
For network setups that use a proxy server, the machine must also be configured to use a proxy server. If you
are unsure of your network configuration, check with your network administrator.
A proxy server is a computer that serves as an intermediary between computers without a direct Internet
connection, and the Internet.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
434
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Overview > Configure the
Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured on the machine:
• Proxy server address
• Port number
• User Name
• Password
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Connect Settings] > [Proxy
Settings] > [Proxy Connection] > [On].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the option that you want to set, and then enter the proxy server information.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press
.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect Overview
Related Topics:
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
435
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
Use Brother Web Connect to access services from your Brother machine:
To use Brother Web Connect, you must have an account with the online service you want to use. If you do not
already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account.
If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.
Google Drive
™
An online document storage, editing, sharing, and file synchronisation service.
URL: drive.google.com
Evernote
®
An online file storage and management service.
URL: www.evernote.com
Dropbox
An online file storage, sharing, and synchronisation service.
URL: www.dropbox.com
OneDrive
An online file storage, sharing, and managing service.
URL:
onedrive.live.com
Box
An online document editing and sharing service.
URL: www.box.com
OneNote
An online document editing and sharing service.
URL:
www.onenote.com
SharePoint Online
An online content storage, sharing, and managing service.
For more information about any of these services, refer to the respective service's website.
The following table describes which file types can be used with each Brother Web Connect feature:
Accessible Services
Google Drive
™
Evernote
®
Dropbox
OneDrive
Box
OneNote
SharePoint Online
Download and print images
1
JPEG
PDF
DOCX
XLSX
PPTX
Upload scanned images JPEG
PDF
2
DOCX
XLSX
436
Accessible Services
Google Drive
™
Evernote
®
Dropbox
OneDrive
Box
OneNote
SharePoint Online
PPTX
TIFF
XPS
FaxForward to the online
services
(available for certain
models)
JPEG
PDF
TIFF
1
DOC/XLS/PPT formats are also available for downloading and printing images.
2
Includes Searchable PDF, Signed PDF, Secure PDF, PDF/A and High Compression PDF.
(For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea)
Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not
be downloaded.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
437
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect
Set Up Brother Web Connect
• Brother Web Connect Setup Overview
• Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect
• Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
• Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
438
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Brother Web
Connect Setup Overview
Brother Web Connect Setup Overview
Configure the Brother Web Connect settings using the following procedure:
Step 1: Create an account with the service you want to use.
Access the service's website using a computer and create an account. (If you already have an account, there
is no need to create an additional account.)
1. User registration
2. Web Service
3. Obtain account
Step 2: Apply for Brother Web Connect access.
Start Brother Web Connect access using a computer and obtain a temporary ID.
1. Enter account information
2. Brother Web Connect application page
3. Obtain temporary ID
Step 3: Register your account information on your machine so you can access the service you want to
use.
Enter the temporary ID to enable the service on your machine. Specify the account name as you would like it
to be displayed on the machine, and enter a PIN if you would like to use one.
1. Enter temporary ID
2. Web Service
Your Brother machine can now use the service.
439
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Create an Account
for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect
Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web
Connect
To use Brother Web Connect to access an online service, you must have an account with that online service. If
you do not already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account.
After creating an account, log on and use the account once with a computer before using the Brother Web
Connect feature. Otherwise, you may not be able to access the service using Brother Web Connect.
If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.
When you have created an account with the online service you want to use, apply for Brother Web Connect
access.
Related Information
• Set Up Brother Web Connect
441
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Apply for Brother
Web Connect Access
Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
To use Brother Web Connect to access online services, you must first apply for Brother Web Connect access
using a computer that has the Brother Software installed.
1. Access the Brother Web Connect application website:
Option Description
Windows Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name
(if not already selected).
Click Do More in the left navigation bar, and then click Brother Web Connect.
You can also access the website directly:
Type bwc.brother.com into your web browser's address bar.
Mac Type bwc.brother.com into your web browser's address bar.
The Brother Web Connect page launches.
2. Select the service you want to use.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions and apply for access.
When using SharePoint Online, follow the on-screen instructions to register a document library.
When finished, your temporary ID appears.
4. Make a note of your temporary ID as you will need it to register accounts to the machine. The temporary ID is
valid for 24 hours.
5. Close the web browser.
Now that you have a Brother Web Connect access ID, you must register this ID on your machine, and then use
your machine to access the web service you want to use.
Related Information
• Set Up Brother Web Connect
442
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Register an
Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
You must enter your Brother Web Connect account information and configure your machine so that it can use
Brother Web Connect to access the service you want.
• You must apply for Brother Web Connect access to register an account on your machine.
• Before you register an account, confirm that the correct date and time are set on the machine.
1. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
2. Press [Web].
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. If the information regarding licence agreement appears, make your selection and follow the on-screen
instructions.
4. Select the service with which you want to register.
5. Press the service name.
6. If information regarding Brother Web Connect appears, press [OK].
7. Press [Register/Delete Account].
8. Press [Register Account].
The machine will prompt you to enter the temporary ID you received when you applied for Brother Web
Connect access.
9. Press [OK].
10. Enter the temporary ID using the LCD.
11. Press [OK].
An error message will appear on the LCD if the information you entered does not match the temporary ID
you received when you applied for access, or if the temporary ID has expired. Enter the temporary ID
correctly, or apply for access again to receive a new temporary ID.
The machine will prompt you to enter the account name that you want displayed on the LCD.
12. Press [OK].
13. Enter the name using the LCD.
14. Press [OK].
15. Do one of the following:
• To set a PIN for the account, press [Yes]. (A PIN prevents unauthorised access to the account.) Enter a
four-digit number, and then press [OK].
• If you do not want to set a PIN, press [No].
16. When the account information you entered appears, confirm that it is correct.
17. Press [Yes] to register your information as entered.
18. Press [OK].
19. Press .
Registration is complete and your machine can now access the service.
444
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web
Connect
Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Upload your scanned photos and documents directly to a web service without using a computer.
Uploaded documents are saved in an album named From_BrotherDevice.
For information regarding restrictions, such as the size or number of documents that can be uploaded, refer to
the respective service's website.
If you are a restricted Web Connect user, due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature (available for
certain models), you cannot upload the scanned data.
1. Load your document.
2. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
3. Press [Web].
• You can also press [Scan] > [to Web].
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
4. Select the service that hosts the account to which you want to upload.
5. Select your account name.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
446
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Documents that have been uploaded to your account can be downloaded directly to your machine and printed.
Documents that other users have uploaded to their own accounts for sharing can also be downloaded to your
machine and printed, as long as you have viewing privileges for those documents.
If you are a restricted user for Web Connect due, to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature (available for
certain models), you cannot download the data.
The Secure Function Lock Page Limit feature applies only to print jobs sent using Brother Web Connect..
For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea:
Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not
be downloaded.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
• Download and Print Using Web Services
447
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect > Download and Print Using Web Services
Download and Print Using Web Services
1. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
2. Press [Web].
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Select the service that hosts the document you want to download and print.
4. If the PIN entry screen appears, enter the four-digit PIN and press [OK].
Depending on the service, you may have to select the account name from a list.
5. Press [Download to Print].
6. Select the album you want. Some services do not require documents to be saved in albums. For documents
not saved in albums, select [Show Unsorted Photos] or [Show Unsorted Files] to select
documents.
An album is a collection of images. The actual term may differ depending on the service you use. When
using Evernote
®
, you must select the notebook, and then select the note.
7. Select the thumbnail of the document you want to print. Confirm the document on the LCD and then press
[OK]. Select additional documents to print (you can select up to 10 documents).
8. When finished, press [OK].
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
• Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Related Topics:
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
448
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
• Use the FaxForward to Cloud feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to your accounts with the
available online services.
1
1. Web Service
• Use the FaxForward to E-mail feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to an inbox as email
attachments.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
• Use FaxForward to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email
• Stop Using FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud location
449
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail > Use FaxForward
to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email
Use FaxForward to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Turn the FaxForward feature on to automatically forward incoming faxes to either an online service or an inbox
as email attachments.
• If you are a restricted Apps or Fax Receive user, due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature
(available for certain models), you cannot upload the incoming faxes.
• This feature is available only for monochrome faxes.
• If you turn the FaxForward to Cloud feature on, you cannot use the following options:
- [Fax Forward]
- [Fax Storage]
- [PC Fax Receive]
- [Forward to Network]
1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
2. Press [Apps].
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Select [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail].
If the information regarding [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] appears, read it, and then press [OK].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [Forward to Cloud] or [Forward to E-mail].
• If you selected [Forward to Cloud], choose the online service you want to receive the faxes, and
then specify your account name.
• If you selected [Forward to E-mail], enter the email address you want to receive the faxes as email
attachments.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
• FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
450
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail > Stop Using
FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud location
Stop Using FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud
location
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Turn the FaxForward feature off when you want to stop incoming faxes from automatically going to either an
online service or an inbox as email attachments.
If there are received faxes still in your machine's memory, you cannot turn the FaxForward to Cloud feature off.
1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
2. Press [Apps].
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Select [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail].
If the information regarding [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] appears, read it, and then press [OK].
4. Press [Off].
5. Press [OK].
Related Information
• FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
451
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > AirPrint Overview
AirPrint Overview
AirPrint is a printing solution for Apple operating systems that allows you
to wirelessly print photos, email, web pages, and documents from your
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Mac computer without the need to install a
driver.
AirPrint also lets you send faxes directly from your Mac computer without
printing them and lets you scan documents to your Mac computer.
(MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
AirPrint also lets you scan documents to your Mac computer.
For more information, visit Apple’s website.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Related Information
• AirPrint
Related Topics:
• AirPrint Problems
453
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before printing using macOS, add your machine to the printer list on your Mac computer.
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu.
2. Click Printers & Scanners.
3. Click the + icon below the Printers pane on the left.
The Add Printer screen appears.
4. Do one of the following:
• macOS v12
Select your machine, and then select your model's name from the Use pop-up menu.
• macOS v11
Select your machine, and then select AirPrint from the Use pop-up menu.
5. Click Add Printer.
Related Information
• AirPrint
454
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. Load the paper in the paper tray and change the paper tray settings on your machine.
3. Use Safari to open the page that you want to print.
4. Tap
or .
5. Tap Print.
6. Make sure your machine is selected.
7. If a different machine (or no machine) is selected, tap Printer.
A list of available machines appears.
8. Tap your machine's name in the list.
9. Select the options you want, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your
machine).
10. Tap Print.
Related Information
• Print Using AirPrint
456
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below. Before printing,
make sure your machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. Load the paper in the paper tray and change the paper tray settings on your machine.
3. On your Mac computer, use Safari to open the page that you want to print.
4. Click the File menu, and then select Print.
5. Make sure your machine is selected. If a different machine (or no machine) is selected, click the Printer pop-
up menu, and then select your machine.
6. Select the desired options, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your
machine).
7. Click Print.
Related Information
• Print Using AirPrint
Related Topics:
• Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
457
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)
Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before scanning, make sure your machine is in the scanner list on your Mac computer.
1. Load your document.
2. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu.
3. Click Printers & Scanners.
4. Select your machine from the scanner list.
5. Click the Scan tab, and then click the Open Scanner… button.
The Scanner screen appears.
6. If you place the document in the ADF, select Use Document Feeder checkbox, and then select the size of
your document from the scan size setting pop-up menu.
7. Select the destination folder or destination application from the destination setting pop-up menu.
8. Click Show Details to change the scanning settings if needed.
You can crop the image manually by dragging the mouse pointer over the portion you want to scan when
scanning from the scanner glass.
9. Click Scan.
Related Information
• AirPrint
Related Topics:
• Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
458
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Make sure your machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer. Apple TextEdit is used in the example
below.
AirPrint supports only monochrome fax documents.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. On your Mac computer, open the file that you want to send as a fax.
3. Click the File menu, and then select Print.
4. Click the Printer pop-up menu, and then select your model with - Fax in the name.
5. Type the fax recipient information.
6. Click Fax.
Related Information
• AirPrint
Related Topics:
• PC-FAX for Mac
• Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
459
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Mopria
™
Print Service and Mopria
™
Scan
Mopria
™
Print Service and Mopria
™
Scan
Mopria
™
Print Service is a print feature and Mopria
™
Scan is a scan feature on
Android
™
mobile devices developed by the Mopria Alliance
™
. With this service,
you can connect to the same network as your machine to print and scan without
additional setup.
1
2
3
1. Android
™
Mobile Device
2. Wi-Fi
®
Connection
3. Your Machine
You must download the Mopria
™
Print Service or Mopria
™
Scan from Google Play
™
and install it on your
Android
™
device. Before using these Mopria features, make sure you enable them on your mobile device.
Related Information
• Mobile/Web Connect
460
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Mobile Connect
Brother Mobile Connect
Use Brother Mobile Connect to print and scan from your mobile device.
• For Android
™
devices:
Brother Mobile Connect allows you to use your Brother machine's features directly from your Android
™
device.
Download and install Brother Mobile Connect from Google Play
™
.
• For all iOS or iPadOS supported devices including iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch:
Brother Mobile Connect allows you to use your Brother machine's features directly from your iOS or iPadOS
device.
Download and install Brother Mobile Connect from the App Store.
Related Information
• Mobile/Web Connect
Related Topics:
• Brother iPrint&Scan
• Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
461
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Register an External Integrated Circuit (IC) Card Reader
Register an External Integrated Circuit (IC) Card Reader
Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
When you connect an external IC card reader, use Web Based Management to register the card reader. Your
machine supports HID class driver supported external IC card readers.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > External Card Reader.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Enter the necessary information.
6. Click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Mobile/Web Connect
462
Home > Brother iPrint&Scan > Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Use Brother iPrint&Scan for Windows and Mac to print and scan from your computer.
The following screen shows an example of Brother iPrint&Scan for Windows. The actual screen may differ
depending on the version of the application.
• For Windows
Go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com to download the latest application.
• For Mac
Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the App Store.
If prompted, install the driver and software necessary to use your machine. Download the installer from
your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com.
Related Information
• Brother iPrint&Scan
Related Topics:
• Brother Mobile Connect
• Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
464
Home > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Use this section to resolve typical problems you may encounter when using your machine. You can correct most
problems yourself.
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
If you need additional help, visit support.brother.com.
First, check the following:
• The machine's power cord is connected correctly and the machine's power is on. See the Quick Setup Guide.
• All of the protective materials have been removed. See the Quick Setup Guide.
• Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.
• The interface cables are securely connected to the machine and the computer, or the wireless connection is
set up on both the machine and your computer.
• Error and maintenance messages
If you did not solve the problem with the checks, identify the problem and then see Related Information.
Related Information
• Error and Maintenance Messages
• Document Jams
• Paper Jams
• Printing Problems
• Improve the Print Quality
• Telephone and Fax Problems
• Network Problems
• AirPrint Problems
• Other Problems
• Check the Machine Information
• Reset Your Machine
465
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages
Error and Maintenance Messages
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and supply items may have to be replaced. If this
happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and shows the appropriate message.
The most common error and maintenance messages are shown in the table.
Follow the instructions in the Action column to solve the error and remove the message.
You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more tips: Visit
support.brother.com, and click the FAQs & Troubleshooting page.
Error Message Cause Action
2-sided Disabled
The back cover of the machine
is not closed completely.
Close the back cover of the machine until it locks
in the closed position.
The 2-sided tray is not installed
completely.
Install the 2-sided tray firmly in the machine.
Access Denied
The function you want to use is
restricted by Secure Function
Lock 3.0.
Call your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
BT Call Sign On
(For U.K.)
The BT Call Sign setting is on.
You cannot change the Receive
Mode from Manual to another
mode.
Set the BT Call Sign setting to off.
Cannot Detect
Your machine cannot detect the
drum unit.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly. Remove the toner cartridge from the
drum unit, and reinstall the toner cartridge back in
the drum unit.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly back in the machine.
Your machine cannot detect the
toner cartridge.
Cannot Print ## The machine has a mechanical
problem.
• Press and hold to turn the machine off,
wait a few minutes, and then turn it on again.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Cannot Scan
The document is too long for
2‑sided scanning.
Press . For 2-sided scanning, use A4 size
paper. Other paper must be within the following
size:
Length: 147.3 to 355.6 mm
Width: 105 to 215.9 mm
Cannot Scan ## The machine has a mechanical
problem.
• Press and hold to turn the machine off,
and then turn it on again.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Comm.Error
Poor telephone line quality
caused a communication error.
Send the fax again or connect the machine to
another telephone line. If the problem continues,
contact your telephone company and ask them to
check the telephone line.
Cooling Down
The temperature of the inside of
the machine is too hot. The
machine pauses its current print
job and goes into Cooling Down
mode.
Wait until the machine has finished cooling down.
Make sure all vents on the machine are clear of
obstructions.
When the machine has cooled down, it will
resume printing.
If the fan is not spinning, disconnect the machine
from the power for several minutes, then
reconnect it.
466
Error Message Cause Action
Cover is Open
The front cover is not
completely closed.
Open and then firmly close the front cover of the
machine.
Cover is Open.
The fuser cover is not
completely closed or paper was
jammed in the back of the
machine when you turned on
the power.
Close the fuser cover located inside the back
cover of the machine.
Make sure paper is not jammed inside the back of
the machine, and then close the fuser cover.
Cover is Open.
The ADF cover is not
completely closed.
Close the ADF cover.
If the error message remains, press
.
Disconnected
The other person or other
person's fax machine stopped
the call.
Try to send or receive again.
If calls are stopped repeatedly and you are using
a VoIP (Voice over IP) system, try changing the
Compatibility to Basic (for VoIP).
Document Jam
The document was not inserted
or fed correctly, or the
document scanned from the
ADF was too long.
Remove the jammed paper from the ADF unit.
Clear any debris or scraps of paper from the ADF
unit paper path.
Press .
Drum !
The corona wire on the drum
unit must be cleaned.
Clean the corona wire on the drum unit.
See Related Information: Clean the Corona Wire.
If the problem continues, replace the drum unit
with a new one.
The drum unit or the toner
cartridge and drum unit
assembly is not installed
correctly.
Remove the drum unit, remove the toner cartridge
from the drum unit, and put the toner cartridge
back into the drum unit. Reinstall the drum unit in
the machine.
Drum Error
The drum unit is not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly.
If the problem continues, replace the drum unit
with a new one.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
Jam 2-sided
The paper is jammed in the 2-
sided tray or inside the back
cover.
Remove the 2-sided tray and open the back cover
to pull out all jammed paper.
Jam Inside
The paper is jammed inside the
machine.
Open the front cover, remove the toner cartridge
and drum unit assembly, and pull out all jammed
paper. Close the front cover.
Jam MP Tray
The paper is jammed in the MP
tray.
Remove all jammed paper from in and around the
MP tray. Press Retry.
467
Error Message Cause Action
Jam Rear
The paper is jammed in the
back of the machine.
Open the fuser cover and remove all jammed
paper. Close the fuser cover. If the error message
remains, press Retry.
Jam Tray 1
Jam Tray 2
Jam Tray 3
The paper is jammed in the
indicated paper tray.
Pull out the paper tray and remove all jammed
paper as shown in the animation on the LCD.
Limit Exceeded
The print limit set in Secure
Function Lock 3.0 was reached.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock settings.
Media Type Mismatch
The media type specified in the
printer driver differs from the
paper type specified in the
machine's menu.
Load the correct type of paper in the tray
indicated on the LCD, and then select the correct
media type in the Paper Type setting on the
machine.
Press Retry.
No Drum
The drum unit is not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
No HUB Support
A USB hub device is connected
to the USB accessory port.
Disconnect the USB hub device from the USB
accessory port.
No Paper
The machine is out of paper, or
paper is not loaded correctly in
the paper trays.
• Refill paper in the paper trays. Make sure the
paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
• Do not overfill the paper tray.
No Paper Fed T1
No Paper Fed T2
No Paper Fed T3
The machine cannot feed paper
from the indicated paper tray.
Pull out the paper tray indicated on the LCD and
remove all jammed paper.
No Paper MP Tray
The MP tray is out of paper, or
paper is not loaded correctly in
the MP tray.
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the MP tray. Make sure the
paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
No Paper
No Paper T1
No Paper T2
No Paper T3
No Paper Tray 1
No Paper Tray 2
No Paper Tray 3
The machine cannot feed paper
from the indicated paper tray.
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the paper tray indicated on the
LCD. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
• Do not overfill the paper tray.
No Response
An unsupported USB device
has been connected to the USB
accessory port.
• Unplug the device from the USB accessory
port.
• Press and hold to turn the machine off,
and then turn it on again.
No Response/Busy
The number you dialled does
not answer or is busy.
Verify the number and try again.
468
Error Message Cause Action
No Toner
The toner cartridge is not
installed or is not installed
correctly.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly. Remove the toner cartridge from the
drum unit, and reinstall the toner cartridge back in
the drum unit.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly back in the machine. If the problem
continues, replace the toner cartridge with a new
one.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner
Cartridge.
No Tray T1
No Tray T2
No Tray T3
The paper tray is not installed
or not installed correctly.
Reinstall the paper tray indicated on the LCD.
Out of Fax Memory
The machine's fax memory is
full.
If you are using the Fax Preview function, delete
unwanted received fax data.
If you are using the Memory Receive function and
are not using the Fax Preview function, print
received fax data. To print fax data, press
Settings > All Settings > Fax > Print
Document.
Out of Memory
The machine's memory is full. If a fax-sending or copy operation is in
process
Do one of the following:
• Press Send Now to send the pages scanned
so far.
• Press Partial Print to copy the pages
scanned so far.
• Press Quit or
and wait until the other
operations that are in progress finish, and then
try again.
If a scan operation is in progress, do one of
the following:
• Split the document into multiple parts.
• Reduce the resolution.
• Reduce the file size.
• Select the high compression PDF file type.
• Clear faxes from the memory.
If a print operation is in process
Press and reduce the print resolution.
Output Tray Full
The output paper tray is full. Remove the printed paper from the Face-down
output tray.
Paper Low
Paper Low T1
Paper Low T2
Paper Low T3
The paper tray is nearly empty. Refill the paper in the paper tray indicated on the
LCD.
Print Data Full
The machine’s memory is full.
Press and delete the previously stored
secure print data.
Received Fax ## An unprinted received fax is
waiting to print on the correct
size paper.
To print the received fax, load the correct size of
paper in the tray indicated on the LCD. Paper
sizes available for fax printing are A4, Letter,
Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal and India Legal.
469
Error Message Cause Action
Replace Toner
The toner cartridge is at the end
of its life.
After stopping printing, faxes
are stored in memory while
memory is available.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner
Cartridge.
Self-Diagnostic
The fuser unit does not work
correctly.
Press and hold to turn the machine off, wait a
few seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the
machine idle for 15 minutes with the power on.
The fuser unit is too hot.
Size Error
The paper tray you selected
does not support the paper size
specified in the printer driver.
Change the printer driver setting or machine's tray
setting so that the paper size selected in the
printer driver matches the paper size loaded in
the tray you selected.
Size Error 2-sided
The paper size specified in the
machine's paper size setting is
not suitable for automatic 2-
sided printing.
Press (if required).
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set
the tray for that paper size.
Choose a paper size suitable for 2-sided printing.
The paper size suitable for automatic 2-sided
printing is A4.
The paper in the tray is not the
correct size and is not suitable
for automatic 2-sided printing.
Size Mismatch
The paper in the tray is not the
correct size.
Load the correct size of paper in the tray
indicated on the LCD and set the size of paper for
the tray.
Storage device not
recognized
Your machine cannot read from
or write to the USB flash
memory drive.
Press and hold to turn the machine off, and
then turn it on again.
If the problem continues, reset the location where
you save jobs.
Storage Full
The USB flash memory drive
you are using does not have
enough free space to store print
data.
Delete the previously stored print data from the
USB flash memory drive.
Supplies
Drum End Soon
The drum unit is near the end of
its life.
Order a new drum unit before the LCD displays
Replace Drum.
Supplies
Replace Drum
It is time to replace the drum
unit.
Replace the drum unit with a new one.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
Supplies
Toner Low
If the LCD displays this
message, you can still print.
The toner cartridge is near the
end of its life.
Order a new toner cartridge now so you have it
ready when the LCD displays Replace Toner.
Too Many Trays
The number of installed
Optional Trays exceeds the
maximum number.
Reduce the number of Optional Trays.
Touchscreen
Initialisation Failed
The touchscreen was pressed
when turning the machine on.
Make sure nothing is touching the touchscreen.
Debris may be stuck between
the lower part of the
touchscreen and its frame.
Insert a piece of stiff paper between the lower part
of the touchscreen and its frame and slide it back
and forth to push out any debris.
Tray removed
The standard paper tray is not
installed or not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the standard paper tray.
Unusable Device
An unsupported USB device
has been connected to the USB
accessory port.
Unplug the device from the USB accessory port.
470
Error Message Cause Action
Unusable Device
Remove the Device. Turn
the power off and back
on again.
A defective USB device or a
high power consumption USB
device has been connected to
the USB accessory port.
• Unplug the device from the USB accessory
port.
• Press and hold to turn the machine off,
and then turn it on again.
USB flash drive not
detected
Your machine cannot detect a
USB flash memory drive.
Insert a USB flash memory drive into the USB
accessory port.
Wrong Drum
The installed drum unit is not
correct for your machine.
Remove the drum unit and install a drum unit with
the correct supply product code.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
Wrong Paper Size MP
Wrong Paper Size T1
Wrong Paper Size T2
Wrong Paper Size T3
The specified tray ran out of
paper during copying and the
machine could not feed the
same size paper from the next
priority tray.
Refill the paper in the paper tray.
Wrong Toner Cartridge
The installed toner cartridge is
not correct for your machine.
Remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit,
and install a toner cartridge with the correct
supply product code.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner
Cartridge.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
• Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
• Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
• Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
• Replace Supplies
• Replace the Toner Cartridge
• Replace the Drum Unit
• Clean the Corona Wire
• Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
• Secure Print Using a USB Flash Drive
471
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
If the LCD displays:
• [Cannot Print] ##
• [Cannot Scan] ##
We recommend transferring your faxes to another fax machine or to your computer.
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report to see if there are any faxes you must transfer.
If there is an error message on the LCD after you transfer the faxes, disconnect your Brother machine from
the power source for several minutes, and then reconnect it.
Related Information
• Error and Maintenance Messages
• Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
• Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
• Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
472
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes > Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You must set up your Station ID before transferring faxes to another fax machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Fax Transfer].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the LCD displays [No Data], there are no faxes left in the machine’s memory. Press [Close]. Press
.
• Enter the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded.
3. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
• Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
• Set Your Station ID
473
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes > Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Make sure you have installed the software and drivers on your computer.
2. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
3. Make sure you have set [PC Fax Receive] on the machine.
If faxes are in the machine’s memory when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the LCD displays [Send Fax to
PC?].
4. Do one of the following:
• To transfer all faxes to your computer, press [Yes].
• To exit and leave the faxes in the memory, press [No].
5. Press .
Related Information
• Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
474
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes > Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You must set up your Station ID before transferring the Fax Journal report to another fax machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Report
Transfer].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter the fax number to which the Fax Journal report will be forwarded.
3. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
• Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
• Set Your Station ID
475
Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit
Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit
1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
2. Open the ADF cover.
3. Pull the jammed document out to the left. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or
scraps to prevent future jams.
4. Close the ADF cover.
5. Press .
Related Information
• Document Jams
477
Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Document is Jammed under the Document Cover
Document is Jammed under the Document Cover
1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
2. Lift the document cover.
3. Pull the jammed document out to the right. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or
scraps to prevent future jams.
4. Close the document cover.
5. Press .
Related Information
• Document Jams
478
Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF
Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF
1. Lift the document cover.
2. Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as cardstock, into the ADF to push any small paper scraps through.
(DCP-L5510DW)
(MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910)
3. Close the document cover.
4. Press
.
Related Information
• Document Jams
479
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams
Paper Jams
Always remove the remaining paper from the paper tray, fan and straighten the stack when you are adding new
paper. This helps prevent paper jams.
• Clear Paper Jams
• Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
• Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
• Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
• Paper is Jammed inside the Machine
• Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
480
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Clear Paper Jams
Clear Paper Jams
If paper is jammed or multiple sheets of paper are fed together frequently, do the following:
• Clean the paper pick-up rollers and the separator pad of paper trays.
See Related Information: Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers.
• Load paper correctly in the tray.
See Related Information: Load Paper.
• Set the correct paper size and paper type on your machine.
See Related Information: Paper Settings.
• Set the correct paper size and paper type on your computer.
See Related Information: Print a Document (Windows).
See Related Information: Print Using AirPrint.
• Use the recommended paper.
See Related Information: Using Special Paper.
See Related Information: Recommended Print Media.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
Related Topics:
• Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
• Load Paper
• Paper Settings
• Print a Document (Windows)
• Print Using AirPrint
• Using Special Paper
• Recommended Print Media
481
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the machine's MP tray, follow
these steps:
1. Remove the paper from the MP tray.
2. Slowly remove any jammed paper from in and around the MP tray.
3. Fan the paper stack, and then put it back in the MP tray.
4. Reload paper in the MP tray and make sure the paper stays under the maximum paper mark (1) on both
sides of the tray.
1
5. Follow the instructions on the machine's LCD.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
482
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the paper tray, follow these
steps:
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Slowly pull out the jammed paper.
Pulling the jammed paper downwards using both hands allows you to remove the paper more easily.
3. Fan the stack of paper to prevent further jams, and slide the paper guides to fit the paper size. Load paper in
the paper tray.
483
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the back of the machine (Jam
Rear), do the following:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Open the back cover.
3. Pull the green levers at the left and right sides towards you to release the fuser cover.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
485
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed inside the Machine
Paper is Jammed inside the Machine
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam inside the machine, follow these
steps:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
487
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the 2-sided paper tray, follow
these steps:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
3. At the back of the machine, pull the 2‑sided tray completely out of the machine.
4. Pull the jammed paper out of the machine or out of the 2‑sided tray.
489
5. Remove paper that may have jammed under the machine due to static electricity.
6. If paper is not caught inside the 2-sided tray, open the back cover.
7. Pull the green levers at the left and right sides towards you to release the fuser cover.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
490
8. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the back of the machine.
9. Close the fuser cover.
10. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.
11. Push the 2-sided tray firmly back into the back of the machine.
12. Push the paper tray firmly back into the front of the machine.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
491
Home > Troubleshooting > Printing Problems
Printing Problems
If, after reading the information in this table, you still need help, see the latest troubleshooting tips at
support.brother.com/faqs.
Difficulties Suggestions
No printout Check the machine is not in Power Off mode.
If the machine is in Power Off mode, press
, and then
send the print data again.
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed
and selected.
Check to see if the Status Monitor or the machine's
control panel displays an error.
Check that the machine is online:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control
Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers. Right-click your model's icon,
and click See what's printing. If printer driver options
appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the
menu bar and make sure Use Printer Offline is not
selected.
• Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server
2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers. Right-click your model's
name. Click See what's printing. If printer driver
options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer
in the menu bar and make sure that Use Printer
Offline is not selected.
• Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the
Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
Right-click your model's name. Click See what’s
printing. If printer driver options appear, select your
printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make
sure Use Printer Offline is not selected.
• Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your
desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings
> Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View
devices and printers. Right-click your model's name.
Click See what's printing. If printer driver options
appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the
menu bar and make sure that Use Printer Offline is
not selected.
The machine is not printing or has stopped printing.
Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's
memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print
data again.
See Related Information:Cancel a Print Job.
The headers or footers appear when the document
displays on the screen but they do not show up when it is
printed.
There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the
page. Adjust the top and bottom margins in your
document to allow for this.
492
Difficulties Suggestions
The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbled text. Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's
memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print
data again.
See Related Information:Cancel a Print Job.
Check the settings in your application to make sure they
are set up to work with your machine.
Confirm that the Brother printer driver is selected in your
application's Print window.
The machine prints the first couple of pages correctly,
then some pages have missing text.
Check the settings in your application to make sure they
are set up to work with your machine.
Your machine is not receiving all of the data sent from the
computer. Make sure you connected the interface cable
correctly.
The machine does not print on both sides of the paper
even though the printer driver setting is 2-sided and the
machine supports automatic 2-sided printing.
Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You
must select A4 paper. Supported paper weight is 60 to
105g/m²
Print speed is too slow. Reduce the resolution in the printer driver.
If you have enabled Quiet Mode, disable it in the printer
driver or the machine's menu.
When printing continuously, the printing speed may be
automatically reduced to lower the temperature inside the
machine.
The machine does not feed paper. If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight.
If the paper is curled, straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful
to remove the paper, turn the stack over and place it back
in the paper tray.
Fan the stack of paper well and place it back to the paper
tray.
Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then
try again.
(For models with MP Tray) Make sure MP Tray is not
selected for Paper Source in the printer driver.
Clean the paper pick-up rollers.
The machine does not feed paper from the MP tray.
(For models with MP Tray)
Fan the paper well and place it back in the MP tray.
Make sure MP Tray is selected as the Paper Source in
the printer driver.
The machine does not feed envelopes. Load envelopes in the MP tray. Your application must be
set to print the envelope size you are using. This is
usually done in the Page Setup or Document Setup menu
of your application.
Print position is misaligned with the letterhead or
preprinted objects.
Adjust the print position using the Print Position setting for
each paper tray.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
• Cancel a Print Job
• Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
• Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
493
Home > Troubleshooting > Improve the Print Quality
Improve the Print Quality
If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first. If the printout looks good, the problem is probably not
the machine. Check the interface cable connections and try printing a different document. If the printout or test
page printed from the machine has a quality problem, check the examples of poor print quality and follow the
recommendations in the table.
1. To get the best print quality, we suggest using recommended print media. Make sure you use paper that
meets our specifications.
2. Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit are installed correctly.
Examples of poor print quality
Recommendation
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
A B C D
a b c d e
0 1 2 3 4
CDEF
cdefg
B C
b c d
1 2 3
Faint
• If the machine displays the Replace Toner status,
install a new toner cartridge.
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
humidity, high temperatures, and so on, may cause
this print fault.
• If the whole page is too light, Toner Save mode may
be turned on. Turn Toner Save mode off in the
machine's menu settings or the printer driver.
• Clean the drum unit.
• Clean the corona wire on the drum unit.
• Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.
• Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
A B C D
a b c d e
0 1 2 3 4
Grey background
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
high temperatures and high humidity can increase the
amount of background shading.
• Clean the drum unit.
• Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.
• Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
Ghosting images
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
low humidity and low temperatures may cause this
print quality problem.
• Select the appropriate media type in the printer driver.
• Clean the drum unit.
• Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
• Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.
• The fuser unit may be contaminated.
Contact Brother customer service.
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
A B C D
a b c d e
0 1 2 3 4
Toner specks
• Make sure the media type setting in the driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Clean the drum unit.
• The toner cartridge may be damaged.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.
• The drum unit may be damaged.
Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
• The fuser unit may be contaminated.
Contact Brother customer service.
495
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
Hollow print
• Select Thick Paper mode in the printer driver or use
thinner paper than you are currently using.
• Select the appropriate media type from the paper type
options on your machine.
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
high humidity can cause hollow print.
• The drum unit may be damaged.
Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
All black
• Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit.
• The drum unit may be damaged.
Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
A B C D
a b c d e
0 1 2 3 4
White lines across the page
• Select the appropriate media type in the printer driver.
• Select the appropriate media type from the paper type
options on your machine.
• The problem may disappear by itself. Print several
blank pages to clear this problem, especially if the
machine has not been used for a long time.
• Clean the drum unit.
• The drum unit may be damaged.
Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
A B C D
a b c d e
0 1 2 3 4
Lines across the page
• Clean the drum unit.
• The drum unit may be damaged.
Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
White lines, bands or ribbing across the page
• Check the machine's environment. Conditions such as
high humidity and high temperatures may cause this
print quality problem.
• Clean the drum unit.
• If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages,
replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
White spots on black text and graphics at 94 mm intervals
• Make 10-15 copies of a blank, white sheet of paper. If
the problem is not solved after printing the blank
pages, the drum unit may have foreign material, such
as glue from a label, stuck on the drum. Clean the
drum unit.
See Related Information:Clean the Drum Unit.
• The drum unit may be damaged.
Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
496
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
Black spots at 94 mm intervals
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
A B C D
a b c d e
0 1 2 3 4
Black toner marks across the page
• If you use label sheets for laser printers, the glue from
the sheets may sometimes stick to the drum surface.
Clean the drum unit.
See Related Information:Clean the Drum Unit.
• If you used paper that has clips or staples, the drum
unit may be damaged.
• If the unpacked drum unit is in direct sunlight (or room
light for long periods of time), the unit may be
damaged.
• Clean the drum unit.
• The toner cartridge may be damaged.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.
• The drum unit may be damaged.
Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
A B C D
a b c d e
0 1 2 3 4
Black lines down the page
Printed pages have toner stains down the page
• Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by sliding
the green tab.
Make sure the green tab of the corona wire is in
the Home position (1).
• Wipe the scanner glass strip with a dry lint free soft
cloth.
• The toner cartridge may be damaged.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.
• The drum unit may be damaged.
Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
• The fuser unit may be contaminated.
Contact Brother customer service.
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
A B C D
a b c d e
0 1 2 3 4
• Make sure there is no foreign material, such as a torn
piece of paper, sticky notes or dust, inside the
machine and around the toner cartridge and drum
unit.
• The toner cartridge may be damaged.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.
• The drum unit may be damaged.
497
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
White lines down the page Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
A B C D
a b c d e
0 1 2 3 4
Image skewed
• Set the document correctly in the ADF or on the
scanner glass if the skew only occurs when making
copies.
• Make sure the paper or other print media is loaded
correctly in the paper tray and the guides are not too
tight or too loose against the paper stack.
• Set the paper guides correctly.
• The paper tray may be too full.
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Check for loose objects such as torn paper inside the
machine.
• If the problem only occurs during automatic 2-sided
printing, check for torn paper in the 2-sided tray. Verify
the 2-sided tray is inserted completely and the back
cover is closed completely.
Curled or wavy image
• Check the paper type and quality. High temperatures
and high humidity will cause paper to curl.
• If you do not use the machine often, the paper may
have been in the paper tray too long. Turn over the
stack of paper in the paper tray. Also, fan the paper
stack, and then rotate the paper 180° in the paper
tray.
• Open the back cover (face up output tray) to let the
printed paper exit onto the face up output tray.
• Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver
when you do not use our recommended print media.
B DEFGH
abc efghijk
A C D
b c d e
1 3 4
Wrinkles or creases
• Make sure paper is loaded correctly.
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Turn over the stack of paper in the tray or rotate the
paper 180° in the input tray.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Poor fixing
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Select Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer
driver.
If this selection does not provide enough
improvement, change the printer driver setting in
Media Type to a thick setting. If you are printing an
envelope, select Env. Thick in the media type setting.
Envelope creases
• Make sure envelopes are printed with the back cover
(face up output tray) opened.
• (For models with MP Tray)
Make sure envelopes are fed only from the MP tray.
498
Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems
Telephone and Fax Problems
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Telephone Line or Connections
Difficulties
Suggestions
Dialling does not work.
(No dial tone)
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the
telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or
VoIP services, contact your service provider for connection instructions.
(Available only for some countries.)
Change the Tone/Pulse setting.
If an external phone is connected to the machine, send a manual fax by lifting the handset
of the external telephone and dialling the number using the external telephone. Wait to
hear the fax receiving tones before sending a fax.
If there is no dial tone, connect a known working telephone and telephone line cord to the
socket. Then lift the external telephone’s handset and listen for a dial tone. If there is still
no dial tone, ask your telephone company to check the line and/or wall socket.
The machine does not
answer when called.
Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup.
Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no
answer, check that the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and
the LINE socket of the machine. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask
your telephone company to check the line.
Handling Incoming Calls
Difficulties
Suggestions
Sending a Fax
Call to the
machine.
If you answered on an extension or external telephone, press your Remote Activation Code (the
factory setting is *51). If you answered on the external telephone, press the Start button to
receive the fax.
When your machine answers, hang up.
Custom features
on a single line.
If you have Call Waiting, Voice Mail, an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom
feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or
receiving faxes.
For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and its signal comes
through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax, the signal can temporarily
interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM (Error Correction Mode) feature should help
overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is common
to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If
avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your business, we recommend using a separate
telephone line with no custom features.
Receiving Faxes
Difficulties
Suggestions
Cannot receive
a fax.
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone
wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or VoIP services, contact
your service provider for connection instructions. If you are using a VoIP system, try changing the
VoIP setting to Basic (for VoIP). This will lower modem speed and turn off Error Correction Mode
(ECM).
500
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot receive
a fax.
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the external devices
and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as the Brother machine.
• If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically answer all
incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode.
• If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you should select the
External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother machine will receive incoming faxes
automatically and voice callers will be able to leave a message on your answering machine.
• If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to automatically
answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In Fax/Tel mode, your Brother
machine will receive faxes automatically and produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to
answer voice calls.
• If you do not want your Brother machine to answer any incoming faxes automatically, you should
select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer every incoming call and activate the
machine to receive faxes.
Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your Brother machine
answers. To test this, lower the Ring Delay setting:
• If the Receive Mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the Ring Delay to the minimum value
(excluding “0”).
See Related Information: Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay).
• If the Receive Mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings programmed on your
answering machine to two.
• If the Receive Mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the Ring Delay setting.
Have someone send you a test fax:
• If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating correctly. Remember to reset
your Ring Delay or answering machine setting back to your original setting. If receiving problems
recur after resetting the Ring Delay, then a person, device, or subscriber service is answering
the fax call before the machine has a chance to answer.
• If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber service may be
interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem with your fax line.
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the same line as the
Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up correctly.
1. Set your answering machine to answer in one or two rings.
2. Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.
• Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing message.
• Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
• End your outgoing message with your Remote Activation Code for people sending manual
faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and Start to send a fax.”
3. Set your answering machine to answer calls.
4. Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD.
See Related Information: Choose the Correct Receive Mode.
Make sure your Brother machine’s Fax Detect feature is turned On. Fax Detect is a feature that
allows you to receive a fax even if you answered the call on an external or extension telephone.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line or if you are
using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic (for VoIP).
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.
Sending Faxes
Difficulties
Suggestions
Cannot send a fax. Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the
telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or
VoIP services, contact your service provider for connection instructions.
Make sure you pressed Fax and the machine is in Fax mode.
Print the Transmission Verification Report and check for an error.
501
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot send a fax. Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.
Ask the other party to check that the receiving machine has paper.
Poor quality of sent faxes. Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your machine’s
scanner operation. If the copy quality is poor, clean the scanner.
Transmission Verification
Report says
RESULT:ERROR.
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again. If
you are sending a PC-Fax message and get RESULT:ERROR on the Transmission
Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra memory,
you can turn Fax Storage off, print fax messages in memory or cancel a delayed fax.
If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line
or if you are using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic (for
VoIP).
Sent faxes are blank. Make sure you are loading the document correctly. When using the ADF, the
document should be face up. When using the scanner glass, the document should be
face down.
Vertical black lines when
sending a fax.
Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on
the glass strip. Clean the glass strip.
Printing received faxes
Difficulties
Suggestions
• Condensed print
• Horizontal streaks
• Top and bottom sentences are
cut off
• Missing lines
This is usually caused by a poor telephone connection. Do a test copy; if your
copy looks good, you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference
on the telephone line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.
Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wire may be dirty.Clean the corona wire in the drum unit.
The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the
problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.
Received faxes appear as split or
blank pages.
Left and right margins are cut off or a single page is printed on two pages.
If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra
blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are
using.
Turn Auto Reduction on.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
• Set Dial Tone Detection
• Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems
Related Topics:
• Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
• Choose the Correct Receive Mode
502
Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems > Set Dial Tone Detection
Set Dial Tone Detection
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Setting the Dial Tone to [Detection] shortens the Dial Tone detect pause.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Dial Tone].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Detection] or [No Detection].
3. Press
.
Related Information
• Telephone and Fax Problems
503
Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems > Set Telephone Line Compatibility for
Interference and VoIP Systems
Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Problems sending and receiving faxes due to possible interference on the telephone line may be solved by
reducing the modem speed to minimise errors in fax transmission. If you are using a Voice over IP (VoIP)
service, we recommend changing the compatibility to Basic (for VoIP).
• VoIP is a type of phone system that uses an Internet connection, rather than a traditional phone line.
• Telephone providers frequently bundle VoIP together with Internet and cable services.
>> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Compatibility].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the option you want.
• Select [High] to set the modem speed to 33600 bps.
• Select [Normal] to set the modem speed to 14400 bps.
• Select [Basic(for VoIP)] to reduce the modem speed to 9600 bps and turn off Error Correction
Mode (ECM). Unless interference is a recurring problem on your telephone line, you may prefer to use
this option only when needed.
3. Press .
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Compatibility].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the option you want.
• Select [High] to set the modem speed to 33600 bps.
• Select [Normal] to set the modem speed to 14400 bps.
• Select [Basic(for VoIP)] to reduce the modem speed to 9600 bps and turn off Error Correction
Mode (ECM). Unless interference is a recurring problem on your telephone line, you may prefer to use
this option only when needed.
3. Press
.
Related Information
• Telephone and Fax Problems
504
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems
Network Problems
• Error Messages
• Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
• Check Your Machine's Network Settings
• I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
• My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
505
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Error Messages
Error Messages
The most common error messages are shown in the table.
Error Messages Cause Action
The maximum number
of devices are
already connected
using Wi-Fi
Direct.
Four mobile devices are
already connected to the Wi-Fi
Direct network when the
Brother machine is the Group
Owner.
After the current connection between your Brother
machine and another mobile device has shut down, try to
configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again. You can confirm
the connection status by printing the Network
Configuration Report.
Authentication
Error, contact
your
administrator.
Your authentication setting for
the Store Print Log to Network
feature is not correct.
• Make sure the Username and Password in
Authentication Setting are correct. If the username is
part of a domain, enter the username in one of the
following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
• Make sure the time of the log file server matches the
time from the SNTP server, or the Date&Time settings.
• Make sure the SNTP time server settings are
configured correctly so the time matches the time used
for authentication by Kerberos or NTLMv2. If there is
no SNTP server, make sure the Date&Time and Time
Zone settings are set correctly using Web Based
Management or the control panel so the machine
matches the time being used by the server providing
the authentication.
Check User ID and
Password.
The Kerberos Authentication
error.
Make sure you have entered a correct user name and a
password for the Kerberos server. For more information on
the Kerberos server settings, contact your network
administrator.
The date, time and time zone
settings of the Brother
machine are not correct.
Confirm your machine's date, time, and time zone settings.
The DNS server configuration
is not correct.
Contact your network administrator for the information on
the DNS server settings.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the Kerberos
server.
Contact your network administrator for the information on
the Kerberos server settings.
Connection Error
Other devices are trying to
connect to the Wi-Fi Direct
network at the same time.
Make sure there are no other devices trying to connect to
the Wi-Fi Direct network, and then try to configure the Wi-
Fi Direct settings again.
Connection Failed
The Brother machine and your
mobile device cannot
communicate during the Wi-Fi
Direct network configuration.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother
machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to
an obstruction-free area.
• If you are using the PIN Method of WPS, make sure
you have entered the correct PIN.
File Access Error,
contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine cannot
access the destination folder
for the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
• Make sure the destination folder name is correct.
• Make sure the destination folder is write-enabled.
• Make sure the print log file is not locked. If it is, contact
your network administrator.
In Web Based Management,
you have selected the Cancel
Print option in the Error
Detection Setting section of
the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
Wait for about 60 seconds until this message disappears
from the LCD.
506
Error Messages Cause Action
No Device
When configuring the Wi-Fi
Direct network, the Brother
machine cannot find your
mobile device.
• Make sure your machine and mobile device are in the
Wi-Fi Direct mode.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother
machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to
an obstruction-free area.
• If you are manually configuring the Wi-Fi Direct
network, make sure you have entered the correct
password.
• If your mobile device has a configuration page for
obtaining an IP address, make sure your mobile
device's IP address has been configured via DHCP.
Server Timeout,
contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the server for the
Store Print Log to Network
feature.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
Server Timeout
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the LDAP server.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the Active Directory
server.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
Wrong Date & Time,
contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine does not
obtain the time from the SNTP
time server or you have not
configured the Date&Time for
the machine.
• Make sure the settings to access the SNTP time server
are configured correctly in Web Based Management.
• Confirm the Date&Time settings of your machine are
correct in Web Based Management.
Internal Error
The Brother machine's LDAP
protocol is disabled.
Confirm your authentication method, and then enable the
necessary protocol setting in Web Based Management.
The Brother machine's CIFS
protocol is disabled.
Related Information
• Network Problems
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
507
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool to fix the Brother machine's network settings. It will assign the correct
IP address and Subnet Mask.
Make sure your machine is turned on and is connected to the same network as your computer.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Network Connection Repair Tool.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Check the diagnosis by printing the Network Configuration Report or the Printer Settings page.
The Network Connection Repair Tool will start automatically if you select the Enable Connection Repair
Tool option in the Status Monitor. Right-click the Status Monitor screen, and then click Other Settings >
Enable Connection Repair Tool. This is not recommended when your network administrator has set the
IP address to Static, since it will automatically change the IP address.
If the correct IP address and the Subnet Mask are still not assigned even after using the Network Connection
Repair Tool, ask your network administrator for this information.
Related Information
• Network Problems
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
508
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup
Configuration
I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
Turn your wireless router off and back on. Then, try to configure the wireless settings again. If you are unable to
resolve the problem, follow the instructions below:
Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report.
Cause
Action Interface
Your security settings (SSID/
Network Key) are not
correct.
Confirm the security settings using Wireless Setup Helper
(Windows). For more information and to download the utility, go to
your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com.
Select and confirm that you are using the correct security settings.
- See the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access
point/router for information on how to find the security settings.
- The manufacturer's name or model number of the wireless LAN
access point/router may be used as the default security settings.
- Consult with the access point/router manufacturer, your Internet
provider, or network administrator.
Wireless
Your Brother machine's MAC
address is not allowed.
Confirm that the Brother machine's MAC Address is allowed in the
filter.
You can find the MAC Address on your Brother machine's control
panel.
Wireless
Your wireless LAN access
point/router is in Stealth
mode (not broadcasting the
SSID).
• Enter the correct SSID or Network Key manually.
• Check the SSID or the Network Key in the instructions supplied
with your wireless LAN access point/router and reconfigure the
wireless network setup.
Wireless
Your machine is trying to
connect to a 5 GHz Wi-Fi
network. The current
channel set on your wireless
LAN access point/router is
not supported.
Change the channel on your wireless LAN access point/router to a
channel supported by your machine.
1. Confirm the channels supported by your machine. Go to
support.brother.com/g/d/a5m6/, select your model, and then click
Download for more information.
2. Check your wireless LAN access point/router‘s channel setting.
Make sure it is set to one of the channels supported by your
machine, and not set to "Auto" or "Automatic". For more
information about changing the channel setting, see the
instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
3. Try to connect your machine to your Wi-Fi network again.
Wireless
Your security settings (SSID/
password) are not correct.
Confirm the SSID and password.
When you are configuring the network manually, the SSID and
password are displayed on your Brother machine. If your mobile
device supports the manual configuration, the SSID and password
will be displayed on your mobile device’s screen.
Wi-Fi Direct
You are using Android
™
4.0.
If your mobile device disconnects (approximately six minutes after
using Wi-Fi Direct), try the one-push configuration using WPS
(recommended) and set the Brother machine as a Group Owner.
Wi-Fi Direct
510
Cause Action Interface
Your Brother machine is
placed too far from your
mobile device.
Move your Brother machine within about 3.3 feet (1 metre) of the
mobile device when you configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
Wi-Fi Direct
There are some obstructions
(walls or furniture, for
example) between your
machine and the mobile
device.
Move your Brother machine to an obstruction-free area. Wi-Fi Direct
There is a wireless
computer, Bluetooth
®
-
supported device,
microwave oven, or digital
cordless phone near the
Brother machine or your
mobile device.
Move other devices away from the Brother machine or your mobile
device.
Wi-Fi Direct
You have checked and tried
all of the above, but your
Brother machine still cannot
complete the Wi-Fi Direct
configuration.
• Turn your Brother machine off and back on. Then, try to
configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again.
• If you are using your Brother machine as a client, confirm how
many devices are allowed on the current Wi-Fi Direct network,
and then check how many devices are connected.
Wi-Fi Direct
For Windows
If your wireless connection has been interrupted, and you have checked and tried all of the above, we
recommend using the Network Connection Repair Tool.
Related Information
• Network Problems
Related Topics:
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
• Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
511
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX
Receive Function over the Network
My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function
over the Network
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
Cause
Action Interface
Your security software
blocks your machine's
access to the network.
(The network scanning
feature does not work. )
• Windows
Configure the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow
network scanning. To add port 54925 for network scanning, type
the information below:
- In Name:
Type any description, for example Brother NetScan.
- In Port number:
Type 54925.
- In Protocol:
UDP is selected.
See the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
• Mac
(Brother iPrint&Scan)
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-
click the Brother iPrint&Scan icon. The Brother iPrint&Scan
window appears. Click the Select your Machine button, and then
follow the on-screen instructions to reselect your network machine.
Wired/Wireless
Your security software
blocks your machine's
access to the network.
(The network PC-Fax
Receive feature does not
work.)
(Windows)
Set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX Rx. To
add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, type the information below:
• In Name:
Type any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.
• In Port number:
Type 54926.
• In Protocol:
UDP is selected.
See the instruction manual that came with your third-party Security/
Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
Wired/Wireless
Your security software
blocks your machine's
access to the network.
Some security software might block access without showing a security
alert dialog box even after successful installation.
To allow access, see the instructions for your security software or ask
the software manufacturer.
Wired/Wireless
Your Brother machine was
not assigned an available
IP address.
• Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask.
Verify that both the IP addresses and Subnet Masks of your
computer and the Brother machine are correct and located on the
same network.
For more information about how to verify the IP address and the
Subnet Mask, ask your network administrator.
• Windows
Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask using the Network
Connection Repair Tool.
Wired/Wireless
512
Cause Action Interface
A failed print job is still in
your computer's print
queue.
• If a failed print job is still in your computer's print queue, delete it.
• Otherwise, double-click the printer icon in the following folder and
cancel all documents:
- Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and
printers.
- Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019,
and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the
Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click View devices
and printers.
- Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware
group, click View devices and printers.
- Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop.
When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel.
In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers >
Printers.
- Mac
Click System Preferences > Printers & Scanners.
Wired/Wireless
Your machine is not
connected to the wireless
network.
Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report.
See Related Information: Print the WLAN Report.
Wireless
If you have checked and tried all of the above, but you are still having problems, uninstall the drivers (Windows)
and the software and reinstall the latest ones.
Related Information
• Network Problems
Related Topics:
• Print the WLAN Report
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
• Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
513
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working
Correctly
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
Check Action Interface
Check that your Brother
machine, access point/
router, or network hub is
turned on.
Check the following:
• The power cord is connected correctly and the Brother machine is
turned on.
• The access point/router or hub is turned on and its link LED is
blinking.
• All protective packaging has been removed from the machine.
• The toner cartridge and drum unit assembly is installed correctly.
• The machine's cover is fully closed.
• Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.
• (For wired networks) A network cable is securely connected to the
Brother machine and to the router or hub.
Wired/Wireless
Check the Link Status
on the Network
Configuration Report or
the Printer Settings
page.
Print the Network Configuration Report and check that Ethernet Link
Status or Wireless Link Status is Link OK.
Wired/Wireless
Check that you can
"ping" the Brother
machine from your
computer.
Ping the Brother machine from your computer using the IP address or
the node name in the Windows command prompt or Mac Terminal
application:
ping <ipaddress> or <nodename>.
• Successful: Your Brother machine is working correctly and
connected to the same network as your computer.
• Unsuccessful: Your Brother machine is not connected to the same
network as your computer.
Windows:
Ask your administrator about the IP address and the subnet mask, and
then use the Network Connection Repair Tool.
Mac:
Confirm that the IP address and the Subnet Mask are set correctly.
Wired/Wireless
Check that your Brother
machine is connected to
the wireless network.
Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report.
See Related Information: Print the WLAN Report.
Wireless
If you have checked and tried all of the above but you are still having problems, see the instructions supplied with
your wireless access point/router to find the SSID (Network Name) and the Network Key (Password) information
and set them correctly.
Related Information
• Network Problems
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• Print the WLAN Report
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
514
Home > Troubleshooting > AirPrint Problems
AirPrint Problems
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
Difficulties
Suggestions
My machine is not displayed in the printer list. Make sure your machine is turned on.
Make sure your machine and your mobile device or Mac
are connected to the same network.
Move your mobile device closer to the wireless access
point/router, or to your machine.
I cannot print. Make sure your machine is turned on.
Make sure your machine and your mobile device or Mac
are connected to the same network.
I am trying to print a multi-page document from an iOS
device, but ONLY the first page is printing.
Make sure you are running the latest OS version.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• AirPrint Overview
516
Home > Troubleshooting > Other Problems
Other Problems
Difficulties Suggestions
The machine will not turn on. Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as
lightning or a power surge) may have triggered the
machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Unplug the power
cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord
and press to turn the machine on.
If the problem is not solved and you are using a power
breaker, disconnect it to make sure it is not the problem.
Plug the machine's power cord directly into a different
known working wall electrical socket. If there is still no
power, try a different power cable.
The machine cannot print EPS data that includes binary
with the BR-Script3 printer driver.
(Windows)
To print EPS data, do the following:
1. Windows 11:
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control
Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows
Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022:
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers.
For Windows Server 2012:
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your
desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings
> Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View
devices and printers.
For Windows Server 2012 R2:
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the
Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click your model's icon with BR-Script3 in the
name, select Printer properties.
If your model with
BR-Script3 in the name does
not appear, right-click your model's icon, select
Printer properties, and then select your model
with BR-Script3 in the name.
3. From the Device Settings tab, choose TBCP (Tagged
Binary Communication Protocol) in Output Protocol.
The Brother software cannot be installed.
(Windows)
If the Security Software warning appears on the computer
screen during the installation, change the Security
Software settings to permit the Brother product setup
program or other program to run.
(Mac)
If you are using a firewall function of anti-spyware or
antivirus security software, temporarily disable it and then
install the Brother software.
Copying difficulties
517
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot make a copy. Make sure you pressed Copy and the machine is in Copy
mode.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function
Lock settings.
Vertical black line appears in copies. Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt
or correction fluid on the glass strip, or the corona wire is
dirty. Clean the glass strip and scanner glass and the
white bar and white plastic above them.
Copies are blank. Make sure you are loading the document correctly.
Scanning difficulties
Difficulties
Suggestions
TWAIN or WIA errors appear when starting to scan.
(Windows)
Make sure the Brother TWAIN or WIA driver is selected
as the primary source in your scanning application. For
example, in Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE, click Desktop >
Scan Settings > Select to select the Brother TWAIN/WIA
driver.
OCR does not work. Try increasing the scanning resolution.
Cannot scan. Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function
Lock settings.
Software difficulties
Difficulties
Suggestions
Cannot install software or print. (Windows)
Run the install program again. This program will repair
and reinstall the software.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
518
Home > Troubleshooting > Check the Machine Information
Check the Machine Information
Follow these instructions to check your machine's serial number and firmware version.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Info.].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press one of the following options:
Option Description
Serial No.
Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version
Check your machine's firmware version.
Firmware Update
Update your machine to the latest firmware.
Firmware Auto Check
View firmware information on the Main Home screen.
Page Counter
Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Parts Life
Check the percentage of the supplies' life that remains available.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
519
Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Your Machine
Reset Your Machine
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Reset].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the reset function you want to use.
• The network settings, the security settings and address book data will not be reset by the [Machine
Reset].
• If you discard or dispose the machine, we recommend performing a [Factory Reset] to erase the
personal data in the machine.
3. [Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.]
appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm.
You can also reset the network settings by pressing [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network]
> [Network Reset].
The machine will restart.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
• Reset Functions Overview
Related Topics:
• Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
520
Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Your Machine > Reset Functions Overview
Reset Functions Overview
The following reset functions are available:
Unplug the interface cable before you choose Network Settings Reset function, All Settings Reset function
or Factory Reset function.
1. Machine Reset
Reset all the machine’s settings that you have changed, such as Date and Time and Ring Delay.
The Address Book, fax reports, and Call history will remain. (For models with facsimile function)
2. Network Settings Reset (For Network Models)
Reset the print server back to its default factory settings (includes Password and IP Address information).
3. Address Book and Fax Settings Reset
This function resets the following settings:
The following settings, with the exception of the Address Book and the Setting Lock password, apply to
models with facsimile function.
• Address Book
(Addresses and Groups)
• Programmed fax jobs in the memory
(Delayed Fax)
• Station ID
(name and number)
• Coverpage Message
• Fax receive settings
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage, Fax Forwarding, and PC-Fax Receive (Windows only))
• Report
(Transmission Verification Report / Tel Index List / Fax Journal)
• Setting Lock password (available models only)
4. All Settings Reset
Reset all the machine's settings back to the settings that were set at the factory.
All Settings Reset takes less time than Factory Reset.
5. Factory Reset
Use the Settings Reset function to reset all of the machine's settings to the settings originally set at the
factory.
Factory Reset takes more time than All Settings Reset.
We strongly recommend you perform this operation when you dispose of the machine.
Related Information
• Reset Your Machine
521
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies
Replace Supplies
You must replace supplies when the machine indicates that the life of the supply is over.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Toner Cartridge
Drum Unit
NOTE
• Be sure to seal the used supplies tightly in a bag so that toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge.
• Visit www.brother.com/original for instructions on how to return your used supplies to the Brother
collection and recycling program. If your local Brother office does not have the collection program yet, or
you choose not to return your used supply, discard the used supply according to local regulations,
keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, contact your local waste disposal office.
• We recommend placing both the new and the used supplies on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally
spilling or scattering the contents.
• Using paper that is not a direct equivalent for a recommended print media may reduce the life of supplies
and machine parts.
• The projected life for each of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19752. Frequency of replacement
will vary depending on the print volume, percentage of coverage, types of media used, and powering
on/off the machine.
• Frequency of replacing supplies except toner cartridges will vary depending on the print volume, types of
media used, and powering on/off the machine.
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash
it off with cold water.
523
Both the toner cartridge and the drum unit feature an Integrated Circuit (IC) chip. DO NOT touch these
surfaces. Touching the IC chips may cause contamination or damage, and may interfere with the machine's
ability to detect these components.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
• Replace the Toner Cartridge
• Replace the Drum Unit
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
524
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Toner Cartridge
Replace the Toner Cartridge
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly from the machine.
4. Push down the green lock lever and take the toner cartridge out of the drum unit.
5. Unpack the new toner cartridge.
525
6. Remove the protective cover.
7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and shake it from left to right several times, as shown. Then push it
firmly into the drum unit until it locks into place.
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
8. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left
several times.
Be sure to return the tab to the Home position (a). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the arrow on
the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
526
9. Reinsert the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back into the machine.
10. Close the front cover of the machine.
• After replacing a toner cartridge, DO NOT turn the machine off or open the front cover until the
machine's display returns to Ready Mode.
• The toner cartridge that comes with your Brother machine is an Inbox toner cartridge.
• It is a good idea to keep a new toner cartridge ready for use when you see the Toner Low warning.
• DO NOT unpack the new toner cartridge until you are ready to install it.
• If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long time, the toner life will be shortened.
• We recommend using genuine Brother supplies to ensure stable print quality and performance.
Although not all non-genuine supplies may cause quality issues, it is possible that some may adversely
affect print quality or cause machine malfunction. Brother may charge for repairing your machine if it is
proven that non-genuine supplies caused the damage, even if the machine is still covered by the
warranty.
Related Information
• Replace Supplies
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
• Improve the Print Quality
527
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Drum Unit
Replace the Drum Unit
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly from the machine.
4. Push down the green lock lever and take the toner cartridge out of the drum unit.
5. Unpack the new drum unit.
528
6. Remove the protective cover.
7. Push the toner cartridge firmly into the new drum unit until it locks into place.
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
8. Reinsert the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back into the machine.
9. Close the front cover of the machine.
NOTE
• Drum wear and tear occurs due to use and rotation of the drum and interaction with paper, toner, and
other materials in the paper path. In designing this product, Brother decided to use the number of
rotations of the drum as a reasonable determinant of the drum life. When a drum reaches the factory-
established rotation limit corresponding to the rated page yield, the product’s LCD will advise you to
replace the drum. The product will continue to function; however, print quality may not be optimal.
• If an unpacked drum unit is placed in direct sunlight (or room light for long periods of time), the unit may
be damaged.
• There are many factors that determine the actual drum life, such as the temperature, humidity, type of
paper, type of toner used and so on. Under ideal conditions, the average drum life is estimated at
approximately 75,000 pages based on three pages per job and 45,000 pages based on one page per job
(A4/Letter single-sided pages). The number of pages may be affected by a variety of factors including,
but not limited to, media type and media size.
529
Because we have no control over the many factors that determine the actual drum life, we cannot
guarantee a minimum number of pages that will be printed by your drum.
• The machine should be used only in a clean, dust-free environment with adequate ventilation.
We recommend using genuine Brother supplies to ensure stable print quality and performance. Although
not all non-genuine supplies may cause quality issues, it is possible that some may adversely affect print
quality or cause machine malfunction. Brother may charge for repairing your machine if it is proven that
non-genuine supplies caused the damage, even if the machine is still covered by the warranty.
Related Information
• Replace Supplies
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
• Improve the Print Quality
530
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine
Clean the Machine
Clean the outside and inside of the machine regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth.
When you replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit, make sure you clean the inside of the machine. If printed
pages are stained with toner, clean the inside of the machine with a dry, lint-free cloth.
WARNING
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray, or an organic solvent/liquid containing alcohol or
ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing so could cause a fire. Instead, use only a dry,
lint-free cloth.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT use isopropyl alcohol to remove dirt from the control panel. It may crack the panel.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Toner cartridge
Drum unit
531
Both the toner cartridge and the drum unit feature an IC chip. DO NOT touch these surfaces. Touching the
IC chips may cause contamination or damage, and may interfere with the machine's ability to detect these
parts.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
• Clean the Scanner
• Clean the Touchscreen LCD
• Clean the Corona Wire
• Clean the Drum Unit
• Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
532
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Scanner
Clean the Scanner
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Lift the document cover (1). Clean the white plastic surface (2) and scanner glass (3) underneath it with a soft
lint-free cloth moistened with water.
1
3
2
3. In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1) and the scanner glass strip (2) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with water.
2
1
4. (For automatic 2-sided scanning models) Open the scanner glass cover (1), and then clean the other white
bar (2) and scanner glass strip (3).
1
2
3
5. Close the document cover.
6. Press to turn the machine on.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
533
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Touchscreen LCD
Clean the Touchscreen LCD
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use any type of liquid cleaners (including ethanol).
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Clean the touchscreen with a dry, soft lint-free cloth.
3. Press to turn the machine on.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
535
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Corona Wire
Clean the Corona Wire
If you have print quality problems or the control panel displays [Drum !] status, clean the corona wire.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly from the machine.
3. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left
several times.
Be sure to return the tab to the Home position (a). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the arrow on
the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
536
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Drum Unit
Clean the Drum Unit
If your printout has dots or other repeating marks at 94 mm intervals, the drum may have foreign material,
such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface.
1. Make sure the machine is in Ready mode.
2. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Drum Dot Print].
3. Press [Yes].
The machine prints the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
4. Press
.
5. Press and hold
to turn the machine off.
6. Open the front cover.
7. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly from the machine.
8. Push down the green lock lever and take the toner cartridge out of the drum unit.
538
9. Turn the drum unit as shown in the illustration. Make sure that the drum unit gear (1) is on the left side.
1
10. Use the numbered markers next to the drum roller to find the mark on the drum. For example, a dot in column
2 on the check sheet means that there is a mark in drum region “2”.
11. Turn the drum unit edge towards you while looking at the drum surface to find the mark.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the surface of the drum unit, only the edge.
539
12. Wipe the drum unit surface gently with a dry cotton swab until the mark or foreign material on the surface
comes off.
NOTE
DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object or any liquids.
13. Push the toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit it locks into place.
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
14. Reinsert the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back into the machine.
15. Close the front cover of the machine.
16. Press
to turn the machine on.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
Related Topics:
• Improve the Print Quality
540
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers periodically may prevent paper jams by ensuring that paper feeds correctly.
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
If you have paper feed problems, clean the pick-up rollers as follows:
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
3. If paper is loaded or something is stuck inside in the paper tray, remove it.
4. Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked in lukewarm water, and then wipe the separator pad on the paper
tray to remove dust.
5. Wipe the two pick-up rollers inside the machine to remove dust.
6. Reload the paper and put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
7. Press
to turn the machine on.
541
Home > Routine Maintenance > Check the Remaining Part Life
Check the Remaining Part Life
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Info.] > [Parts Life].
2. Press the machine part you want to check.
The LCD displays the approximate remaining part life.
3. Press
.
To display the approximate remaining life of the toner cartridge, press on the LCD.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
543
Home > Routine Maintenance > Pack the Machine and the Toner Cartridge Together
Pack the Machine and the Toner Cartridge Together
WARNING
• When you move the machine, carry the machine as shown in the illustration.
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN:
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910:
• To prevent possible injuries, at least two people should lift the product by holding it at the front and back.
• If the machine has Optional Tray(s) installed, remove the Optional Tray(s) BEFORE moving the machine.
Attempting to move the machine without removing the Optional Tray(s) may cause injury to you or
damage to the machine.
• Pack the Optional Tray(s) separately in the original carton with original packing material.
If for any reason you must ship your machine, carefully repack the machine in the original packaging to
avoid any damage during transit. The machine should be adequately insured with the carrier.
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off. Leave the machine off for at least 10 minutes to cool down.
2. Disconnect all the cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
Some models are equipped with a non-detachable AC power cord. If your cord is not detachable, fold it
loosely and rest it on top of the machine so it packs easily.
3. Put the machine into the bag it originally came in.
544
4. Pack the machine, the printed materials, and the AC power cord (if applicable) in the original carton with the
original packing material as shown. (The original packing material may differ depending on your country or
model.)
5. Close the carton and tape it shut.
6. If you have a Lower Tray, repack it as shown.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
545
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
Replace the following parts regularly to maintain the best print quality. The parts listed below must be replaced
after printing approximately 50,000 pages
1
for the Paper Feeding Kits of the MP tray and approximately 200,000
pages
1
for the Paper Feeding Kits of the standard paper tray, the Paper Feeding Kits of the optional paper tray,
Fuser Unit, and Laser Unit.
Contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer when the following messages appear on the LCD:
LCD Message Description
Maintenance
Replace Fuser
2
Replace the Fuser Unit.
Maintenance
Replace Laser
2
Replace the Laser Unit.
Maintenance
Replace PF Kit 1
2 3
Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Standard Paper Tray.
Maintenance
Replace PF Kit 2
2 3 4
Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Optional Tray.
Maintenance
Replace PF Kit MP
2 3
Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Multi-purpose (MP) Tray.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
1
Letter or A4 size 1-sided pages.
2
The replacement frequency depends on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage, and the type of media used.
3
The kit includes the roller holder assembly, separation pad, and separation pad spring for the paper tray or MP Tray.
4
If you use the Optional Tray(s) with your machine, this message will appear on the LCD. When the machine has multiple Optional Trays, the
machine displays messages using numbers corresponding to each Optional Tray.
546
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > In the Event of Power
Failure (Memory Storage)
In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage)
Your menu settings are stored permanently, and in the event of a power failure will not be lost.Temporary settings
(for example, Contrast, Overseas Mode) are lost.
During a power failure, the machine will retain the date and time and programmed fax timer jobs (for example,
Delayed Fax) for approximately 60 hours. Other fax jobs in the machine's memory will not be lost.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
549
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings
General Settings
• Adjust the Machine's Volume
• Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
• Set Sleep Mode Countdown
• About Deep Sleep Mode
• Set Auto Power Off Mode
• Set the Date and Time
• Set the Time Zone
• Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
• Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
• Set Your Station ID
• Set Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode
• Reduce Toner Consumption
• Prevent Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
• Reduce Printing Noise
• Improve Print Output
• Change the Language on the LCD
550
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Adjust
the Machine's Volume
Adjust the Machine's Volume
1. Do one of the following:
• For MFC models:
Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Volume].
• For DCP models:
Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Beep].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press one of the following options (MFC models):
(The options will vary depending on your machine.)
• [Ring]
Adjust the ring volume.
• [Beep]
Adjust the volume of the beep you hear when you press a button, make a mistake, or after you send or
receive a fax.
• [Speaker]
Adjust the speaker volume.
3. Select the [Off], [Low], [Med] or [High] option, and then press the option you want.
4. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
551
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
You can program the machine to change automatically to Daylight Saving Time.
It will reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and back one hour in the autumn. Make sure you have set the
correct date and time in the Date & Time setting.
This feature is available only in some countries.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Auto
Daylight].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
552
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Sleep Mode Countdown
Set Sleep Mode Countdown
The Sleep Mode (or Power Save Mode) setting can reduce power consumption. When the machine is in Sleep
Mode, it acts as though it is turned off. The machine will wake up and start printing when it receives a print job or
a fax. Use these instructions to set a time delay (countdown) before the machine enters Sleep Mode.
• You can choose how long the machine must be idle before it goes into Sleep Mode.
• The timer will restart if any operation is carried out on the machine, such as receiving a print job.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Sleep Time].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter the length of time (maximum 50 minutes) the machine will remain idle before entering Sleep Mode, and
then press [OK].
3. Press
.
Related Information
• General Settings
553
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > About
Deep Sleep Mode
About Deep Sleep Mode
If the machine is in Sleep Mode and does not receive any jobs for a certain length of time, the machine will
automatically enter Deep Sleep Mode. The length of time is based on your specific model and settings.
Deep Sleep Mode uses less power than Sleep Mode.
Applicable Models
Machine's LCD in Deep Sleep Mode Conditions That Will Wake the
Machine
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
The LCD backlight turns off and the
Power LED blinks.
• The machine receives a job.
• Someone presses
or the
touchscreen LCD.
Related Information
• General Settings
554
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Auto Power Off Mode
Set Auto Power Off Mode
If the machine is in Deep Sleep Mode for certain length of time, based on your model and settings, the machine
will go into Power Off Mode automatically. The machine does not go into Power Off Mode when the machine is
connected to a network or a telephone line, or has secure print data in the memory(available for certain models).
To start printing, press on the control panel and then send a print job.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Auto Power Off].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the [Off], [1 hour], [2 hours], [4 hours] or [8 hours] option you want.
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
555
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set the
Date and Time
Set the Date and Time
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Date].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter the last two digits of the year using the LCD, and then press [OK].
3. Enter the two digits for the month using the LCD, and then press [OK].
4. Enter the two digits for the day using the LCD, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Clock Type].
6. Press [12h Clock] or [24h Clock].
7. Press [Time].
8. To enter the time, do one of the following:
• If you selected [12h Clock] as the format in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time (in 12-hour
format) using the LCD.
Press
to select [AM] or [PM].
Press [OK].
• If you selected [24h Clock] as the format in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time (in 24-hour
format) using the LCD.
Press [OK].
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
9. Press
.
Related Information
• General Settings
556
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set the
Time Zone
Set the Time Zone
Set the time zone for your location on the machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Time Zone].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter your time zone.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
557
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Adjust
the LCD Backlight Brightness
Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
If you are having difficulty reading the LCD, changing the brightness setting may help.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] > [Backlight].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the [Light], [Med] or [Dark] option.
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
558
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
Set how long the LCD backlight stays on.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] > [Dim Timer].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the [10 Secs], [20 Secs] or [30 Secs] option.
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
559
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Your Station ID
Set Your Station ID
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Set the machine to print your Station ID and the fax's date and time at the top of each fax you send.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Station ID] > [Fax].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter your fax number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Tel].
4. Enter your telephone number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Name].
6. Enter your name (up to 20 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
• Press to cycle between letters, numbers and special characters. (The characters available
may differ depending on your country.)
If your machine displays , press .
• If you enter an incorrect character, press d or c to move the cursor to it and press
. Press the
correct character.
• To enter a space, press [Space] or c.
• For more detailed information, see Related Information.
7. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
Related Topics:
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
• Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
• Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
560
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode
Set Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Your machine is set for a Tone dialling service. If you have a Pulse dialling (rotary) service, you must change the
dialling mode.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Tone/Pulse].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Tone] or [Pulse].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
561
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Reduce
Toner Consumption
Reduce Toner Consumption
Using the Toner Save feature may reduce toner consumption. When Toner Save is set to on, the print on your
documents appears lighter.
We DO NOT recommend using the Toner Save feature for printing photo or greyscale images.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Toner Save].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
Related Topics:
• Improve the Print Quality
562
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Prevent
Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
Prevent Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
This feature prevents users from sending a fax or call to the wrong number by mistake. You can set the machine
to restrict dialling when you use the dial pad, Address Book, Shortcuts and LDAP search.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Dial Restriction].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press one of the following options:
• [Dial Pad]
• [Address Book]
If you combine Address Book numbers when dialling, the numbers will be recognised as dial pad input and
will not be restricted.
• [Shortcuts]
• [LDAP Server]
3. Press one of the following options:
Option Description
Enter #
Twice
The machine prompts you to re-enter the number, and then if you re-enter the same
number correctly, the machine will start dialling. If you re-enter the wrong number, the LCD
will display an error message.
On
The machine restricts all fax sending and outbound calls for that dialling method.
Off
The machine does not restrict the dialling method.
• The [Enter # Twice] setting will not work if you use an external phone before entering the number.
You will not be asked to re-enter the number.
• If you choose [On] or [Enter # Twice], you cannot use the Broadcasting feature.
4. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
563
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Reduce
Printing Noise
Reduce Printing Noise
The Quiet Mode setting can reduce printing noise. When Quiet Mode is turned on, the print speed becomes
slower. The factory setting is off.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Quiet Mode].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
564
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings >
Improve Print Output
Improve Print Output
If the printout is curled or the toner does not fix well, you can improve the print output.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Improve Output].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Off], [Reduce Curl], or [Toner Fixing].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
565
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
the Language on the LCD
Change the Language on the LCD
Change the LCD language if needed.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Local Language].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press your language.
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
566
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite
Settings as a Shortcut > Add Shortcuts
Add Shortcuts
You can add the Fax, Copy, Scan, Web Connect and Apps settings you use most frequently by saving them as
your Shortcuts. Later you can press the Shortcut to apply these settings instead of manually re-entering them.
Some Shortcut menus are not available depending on your model.
These instructions describe how to add a Copy Shortcut. The steps for adding a Fax, Scan, Web Connect, or
Apps Shortcut are very similar.
>> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
1. Press [Shortcuts]. (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.)
2. Press a tab.
Swipe to display the tab if needed.
3. Press any to add a new Shortcut.
4. Press [Copy].
5. Press the copy preset you want.
6. Press [Options].
7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available settings, and then press the setting you want to
change.
8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options for the setting, and then press the option
you want.
Repeat these two steps until you have selected all the settings and options you want.
9. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
10. Press [OK].
11. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK].
12. Enter a name for the Shortcut using the LCD, and then press [OK].
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1. Press [Shortcuts]. (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.)
2. Press a tab.
Swipe to display the tab if needed.
3. Press any to add a new Shortcut.
4. Press [Copy].
5. Press > to access the preset copy settings.
6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the copy presets, and then press the copy preset you want.
7. Press [Options].
8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available settings, and then press the setting you want to
change.
568
9. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options for the setting, and then press the option
you want.
Repeat these two steps until you have selected all the settings and options you want.
10. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
11. Press [Save as Shortcut].
12. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK].
13. Enter a name for the Shortcut using the LCD, and then press [OK].
Related Information
• Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
569
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite
Settings as a Shortcut > Change or Delete Shortcuts
Change or Delete Shortcuts
You cannot change a Web Connect Shortcut or Apps Shortcut. If you need to change them, delete them,
and then add a new Shortcut.
1. Press [Shortcuts]. (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.)
2. Press a tab to display the Shortcut you want to change.
Swipe to display the tab if needed.
3. Press the Shortcut you want to change.
The settings for the Shortcut you selected appear.
To delete the Shortcut or edit the name, press and hold the Shortcut until the options appear, and then
follow the on-screen menus.
4. Press [Options].
5. Change the settings for the Shortcut if needed.
6. Press [OK] (if needed).
7. When finished, press [Save as Shortcut].
8. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK].
9. Do one of the following:
• To overwrite the Shortcut, press [Yes].
• If you do not want to overwrite the Shortcut, press [No] to enter a new Shortcut name.
Press any
to add a new Shortcut.
Enter a new name using the LCD, and then press [OK].
To edit the name, hold down to delete the current name.
Related Information
• Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
570
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite
Settings as a Shortcut > Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card
Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card
Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
You can assign one machine Shortcut to your ID card. When you touch your ID card to the machine's NFC
symbol, your personal Shortcut will automatically appear on the touchscreen.
• You cannot use the same ID card for different Shortcuts.
• To use the ID card for another Shortcut, unregister the card first, and then register it with the new
Shortcut.
1. Press the tab that contains the Shortcut you want to assign to your ID card.
2. Press and hold the Shortcut until the options appear.
3. Press [Register Card/NFC].
4. Touch the ID card to the NFC symbol.
5. Press [Register].
The Shortcut is assigned to the ID Card.
Related Information
• Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
571
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Print Reports > Reports
Reports
The following reports are available:
XMIT Verify (For models with facsimile function)
The XMIT Verify report prints a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Address Book
The Address Book report prints a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book memory.
Fax Journal (For models with facsimile function)
The Fax Journal prints a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes. (TX means
Transmit, RX means Receive.)
User Settings
The User Settings report prints a list of your current settings.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings report prints a list of your current printer settings.
Network Configuration (Models with network functionality)
The Network Configuration report prints a list of your current network settings.
Print File List
The Print File List prints a list of the fonts and print macro/stream setting stored in the machine.
Drum Dot Print
The Drum Dot Print prints the drum dot sheet, which helps when it is time to clean the drum unit.
WLAN Report (Models with wireless network functionality)
The WLAN Report prints the wireless LAN connectivity diagnosis.
Related Information
• Print Reports
573
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Print Reports > Print a
Report
Print a Report
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the report you want to print, and then press it.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you choose [XMIT Verify], do one of the following:
- To view the Transmission Verification Report, press [View on LCD].
- To print the Transmission Verification Report, press [Print Report].
• If you choose other reports, go to next step.
4. Press [Yes].
5. Press
.
Related Information
• Print Reports
574
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables
Settings and Features Tables
The Settings tables will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the machine’s
programs.
• Settings Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
• Settings Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
• Settings Tables (DCP-L5510DW)
• Features Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
• Features Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
• Features Tables (DCP-L5510DW)
575
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Settings Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Settings Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910)
Related Models: MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
>> [General Setup]
>> [Shortcut Settings]
>> [Fax]
>> [Printer]
>> [Network]
>> [Print Reports]
>> [Machine Info.]
>> [Initial Setup]
>> [Admin Settings]
[General Setup]
[All Settings] > [General Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Tray
Setting
Paper Type MP Tray
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
MP tray.
Tray 1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
standard paper tray.
Tray 2
1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Tray 3
1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 3).
Tray 4
1
2
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 4).
Tray 5
1 2
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 5).
Paper Size MP Tray
- Select the paper size you loaded in the MP tray.
Tray 1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the standard
paper tray.
Tray 2
1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 2).
Tray 3
1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 3).
Tray 4
1
2
- Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 4).
Tray 5
1
2
- Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 5).
Tray Use: Copy
- - Select the tray you want to use for making a Copy.
Tray Use: Fax
- - Select the tray you want to use for printing a Fax.
Tray Use: Print
- - Select the tray you want to use to Print.
Print Position MP Tray X
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the MP tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500
(right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
576
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Tray
Setting
Print Position MP Tray Y
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the MP tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down)
dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 1 X
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the standard paper tray horizontally from -500 (left)
to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the standard paper tray vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 2
1
X
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 2) horizontally from -500
(left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 2) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 3
1
X
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 3) horizontally from -500
(left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 3) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 4
1
2
X
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 4) horizontally from -500
(left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 4) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 5
1
2
X
Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left corner
of pages) of paper you loaded in the Optional Tray
(Tray 5) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right)
dots in 300 dpi.
Y
Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left corner
of pages) of paper you loaded in the Optional Tray
(Tray 5) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down)
dots in 300 dpi.
Skip Tray
1
- - Select a specific tray to skip if you know it is loaded
with the wrong size paper.
Separator Tray
1
- - Select the tray that contains the paper used as the
separator paper, which is inserted between each
print job.
Paper Low
Notice
(available for certain
models)
Paper Low
Notice
- Select whether or not to display a message
indicating the paper tray is nearly empty.
Notice
Level
- Select the minimum paper level that will trigger the
message.
Check Paper
- - Select whether or not to display a message
indicating you must check the paper type and paper
size.
577
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Volume Ring
- - Adjust the ring volume.
Beep
- - Adjust the beeper volume.
Speaker
- - Adjust the speaker volume.
LCD
Settings
Backlight
- - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
Dim Timer
- - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after
returning to the Home screen.
Notice
Settings
Document Alert
(available for certain
models)
- - Select whether to alert you when the document is
left on the scanner glass.
Scan
Result(Skip
Blank Page)
- - Displays the total scanned pages and skipped
pages after scanning is completed.
Ecology Eco Mode
- - Turn the following machine settings on at the same
time:
• 2-sided Print: Long Edge
3
• Sleep Time: 0 Min
• Dim Timer: 10 Secs
• Quiet Mode: On
3
• Toner Save: On
3
Toner Save
- - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Sleep Time
- - Set how much time should pass before the machine
enters Power Saving mode.
Quiet Mode
- - Decrease printing noise.
Auto Power Off
- - Set the number of hours that the machine will
remain in Deep Sleep mode before going into
Power Off mode.
Improve
Output
- - - Enable the Reduce Curl feature or the Toner
Fixing feature to improve print output.
Delete
Storage
Macro ID
- - Delete the registered Macro data.
Stream ID
- - Delete the registered Stream data.
Font ID
- - Delete the registered Font data.
Delete All
- - Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and Font
data to the factory settings.
Initialise USB
Flash Drive
(Available only
when the USB flash
drive is selected in
the Job Save
Location menu.)
-
- Initialise the USB flash drive for USB Storage Print.
Initialising the USB flash drive takes more than 40
minutes.
This initialisation process does not make the data
completely unrecoverable.
1
Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
2
Supported models only.
3
Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain machine settings in Web Based Management.
578
[Shortcut Settings]
[All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
(Select a shortcut button)
Rename
Change the shortcut name.
Edit
Change the shortcut settings.
Delete
Delete the shortcut.
Register Card/NFC
Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Delete Card/NFC
Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
[Fax]
[All Settings] > [Fax]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Setup Receive Ring Delay
- Set the number of rings before the machine answers in
Fax or Fax/Tel mode.
Receive Mode
- Select the Receive Mode that best suits your needs.
F/T Ring Time
- Set the length of the pseudo/double-ring time in
Fax/Tel mode.
Fax Preview
- View received faxes on the LCD.
Fax Detect
- Receive fax messages automatically when you answer
a call and hear fax tones.
Remote Codes Remote Codes
Answer calls at an extension or external telephone and
use codes to turn the Remote Codes on or off. You can
personalise the codes.
Act.Code
Deact.Code
Auto Reduction
- Reduce the size of incoming faxes.
PC Fax Receive
- Set the machine to send faxes to your computer.
If you enable this feature, you can turn on the Backup
Print safety feature.
Memory Receive Off
-
Fax Forward
Set the machine to forward fax messages or to store
incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve
them while you are away from your machine).
If you select Fax Forward or Fax Storage, you can turn
on the Backup Print safety feature.
Fax Storage
Forward to
Cloud
Forward incoming faxes to the online service.
Forward to
Network
Forward incoming faxes to a network destination.
Fax Rx Stamp
- Print the received time and date on the top of incoming
faxes.
2-sided
- Print incoming faxes on both sides of the paper.
Setup Send Batch TX
- Combine delayed faxes to the same fax number at the
same time of day into one transmission.
Coverpage Note
5. Set up your own comments for the fax cover page.
6.
579
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Setup Send Auto Redial
- Set the machine to redial the last fax number after five
minutes, if the fax did not go through because the line
was busy.
Destination
- Set the machine to display the destination information
on the LCD during fax dialling.
Report Setting XMIT Report
- Select the initial setup for the Transmission Verification
Report.
Journal Period Journal
Period
Set the interval for automatic printing of the Fax
Journal.
Time
If you select an option other than Off and Every 50
Faxes, you can set the time for the option.
Day
If you select Every 7 Days, you can set the day of the
week.
Print Document
- - Print incoming faxes stored in the machine's memory.
Remote Access
- - Set your own code for Remote Retrieval.
Dial Restriction Dial Pad
- Restrict the dialling when using the dial pad.
Address Book
- Restrict the dialling when using the Address Book.
Shortcuts
- Restrict the dialling when using a Shortcut.
LDAP Server
- Restrict the dialling of LDAP server numbers.
Remaining Jobs
- - Check which scheduled jobs are in the machine's
memory and cancel selected jobs.
Miscellaneous BT Call Sign
(U.K. only)
- Use with BT Call Sign.
[Printer]
[All Settings] > [Printer]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Emulation
- - Select the emulation mode.
Resolution
- - Select a print resolution.
Density
- - Increase or decrease the print density.
Print Settings
- - Set your print settings to Text or Graphics.
Print Options Font List HP LaserJet
Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
BR-Script 3
Test Print
- Print a test page.
2-sided 2-sided Print
- Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long edge
or short edge.
Single Image
- For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided image,
select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce printing
time.
When you use Letterhead or Preprinted paper, you must
select the 2-sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided
Feed for Letterhead or Preprinted paper, the last page
will be printed on the reverse side.
Auto Continue
- - Select this setting if you want the machine to clear paper
size errors or media type errors, and use paper from
other trays.
Paper Type
- - Set the paper type.
580
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Paper Size
- - Set the paper size.
Copies
- - Set the number of printed pages.
Orientation
- - Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape
orientation.
Print Position
- - Access the Print Position setting menus.
Auto FF
- - Allow the machine to print any remaining data
automatically.
HP LaserJet Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
Soft Font
No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your
Brother machine.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Symbol Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
Auto CR
- ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Auto WRAP
- Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return
when the carriage position reaches the right margin.
Auto SKIP
- Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return
when the carriage position reaches the bottom margin.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the
paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of
the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
Tray Command
- Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when you
use the HP drivers.
Epson FX-850 Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
Soft Font
No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your
Brother machine.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Character Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the
option you want.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
581
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Epson FX-850 Auto Mask
- Set the top and bottom margins to two-lines each. When
you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top
Margin and Bottom Margin settings.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the
paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of
the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
IBM Proprinter Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
Soft Font
No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your
Brother machine.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Character Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the
option you want.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
Auto CR
- ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Auto Mask
- Set the top and bottom margins to two-lines each. When
you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top
Margin and Bottom Margin settings.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the
paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of
the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
BR-Script 3 Error Print
- Choose whether the machine prints the error information
when errors occur.
PDF Multiple Page
- Set the page layout when printing multiple pages.
PDF Print
Options
- Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments
(Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the text.
PDF Fit to
Page
- Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in the
PDF file to fit the selected paper size.
Carbon Menu Carbon Copy
- Enable or disable the Carbon Copy function.
Copies
- Set the number of printed pages.
Copy1 Tray
- Select the tray you use for Copy1.
Copy1 Macro
- Select a macro/stream for Copy1.
582
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Carbon Menu
Copy2 Tray...
Copy8 Tray
- Select the tray you use for Copy2 to Copy8.
Copy2 Macro...
Copy8 Macro
- Select a macro/stream for Copy2 to Copy8.
Job Save
Location
(available for certain
models)
- - Select the location where you want to save print jobs.
Reset Printer
- - Restore the machine settings to the factory settings.
[Network]
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the Boot method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
(Up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration
mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA
- Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local
address range automatically.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Ethernet
- - Select the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status
- - View the current wired status.
MAC Address
- - View the machine's MAC
address.
Set to Default
1
(For wireless
network models)
- - Restore the wired network
settings to the factory settings.
Wired Enable
1
(For wireless
network models)
- - Turn the Wired LAN interface on
or off manually.
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
1
(For wireless network
models)
Find Wi-Fi
Network
- - Configure your wireless network
settings manually.
583
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
1
(For wireless network
models)
TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the Boot method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
(Up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration
mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA
- Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local
address range automatically.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
WPS/Push
Button
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using the one-button
push method.
WPS/PIN Code
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using WPS with a PIN.
WLAN Status Status
- View the current wireless network
status.
Signal
- View the current wireless network
signal strength.
SSID
- View the current SSID.
Comm. Mode
- View the current Communication
mode.
MAC Address
- - View the machine's MAC
address.
Set to Default
- - Restore the wireless network
settings to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable
- - Turns the wireless interface on or
off.
Wi-Fi Direct
1
(For wireless network
models)
Manual
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings manually.
Group Owner
- - Set your machine as the Group
Owner.
Push Button
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings using the one-
button push method.
PIN Code
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings using WPS with
a PIN code.
584
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wi-Fi Direct
1
(For wireless network
models)
Device
Information
Device Name
- View your machine's device
name.
SSID
- View the Group Owner's SSID.
When the machine is not
connected, the LCD displays Not
Connected.
IP Address
- View your machine's current IP
Address.
Status
Information
Status
- View the current Wi-Fi Direct
network status.
Signal
- View the current Wi-Fi Direct
network signal strength.
When your machine acts as
Group Owner, the LCD always
indicates a strong signal.
I/F Enable
- - Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection
on or off.
NFC
(available for certain
models)
- - - Turn the NFC function on or off.
E-mail Mail Address
- - Enter the email address.
(Up to 255 characters)
Setup Server SMTP Server
Enter the SMTP server name and
address.
Port
Enter the SMTP port number.
Auth. for
SMTP
Select the Security method for
email notification.
SSL/TLS
Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server
Certificate automatically.
POP3/IMAP4 Protocol
Select the protocol for receiving
an email from the server.
Server
Enter the server name and
address.
Port
Enter the port number.
Mailbox
Name
Enter the mailbox name.
(Up to 255 characters)
Mailbox
Password
Enter the password to log into the
server.
(Up to 128 characters)
Select
Folder
Select the specified folder in the
mailbox using the IMAP4
protocol.
SSL/TLS
Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server
Certificate automatically.
APOP
Turn APOP on or off.
585
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
E-mail Setup Mail RX Auto Polling Auto
Polling
Check the server for new
messages automatically.
Poll
Frequency
Set the interval for checking new
messages on the server.
Header
- Select the contents of the email
header to be printed.
Del/Read Error
Mail
- The POP3 server deletes error
emails automatically. The IMAP4
server deletes error emails
automatically after you read them.
Notification
- Receive notification messages.
Setup Mail TX Sender Subject
- View the subject.
Size Limit Size Limit
Limit the size of email documents.
Maximum
Size(MB)
Notification
- Send notification messages.
Setup Relay Relay Broadcast
- Relay a document to another fax
machine.
Relay Domain
Relay ## Register the Domain name.
Relay Report
- Print the relay Broadcast Report.
Report Setting E-mail XMIT Report
Select the initial setup for the
Transmission Verification Report.
IFAX XMIT Report
Manual Receive
- - Check the POP3 or IMAP4 server
for new messages manually.
Web Connect
Settings
Proxy Settings Proxy
Connection
- Change the Web connection
settings.
Address
-
Port
-
User Name
-
Password
-
Web Based Mgmt
- - - Enable or disable Web Based
Management.
If you enable this function, make
sure you specify the connection
method to use Web Based
Management.
Fax to Server Fax to Server
- - Select the network connection
type.
Prefix
- -
Suffix
- -
IPsec
- - - IPsec is an optional security
feature of the IP protocol that
provides authentication and
encryption services. We
recommend contacting your
network administrator before
changing this setting.
Global Detect Allow Detect
- - Enable or disable Global Detect,
a function that detects and
notifies the user when the user
586
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Global Detect
unintentionally connects to a
global network.
Reject Access
- - Disable connections to the global
network.
Network Reset
- - - Restore all network settings back
to the factory settings.
1
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is
installed.
[Print Reports]
[All Settings] > [Print Reports]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
XMIT Verify View on LCD
Display a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Print Report
Print a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Address Book
- Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book.
Fax Journal
- Print a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing
faxes.
(TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.)
User Settings
- Print a list of your User settings.
Printer Settings
- Print a list of your Printer settings.
Network Configuration
- Print a list of your Network settings.
Print File List
- Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory.
Drum Dot Print
- Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
WLAN Report
1
(For wireless network models)
- Print the wireless LAN connection results.
1
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is
installed.
[Machine Info.]
[All Settings] > [Machine Info.]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Serial No.
- Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Main Version
Check your machine's firmware version.
Security Version
Firmware Update
- Update your machine to the latest firmware.
Firmware Auto Check
- View firmware information on the Main Home screen.
Page Counter Total
Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Fax
Copy
Print
Other
Parts Life
1
Drum
Display the remaining life of the drum unit.
Fuser
Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
587
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Parts Life
1
Laser Unit
Display the remaining life of the laser unit.
PF Kit MP
Display the remaining life of PF Kit MP.
PF Kit 1
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 1.
PF Kit 2
2
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 2.
PF Kit 3
2
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 3.
PF Kit 4
2
3
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 4.
PF Kit 5
2
3
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 5.
1
The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
2
Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
3
Supported models only.
[Initial Setup]
[All Settings] > [Initial Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Date & Time Date
Add the date and time on the screen and in the headings of the
faxes you send.
Time
Clock Type
Select the time format (12-hour or 24-hour).
Auto Daylight
Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving
Time.
Time Zone
Set your time zone.
Station ID Fax
Enter your name and fax number so it appears on each page you
fax.
Tel
Name
Tone/Pulse
- Select the dialling mode.
Dial Tone
- Shorten the dial tone detection pause.
Phone Line Set
- Select the telephone line type.
Compatibility
- Adjust the equalisation for transmission difficulties.
VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards.
If you regularly experience fax transmission errors, select Basic
(for VoIP).
Reset Machine Reset
Restore all the machine settings that you have changed.
Network Reset
Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Address Book &
Fax
Erase all stored phone numbers and fax settings.
All Settings
Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings.
Factory Reset
Restore all settings back to the factory settings.
Local Language
(Available only for certain
countries)
- Change your LCD language.
588
[Admin Settings]
[Admin Settings]
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Home Screen
Settings
Icons
- - Delete icons, add icons, or move icons to
other places on the Home screens.
Background
Colour
- - Change the background colour on the
touchscreen to White or Black.
Tabs Rename Tab 1
Change the name of the tabs.
Tab 2
Tab 3
Tab 4
Tab 5
Tab 6
Tab 7
Tab 8
Main Home
Screen
- Set your Main Home screen.
Display
Information
IP Address
- Select whether or not to display your
machine's IP Address on the Home
screens.
Home Screen
Settings Reset
- - Restore Home screen settings back to the
factory settings.
Other Screen
Settings
Copy Screen
- - Set the default Copy screen settings.
Scan Screen
- - Set the default Scan screen settings.
Restriction
Management
User
Restriction
Function
- - Enable or disable restriction functions, for
example, Secure Function Lock.
Setting Lock
- - Restrict unauthorised users from changing
the machine’s settings.
Setting Lock
Details
- - Select the specific machine settings you
want to restrict unauthorised users from
changing.
Password
- - - Register or change the password to log on
to the Admin Settings menu.
Related Information
• Settings and Features Tables
589
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Settings Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
Settings Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> [Settings]
>> [General Setup]
>> [Shortcut Settings]
>> [Fax]
>> [Printer]
>> [Network] (MFC-L5710DW)
>> [Network] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5715DN)
>> [Print Reports]
>> [Machine Info.]
>> [Initial Setup]
[Settings]
[Settings]
Level 1
Level 2 Descriptions
Date & Time
- Access the Date and Time setting menus.
Toner Toner Life
View the approximate remaining toner life.
Test Print
Print a test page.
Toner Cartridge Check
View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for
example, if the toner cartridge is genuine.
Network Wired LAN
Access the Wired LAN setting menus.
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
(For wireless network models)
Access the WLAN setting menus.
Fax Preview
- View received faxes on the LCD.
Tray Setting
- Access the tray setting menus.
Eco Mode
- Access the Eco Mode setting menu.
All Settings
- Configure the detailed settings.
[General Setup]
[All Settings] > [General Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Tray
Setting
Paper Type MP Tray
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
MP tray.
Tray 1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
standard paper tray.
Tray 2
1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Tray 3
1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 3).
Paper Size MP Tray
- Select the paper size you loaded in the MP tray.
590
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Tray
Setting
Paper Size Tray 1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the standard
paper tray.
Tray 2
1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 2).
Tray 3
1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 3).
Tray Use: Copy
- - Select the tray you want to use for making a Copy.
Tray Use: Fax
- - Select the tray you want to use for printing a Fax.
Tray Use:
Print
- - Select the tray you want to use to Print.
Print Position MP Tray X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the MP tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500
(right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the MP tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down)
dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 1 X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the standard paper tray horizontally from -500 (left)
to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the standard paper tray vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 2
1
X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 2) horizontally from -500
(left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 2) vertically from -500 (up)
to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 3
1
X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 3) horizontally from -500
(left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 3) vertically from -500 (up)
to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Skip Tray
1
- - Select a specific tray to skip if you know it is loaded
with the wrong size paper.
Separator Tray
1
- - Select the tray that contains the paper used as the
separator paper, which is inserted between each
print job.
Check Paper
- - Select whether or not to display a message
indicating you must check the paper type and paper
size.
Volume Ring
- - Adjust the ring volume.
Beep
- - Adjust the beeper volume.
Speaker
- - Adjust the speaker volume.
591
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
LCD
Settings
Backlight
- - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
Dim Timer
- - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after
returning to the Home screen.
Screen
Settings
Home Screen
- - Set the Main Home screen.
Scan Screen
- - Set the default Scan screen.
Display
Information
IP Address
- Select whether to display your machine's IP
Address on the Home screen.
Notice
Settings
Scan
Result(Skip
Blank Page)
- - Displays the total scanned pages and skipped
pages after scanning is completed.
Ecology Eco Mode
- - Turn the following machine settings on at the same
time:
• 2-sided Print: Long Edge
2
• Sleep Time: 0 Min
• Dim Timer: 10 Secs
• Quiet Mode: On
2
• Toner Save: On
2
Toner Save
- - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Sleep Time
- - Set how much time should pass before the
machine enters Power Saving mode.
Quiet Mode
- - Decrease printing noise.
Auto Power Off
- - Set the number of hours that the machine will
remain in Deep Sleep mode before going into
Power Off mode.
Improve
Output
- - - Enable the Reduce Curl feature or the Toner
Fixing feature to improve print output.
Setting
Lock
Set Password
- - Restrict unauthorised users from changing the
machine’s settings.
Lock Off⇒On
- -
Delete
Storage
Macro ID
- - Delete the registered Macro data.
Stream ID
- - Delete the registered Stream data.
Font ID
- - Delete the registered Font data.
Delete All
- - Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and Font
data to the factory settings.
1
Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
2
Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain machine settings in Web Based Management.
[Shortcut Settings]
[All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
(Select a shortcut button)
Rename
Change the shortcut name.
Edit
Change the shortcut settings.
Delete
Delete the shortcut.
Register Card/NFC
Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Delete Card/NFC
Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
592
[Fax]
[All Settings] > [Fax]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Setup Receive Ring Delay
- Set the number of rings before the machine answers in
Fax or Fax/Tel mode.
Receive Mode
- Select the Receive Mode that best suits your needs.
F/T Ring Time
- Set the length of the pseudo/double-ring time in
Fax/Tel mode.
Fax Preview
- View received faxes on the LCD.
Fax Detect
- Receive fax messages automatically when you answer
a call and hear fax tones.
Remote Codes Remote Codes
Answer calls at an extension or external telephone and
use codes to turn the Remote Codes on or off. You can
personalise the codes.
Act.Code
Deact.Code
Auto Reduction
- Reduce the size of incoming faxes.
PC Fax Receive
- Set the machine to send faxes to your computer.
If you enable this feature, you can turn on the Backup
Print safety feature.
Memory Receive Off
-
Fax Forward
Set the machine to forward fax messages or to store
incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve
them while you are away from your machine).
If you select Fax Forward or Fax Storage, you can turn
on the Backup Print safety feature.
Fax Storage
Forward to
Cloud
Forward incoming faxes to the online service.
Forward to
Network
Forward incoming faxes to a network destination.
Fax Rx Stamp
- Print the received time and date on the top of incoming
faxes.
2-sided
- Print incoming faxes on both sides of the paper.
Setup Send Batch TX
- Combine delayed faxes to the same fax number at the
same time of day into one transmission.
Coverpage Note
5. Set up your own comments for the fax cover page.
6.
Auto Redial
- Set the machine to redial the last fax number after five
minutes, if the fax did not go through because the line
was busy.
Destination
- Set the machine to display the destination information
on the LCD during fax dialling.
Report Setting XMIT Report
- Select the initial setup for the Transmission Verification
Report.
Journal Period Journal
Period
Set the interval for automatic printing of the Fax
Journal.
Time
If you select an option other than Off and Every 50
Faxes, you can set the time for the option.
Day
If you select Every 7 Days, you can set the day of the
week.
593
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Print Document
- - Print incoming faxes stored in the machine's memory.
Remote Access
- - Set your own code for Remote Retrieval.
Dial Restriction Dial Pad
- Restrict the dialling when using the dial pad.
Address Book
- Restrict the dialling when using the Address Book.
Shortcuts
- Restrict the dialling when using a Shortcut.
LDAP Server
- Restrict the dialling of LDAP server numbers.
Remaining Jobs
- - Check which scheduled jobs are in the machine's
memory and cancel selected jobs.
Miscellaneous BT Call Sign
(U.K. only)
- Use with BT Call Sign.
[Printer]
[All Settings] > [Printer]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Emulation
- - Select the emulation mode.
Resolution
- - Select a print resolution.
Density
- - Increase or decrease the print density.
Print Settings
- - Set your print settings to Text or Graphics.
Print Options Font List HP LaserJet
Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
BR-Script 3
Test Print
- Print a test page.
2-sided 2-sided Print
- Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long edge or
short edge.
Single Image
- For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided image,
select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce printing time.
When you use Letterhead or Preprinted paper, you must
select the 2-sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided
Feed for Letterhead or Preprinted paper, the last page will
be printed on the reverse side.
Auto Continue
- - Select this setting if you want the machine to clear paper
size errors or media type errors, and use paper from other
trays.
Paper Type
- - Set the paper type.
Paper Size
- - Set the paper size.
Copies
- - Set the number of printed pages.
Orientation
- - Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape
orientation.
Print Position
- - Access the Print Position setting menus.
Auto FF
- - Allow the machine to print any remaining data
automatically.
HP LaserJet Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
Soft Font
No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother
machine.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
594
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
HP LaserJet
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Symbol Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
Auto CR
- ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Auto WRAP
- Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return
when the carriage position reaches the right margin.
Auto SKIP
- Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return
when the carriage position reaches the bottom margin.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of
the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
Tray Command
- Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when you
use the HP drivers.
Epson FX-850 Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
Soft Font
No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother
machine.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Character Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the
option you want..
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
Auto Mask
- Set the top and bottom margins to two-line each. When
you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top
Margin and Bottom Margin settings.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of
the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
IBM Proprinter Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
Soft Font
No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother
machine.
595
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
IBM Proprinter Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Character Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the
option you want.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
Auto CR
- ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Auto Mask
- Set the top and bottom margins to two-line each. When
you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top
Margin and Bottom Margin settings.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of
the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
BR-Script 3 Error Print
- Choose whether the machine prints the error information
when errors occur.
PDF Multiple Page
- Set the page layout when printing multiple pages.
PDF Print
Options
- Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments
(Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the text.
PDF Fit to
Page
- Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in the
PDF file to fit the selected paper size.
Carbon Menu Carbon Copy
- Enable or disable the Carbon Copy function.
Copies
- Set the number of printed pages.
Copy1 Tray
- Select the tray you use for Copy1.
Copy1 Macro
- Select a macro/stream for Copy1.
Copy2 Tray...
Copy8 Tray
- Select the tray you use for Copy2 to Copy8.
Copy2 Macro...
Copy8 Macro
- Select a macro/stream for Copy2 to Copy8.
Reset Printer
- - Restore the machine settings to the factory settings.
[Network] (MFC-L5710DW)
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the Boot method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
596
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
(Up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration
mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA
- Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Ethernet
- - Select the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status
- - View the current wired status.
MAC Address
- - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
- - Restore the wired network settings
to the factory settings.
Wired Enable
- - Turn the Wired LAN interface on or
off manually.
WLAN(Wi-Fi) Find Wi-Fi
Network
- - Configure your wireless network
settings manually.
TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the Boot method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
(Up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration
mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA
- Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
WPS/Push Button
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using the one-button push
method.
597
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
WLAN(Wi-Fi) WPS/PIN Code
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using WPS with a PIN.
WLAN Status Status
- View the current wireless network
status.
Signal
- View the current wireless network
signal strength.
SSID
- View the current SSID.
Comm. Mode
- View the current Communication
mode.
MAC Address
- - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
- - Restore the wireless network
settings to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable
- - Turns the wireless interface on or
off.
Wi-Fi Direct Manual
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings manually.
Group Owner
- - Set your machine as the Group
Owner.
Push Button
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings using the one-button push
method.
PIN Code
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings using WPS with a PIN code.
Device
Information
Device Name
- View your machine's device name.
SSID
- View the Group Owner's SSID.
When the machine is not connected,
the LCD displays Not Connected.
IP Address
- View your machine's current IP
Address.
Status
Information
Status
- View the current Wi-Fi Direct
network status.
Signal
- View the current Wi-Fi Direct
network signal strength.
When your machine acts as Group
Owner, the LCD always indicates a
strong signal.
I/F Enable
- - Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection on
or off.
E-mail Mail Address
- - Enter the email address.
(Up to 255 characters)
Setup Server SMTP Server
Enter the SMTP server name and
address.
Port
Enter the SMTP port number.
Auth. for
SMTP
Select the Security method for email
notification.
SSL/TLS
Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
598
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
E-mail Setup Server POP3/IMAP4 Protocol
Select the protocol for receiving an
email from the server.
Server
Enter the server name and address.
Port
Enter the port number.
Mailbox
Name
Enter the mailbox name.
(Up to 255 characters)
Mailbox
Password
Enter the password to log into the
server.
(Up to 128 characters)
Select
Folder
Select the specified folder in the
mailbox using the IMAP4 protocol.
SSL/TLS
Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
APOP
Turn APOP on or off.
Setup Mail RX Auto Polling Auto
Polling
Check the server for new messages
automatically.
Poll
Frequency
Set the interval for checking new
messages on the server.
Header
- Select the contents of the email
header to be printed.
Del/Read Error
Mail
- The POP3 server deletes error
emails automatically. The IMAP4
server deletes error emails
automatically after you read them.
Notification
- Receive notification messages.
Setup Mail TX Sender Subject
- View the subject.
Size Limit Size Limit
Limit the size of email documents.
Maximum
Size(MB)
Notification
- Send notification messages.
Setup Relay Relay Broadcast
- Relay a document to another fax
machine.
Relay Domain
Relay ## Register the Domain name.
Relay Report
- Print the relay Broadcast Report.
Report Setting E-mail XMIT Report
Select the initial setup for the
Transmission Verification Report.
IFAX XMIT Report
Manual Receive
- - Check the POP3 or IMAP4 server
for new messages manually.
Web Connect
Settings
Proxy Settings Proxy
Connection
- Change the Web connection
settings.
Address
-
Port
-
User Name
-
Password
-
599
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Web Based
Mgmt
- - - Enable or disable Web Based
Management.
If you enable this function, make
sure you specify the connection
method to use Web Based
Management.
Fax to
Server
Fax to Server
- - Select the network connection type.
Prefix
- -
Suffix
- -
IPsec
- - - IPsec is an optional security feature
of the IP protocol that provides
authentication and encryption
services. We recommend contacting
your network administrator before
changing this setting.
Global
Detect
Allow Detect
- - Enable or disable Global Detect, a
function that detects and notifies the
user when the user unintentionally
connects to a global network.
Reject Access
- - Disable connections to the global
network.
Network
Reset
- - - Restore all network settings back to
the factory settings.
[Network] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5715DN)
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the Boot method that best suits
your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
(Up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the primary
WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA
- Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Ethernet
- - Select the Ethernet link mode.
600
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN Wired Status
- - View the current wired status.
MAC Address
- - View the machine's MAC address.
Wired Enable
- - Turn the Wired LAN interface on or off
manually.
E-mail Mail Address
- - Enter the email address.
(Up to 255 characters)
Setup Server SMTP Server
Enter the SMTP server name and
address.
Port
Enter the SMTP port number.
Auth. for
SMTP
Select the Security method for email
notification.
SSL/TLS
Send or receive an email via an email
server that requires secure SSL/TLS
communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
POP3/IMAP4 Protocol
Select the protocol for receiving an
email from the server.
Server
Enter the server name and address.
Port
Enter the port number.
Mailbox
Name
Enter the mailbox name.
(Up to 255 characters)
Mailbox
Password
Enter the password to log into the
server.
(Up to 128 characters)
Select
Folder
Select the specified folder in the
mailbox using the IMAP4 protocol.
SSL/TLS
Send or receive an email via an email
server that requires secure SSL/TLS
communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
APOP
Turn APOP on or off.
Setup Mail
RX
Auto Polling Auto
Polling
Check the server for new messages
automatically.
Poll
Frequency
Set the interval for checking new
messages on the server.
Header
- Select the contents of the email
header to be printed.
Del/Read Error
Mail
- The POP3 server deletes error emails
automatically. The IMAP4 server
deletes error emails automatically
after you read them.
Notification
- Receive notification messages.
Setup Mail
TX
Sender Subject
- View the subject.
Size Limit Size Limit
Limit the size of email documents.
Maximum
Size(MB)
Notification
- Send notification messages.
601
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
E-mail Setup Relay Relay Broadcast
- Relay a document to another fax
machine.
Relay Domain
Relay ## Register the Domain name.
Relay Report
- Print the relay Broadcast Report.
Report
Setting
E-mail XMIT Report
Select the initial setup for the
Transmission Verification Report.
IFAX XMIT Report
Manual
Receive
- - Check the POP3 or IMAP4 server for
new messages manually.
Web Connect
Settings
Proxy
Settings
Proxy Connection
- Change the Web connection settings.
Address
-
Port
-
User Name
-
Password
-
Web Based
Mgmt
- - - Enable or disable Web Based
Management.
If you enable this function, make sure
you specify the connection method to
use Web Based Management.
Fax to Server Fax to
Server
- - Select the network connection type.
Prefix
- -
Suffix
- -
IPsec
- - - IPsec is an optional security feature of
the IP protocol that provides
authentication and encryption
services. We recommend contacting
your network administrator before
changing this setting.
Global Detect Allow Detect
- - Enable or disable Global Detect, a
function that detects and notifies the
user when the user unintentionally
connects to a global network.
Reject
Access
- - Disable connections to the global
network.
Network Reset
- - - Restore all network settings back to
the factory settings.
[Print Reports]
[All Settings] > [Print Reports]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
XMIT Verify View on LCD
Display a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Print Report
Print a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Address Book
- Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book.
Fax Journal
- Print a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing
faxes.
(TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.)
User Settings
- Print a list of your User settings.
602
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Printer Settings
- Print a list of your Printer settings.
Network Configuration
- Print a list of your Network settings.
Print File List
- Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory.
Drum Dot Print
- Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
WLAN Report
(For wireless network models)
- Print the wireless LAN connection results.
[Machine Info.]
[All Settings] > [Machine Info.]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Serial No.
- Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Main Version
Check your machine's firmware version.
Security Version
Firmware Update
- Update your machine to the latest firmware.
Firmware Auto Check
- View firmware information on the Main Home screen.
Page Counter Total
Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Fax
Copy
Print
Other
Parts Life
1
Drum
Display the remaining life of the drum unit.
Fuser
Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
Laser Unit
Display the remaining life of the laser unit.
PF Kit MP
Display the remaining life of PF Kit MP.
PF Kit 1
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 1.
PF Kit 2
2
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 2.
PF Kit 3
2
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 3.
1
The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
2
Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
[Initial Setup]
[All Settings] > [Initial Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Date & Time Date
Add the date and time on the screen and in the headings of the
faxes you send.
Time
Clock Type
Select the time format (12-hour or 24-hour).
Auto Daylight
Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving
Time.
Time Zone
Set your time zone.
Station ID Fax
Enter your name and fax number so it appears on each page you
fax.
Tel
603
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Station ID Name
Enter your name and fax number so it appears on each page you
fax.
Tone/Pulse
- Select the dialling mode.
Dial Tone
- Shorten the dial tone detection pause.
Phone Line Set
- Select the telephone line type.
Compatibility
- Adjust the equalisation for transmission difficulties.
VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards.
If you regularly experience fax transmission errors, select Basic
(for VoIP).
Reset Machine Reset
Restore all the machine settings that you have changed.
Network Reset
Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Address Book &
Fax
Erase all stored phone numbers and fax settings.
All Settings
Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings.
Factory Reset
Restore all settings back to the factory settings.
Local Language
(Available only for certain
countries)
- Change your LCD language.
Related Information
• Settings and Features Tables
604
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Settings Tables (DCP-L5510DW)
Settings Tables (DCP-L5510DW)
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW
>> [Settings]
>> [General Setup]
>> [Shortcut Settings]
>> [Printer]
>> [Network] (DCP-L5510DW)
>> [Print Reports]
>> [Machine Info.]
>> [Initial Setup]
[Settings]
[Settings]
Level 1
Level 2 Descriptions
Date & Time
- Access the Date and Time setting menus.
Toner Toner Life
View the approximate remaining toner life.
Test Print
Print a test page.
Toner Cartridge
Check
View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD,
for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine.
Network Wired LAN
Access the Wired LAN setting menus.
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
(For wireless network
models)
Access the WLAN setting menus.
Wi-Fi Direct
(For wireless network
models)
- Access the Wi-Fi Direct setting menus.
Tray Setting
- Access the tray setting menus.
Eco Mode
- Access the Eco Mode setting menu.
All Settings
- Configure the detailed settings.
[General Setup]
[All Settings] > [General Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Tray
Setting
Paper Type MP Tray
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
MP tray.
Tray 1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
standard paper tray.
Tray 2
1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Tray 3
1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 3).
605
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Tray
Setting
Paper Size MP Tray
- Select the paper size you loaded in the MP tray.
Tray 1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the standard
paper tray.
Tray 2
1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 2).
Tray 3
1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 3).
Tray Use: Copy
- - Select the tray you want to use for making a Copy.
Tray Use:
Print
- - Select the tray you want to use to Print.
Print Position MP Tray X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the MP tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500
(right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the MP tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down)
dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 1 X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the standard paper tray horizontally from -500 (left)
to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the standard paper tray vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 2
1
X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 2) horizontally from -500
(left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 2) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 3
1
X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 3) horizontally from -500
(left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 3) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Skip Tray
1
- - Select a specific tray to skip if you know it is loaded
with the wrong size paper.
Separator Tray
1
- - Select the tray that contains the paper used as the
separator paper, which is inserted between each
print job.
Check Paper
- - Select whether or not to display a message
indicating you must check the paper type and paper
size.
Beep
- - - Adjust the beeper volume.
LCD
Settings
Backlight
- - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
Dim Timer
- - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after
returning to the Home screen.
606
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Screen
Settings
Home Screen
- - Set the Main Home screen.
Scan Screen
- - Set the default Scan screen.
Display
Information
IP Address
- Select whether to display your machine's IP
Address on the Home screen.
Notice
Settings
Scan
Result(Skip
Blank Page)
- - Displays the total scanned pages and skipped
pages after scanning is completed.
Ecology Eco Mode
- - Turn the following machine settings on at the same
time:
• 2-sided Print: Long Edge
2
• Sleep Time: 0 Min
• Dim Timer: 10 Secs
• Quiet Mode: On
2
• Toner Save: On
2
Toner Save
- - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Sleep Time
- - Set how much time should pass before the machine
enters Power Saving mode.
Quiet Mode
- - Decrease printing noise.
Auto Power Off
- - Set the number of hours that the machine will
remain in Deep Sleep mode before going into
Power Off mode.
Improve
Output
- - - Enable the Reduce Curl feature or the Toner
Fixing feature to improve print output.
Setting
Lock
Set Password
- - Restrict unauthorised users from changing the
machine’s settings.
Lock Off⇒On
- -
Delete
Storage
Macro ID
- - Delete the registered Macro data.
Stream ID
- - Delete the registered Stream data.
Font ID
- - Delete the registered Font data.
Delete All
- - Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and Font
data to the factory settings.
1
Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
2
Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain machine settings in Web Based Management.
[Shortcut Settings]
[All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
(Select a shortcut button)
Rename
Change the shortcut name.
Edit
Change the shortcut settings.
Delete
Delete the shortcut.
Register Card/NFC
Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Delete Card/NFC
Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
607
[Printer]
[All Settings] > [Printer]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Emulation
- - Select the emulation mode.
Resolution
- - Select a print resolution.
Density
- - Increase or decrease the print density.
Print Settings
- - Set your print settings to Text or Graphics.
Print Options Font List HP LaserJet
Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
BR-Script 3
Test Print
- Print a test page.
2-sided 2-sided Print
- Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long edge or
short edge.
Single Image
- For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided image,
select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce printing time.
When you use Letterhead or Preprinted paper, you must
select the 2-sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided
Feed for Letterhead or Preprinted paper, the last page will
be printed on the reverse side.
Auto Continue
- - Select this setting if you want the machine to clear paper
size errors or media type errors, and use paper from other
trays.
Paper Type
- - Set the paper type.
Paper Size
- - Set the paper size.
Copies
- - Set the number of printed pages.
Orientation
- - Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape
orientation.
Print Position
- - Access the Print Position setting menus.
Auto FF
- - Allow the machine to print any remaining data
automatically.
HP LaserJet Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
Soft Font
No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother
machine.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Symbol Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
Auto CR
- ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Auto WRAP
- Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return
when the carriage position reaches the right margin.
Auto SKIP
- Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return
when the carriage position reaches the bottom margin.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
608
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
HP LaserJet Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of
the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
Tray Command
- Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when you
use the HP drivers.
Epson FX-850 Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
Soft Font
No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother
machine.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Character Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the
option you want.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
Auto Mask
- Set the top and bottom margins to two-line each. When
you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top
Margin and Bottom Margin settings.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of
the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
IBM Proprinter Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
Soft Font
No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother
machine.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Character Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the
option you want.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
Auto CR
- ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Auto Mask
- Set the top and bottom margins to two-line each. When
you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top
Margin and Bottom Margin settings.
609
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
IBM Proprinter Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of
the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
BR-Script 3 Error Print
- Choose whether the machine prints the error information
when errors occur.
PDF Multiple Page
- Set the page layout when printing multiple pages.
PDF Print
Options
- Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments
(Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the text.
PDF Fit to
Page
- Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in the
PDF file to fit the selected paper size.
Carbon Menu Carbon Copy
- Enable or disable the Carbon Copy function.
Copies
- Set the number of printed pages.
Copy1 Tray
- Select the tray you use for Copy1.
Copy1 Macro
- Select a macro/stream for Copy1.
Copy2 Tray...
Copy8 Tray
- Select the tray you use for Copy2 to Copy8.
Copy2 Macro...
Copy8 Macro
- Select a macro/stream for Copy2 to Copy8.
Reset Printer
- - Restore the machine settings to the factory settings.
[Network] (DCP-L5510DW)
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the Boot method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
(Up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the primary
WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA
- Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
610
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Ethernet
- - Select the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status
- - View the current wired status.
MAC Address
- - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
- - Restore the wired network settings to
the factory settings.
Wired Enable
- - Turn the Wired LAN interface on or
off manually.
WLAN(Wi-Fi) Find Wi-Fi
Network
- - Configure your wireless network
settings manually.
TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the Boot method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
(Up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the primary
WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA
- Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
WPS/Push Button
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using the one-button push
method.
WPS/PIN Code
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using WPS with a PIN.
WLAN Status Status
- View the current wireless network
status.
Signal
- View the current wireless network
signal strength.
SSID
- View the current SSID.
Comm. Mode
- View the current Communication
mode.
MAC Address
- - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
- - Restore the wireless network settings
to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable
- - Turns the wireless interface on or off.
611
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wi-Fi Direct Manual
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings manually.
Group Owner
- - Set your machine as the Group
Owner.
Push Button
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings using the one-button push
method.
PIN Code
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings using WPS with a PIN code.
Device
Information
Device Name
- View your machine's device name.
SSID
- View the Group Owner's SSID.
When the machine is not connected,
the LCD displays Not Connected.
IP Address
- View your machine's current IP
Address.
Status
Information
Status
- View the current Wi-Fi Direct network
status.
Signal
- View the current Wi-Fi Direct network
signal strength.
When your machine acts as Group
Owner, the LCD always indicates a
strong signal.
I/F Enable
- - Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection on
or off.
E-mail Mail Address
- - Enter the email address.
(Up to 255 characters)
Setup Server SMTP Server
Enter the SMTP server name and
address.
Port
Enter the SMTP port number.
Auth. for
SMTP
Select the Security method for email
notification.
SSL/TLS
Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
Setup Mail TX Sender Subject
- View the subject.
Size Limit Size Limit
Limit the size of email documents.
Maximum
Size(MB)
Notification
- Send notification messages.
Web Connect
Settings
Proxy Settings Proxy
Connection
- Change the Web connection settings.
Address
-
Port
-
User Name
-
Password
-
Web Based
Mgmt
- - - Enable or disable Web Based
Management.
612
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
If you enable this function, make sure
you specify the connection method to
use Web Based Management.
IPsec
- - - IPsec is an optional security feature
of the IP protocol that provides
authentication and encryption
services. We recommend contacting
your network administrator before
changing this setting.
Global
Detect
Allow Detect
- - Enable or disable Global Detect, a
function that detects and notifies the
user when the user unintentionally
connects to a global network.
Reject Access
- - Disable connections to the global
network.
Network
Reset
- - - Restore all network settings back to
the factory settings.
[Print Reports]
[All Settings] > [Print Reports]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Address Book
- Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book.
User Settings
- Print a list of your User settings.
Printer Settings
- Print a list of your Printer settings.
Network Configuration
- Print a list of your Network settings.
Print File List
- Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory.
Drum Dot Print
- Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
WLAN Report
(For wireless network models)
- Print the wireless LAN connection results.
[Machine Info.]
[All Settings] > [Machine Info.]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Serial No.
- Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Main Version
Check your machine's firmware version.
Security Version
Firmware Update
- Update your machine to the latest firmware.
Firmware Auto Check
- View firmware information on the Main Home screen.
Page Counter Total
Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Copy
Print
Other
Parts Life
1
Drum
Display the remaining life of the drum unit.
Fuser
Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
Laser Unit
Display the remaining life of the laser unit.
613
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Parts Life
1
PF Kit MP
Display the remaining life of PF Kit MP.
PF Kit 1
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 1.
PF Kit 2
2
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 2.
PF Kit 3
2
Display the remaining life of PF Kit 3.
1
The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
2
Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
[Initial Setup]
[All Settings] > [Initial Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Date & Time Date
Add the date and time on the screen.
Time
Clock Type
Select the time format (12-hour or 24-hour).
Auto Daylight
Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time.
Time Zone
Set your time zone.
Reset Machine Reset
Restore all the machine settings that you have changed.
Network Reset
Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Address Book
Erase all stored email addresses.
All Settings
Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings.
Factory Reset
Restore all settings back to the factory settings.
Local Language
(Available only for certain
countries)
- Change your LCD language.
Related Information
• Settings and Features Tables
614
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Features Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Features Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910)
Related Models: MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
>> Wired Network Setup
>> Wi-Fi
®
Setup
>> [Toner]
>> [Admin Settings]
>> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
>> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
>> [Copy]
>> [Scan]
>> [Shortcuts]
>> [Secure Print]
>> [Web]
>> [Apps]
>> [USB]
>> [2 in 1 ID Copy]
Wired Network Setup
(Wired Network Setup)
Level 3
Descriptions
TCP/IP
Change the TCP/IP settings.
Ethernet
Select the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status
View the current wired status.
MAC Address
View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
1
(For wireless network models)
Restore the wired network settings to the factory settings.
Wired Enable
1
(For wireless network models)
Turn the Wired LAN interface on or off manually.
1
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is
installed.
Wi-Fi
®
Setup
(Wi-Fi
®
Setup)
For wireless network models
Level 3
Descriptions
Find Wi-Fi Network
Configure your wireless network settings manually.
TCP/IP
1
Change the TCP/IP settings.
WPS/Push Button
Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
WPS/PIN Code
1
Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
615
Level 3 Descriptions
WLAN Status
1
Display the wireless network connection status.
MAC Address
1
Display your machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
1
Restore your machine's wireless network settings to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable
1
Turn the wireless interface on or off.
1
Available after a Wi-Fi
®
connection has been configured.
NOTE
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed.
[Toner]
[Toner]
Level 2
Descriptions
Toner Life
View the approximate remaining toner life.
Test Print
Print a test page.
Toner Cartridge Check
View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner
cartridge is genuine.
[Admin Settings]
[Admin Settings]
Level 2
Descriptions
Admin Settings
Change the screen settings and restrict use of the machine.
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Redial /
Pause
- - - Redial the last number called. When you are
entering a fax or telephone number on the
touchscreen, Redial changes to Pause on the
LCD. Press Pause when you need a delay
while dialling numbers, such as access codes
and credit card numbers. You can also store a
pause when you set up addresses.
Tel / R
- - - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the
telephone line type. You can use R to gain
access to an outside line or to transfer a call
to another extension when connected to a
PBX.
Address
Book
(Search)
- - Search within the Address Book.
616
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Address
Book
Edit Add New
Address
Name
Store Address Book numbers, set up Group
numbers for Broadcasting, change and delete
Address Book numbers.
Address
Setup
Groups
Name
Add/
Delete
Change
(Select
Address)
Delete
(Select
Address)
(Select Address
Book)
Apply
- Start sending a fax using the Address Book.
Call
History
Outgoing Call
(Select
Outgoing Call)
Apply
Select a number from the Outgoing Call
history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the
Address Book, or delete it.
Edit
Fax Start
- - - Send a fax.
Options Fax Resolution
- - Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
Contrast
- - Adjust the contrast.
2-sided Fax
(For automatic 2-
sided scanning
models)
- - Set the 2-sided scanning format.
Glass Scan Size
- - Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to
the size of the document.
Broadcasting Add Number Add
Number
Send the same fax message to more than one
fax number.
Add from
Address
book
Search in
Address
book
Preview
- - Preview a fax message before you send it.
Delayed Fax Delayed Fax
- Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be
sent.
Set Time
-
Real Time TX
- - Send a fax without using the memory.
Coverpage Setup Coverpage
Setup
- Set the machine to automatically send a pre-
programmed cover page.
Coverpage
Note
-
Total Pages
-
Overseas Mode
- - Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes
overseas.
Set New Default
- - Save your settings as the default.
Factory Reset
- - Restore all settings back to the factory
settings.
Save as
Shortcut
- - - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
617
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Sending Faxes
Redial / Pause - Redial the last number called. When you are entering a fax or
telephone number on the touchscreen, Redial changes to
Pause on the LCD. Press Pause when you need a delay
while dialling numbers, such as access codes and credit card
numbers. You can also store a pause when you set up
addresses.
Tel / R - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the telephone line
type. You can use R to gain access to an outside line or to
transfer a call to another extension when connected to a
PBX.
Address Book
- Select the address of the recipient from the address book.
Call History
- Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then
send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
Fax Start
- Send a fax.
Options
- Select your settings.
Save as
Shortcut
- Save the current settings as a shortcut.
Received
Faxes
Print/Delete Print
All(New
Faxes)
Print the new received faxes.
Print
All(Old
Faxes)
Print the old received faxes.
Delete
All(New
Faxes)
Delete the new received faxes.
Delete
All(Old
Faxes)
Delete the old received faxes.
Address Book
- - Select the address of the recipient from the address book.
Call History
- - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then
send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
[Copy]
[Copy]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Start
- - Make a monochrome or greyscale copy.
ID
- - Make a copy of your ID card.
Interrupt
- - Interrupt a print job with a copy job.
> (more Copy options)
Receipt Start
Set the preset copy settings for copying a
receipt.
ID
Interrupt
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
618
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
> (more Copy options)
Receipt Options
Set the preset copy settings for copying a
receipt.
Normal Start
Set the preset copy settings for a Normal copy.
ID
Interrupt
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2sided(1⇒2) Start
Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided (1⇒2).
ID
Interrupt
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2sided(2⇒2) Start
Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided (2⇒2).
ID
Interrupt
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2in1(ID) Start
Set the preset copy settings of 2in1(ID).
ID
Interrupt
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2in1 Start
Set the preset copy settings of 2in1.
ID
Interrupt
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
Paper Save Start
Set the preset copy settings for Paper Save.
ID
Interrupt
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
Options Quality
- Select the Copy resolution for your document
type.
Tray Use
- Select the paper tray you want to use.
Enlarge/Reduce 100%
-
619
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Options Enlarge/Reduce Enlarge
Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy.
Reduce
Select a reduction ratio for the next copy.
Auto
Adjusts the copy size to fit on the paper size
you have set.
Custom(25-400%)
Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Density
- Adjust the density.
2-sided Copy Layout
Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select
flip on long edge or flip on short edge.
2-sided Copy
Page Layout
- Select a page layout option when you make 2-
sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided document.
Contrast
- Adjust the contrast.
Stack/Sort
- Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
2in1/1in1
- If you select 2 in 1 (ID), you can select the
layout options.
Page Layout
- Make N in 1 and 2 in 1 copies.
Auto Deskew
- Set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically.
Save as Shortcut
- - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Scan]
[Scan]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB Scan Actions
- - Scan documents to a USB flash
drive.
Options 2-sided Scan
(For automatic 2-
sided scanning
models)
-
Colour Setting
-
Resolution
-
File Type
-
Document Size
-
Brightness
-
Contrast
-
File Name
-
File Name Style
-
Auto Deskew
-
Skip Blank Page
-
Skip Blank Page
Sensitivity
-
Remove
Background
Colour
-
Margin Settings
(available only for
certain models)
-
620
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB Options Document
Separation
Document
Separation
Scan documents to a USB flash
drive.
Copies
Number of
Pages
B&W TIFF
Compress
-
Set New Default
-
Factory Reset
-
Save as
Shortcut
- -
Start
- -
to My E-mail
- - - Scan a monochrome or a colour
document to your email address.
to My Folder
- - - Send scanned data to your
folder in the CIFS server on your
local network or on the Internet.
to PC to File Scan Actions
- Scan documents and save them
to a folder on your computer.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to OCR Scan Actions
- Convert your scanned document
to an editable text file.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Image Scan Actions
- Scan photos or graphics into
your graphics applications.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to E-mail Scan Actions
- Send a scanned document as
an email attachment.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Mobile App Scan Actions
- - Scan documents to a mobile
application.
(Select Profile
name)
- -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to E-mail
Server
Scan Actions
- - Scan a monochrome or a colour
document to your email server.
Cancel
- -
Manual
-
Address Book
-
621
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to E-mail
Server
Address Book
(Search) Scan a monochrome or a colour
document to your email server.
Edit
-
(Select Address
Book)
-
Next Destinations
-
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
Destinations
(Select Address) -
to FTP/SFTP Scan Actions
- - Send scanned data via FTP/
SFTP.
(Select Profile
name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to Network Scan Actions
- - Send scanned data to a CIFS
server on your local network or
on the Internet.
(Select Profile
name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to SharePoint Scan Actions
- - Send scanned data via a
SharePoint server.
(Select Profile
name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to Web
- - - Upload the scanned data to an
Internet service.
WS Scan
(Appears when you
install a Web
Services Scanner,
which is displayed in
your computer's
Network explorer.)
Scan Actions
- - Scan data using the Web
Service protocol.
Scan
- -
Scan for E-
mail
- -
Scan for Fax
- -
Scan for Print
- -
[Shortcuts]
[Shortcuts]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Add Shortcut Copy
- Select the settings you want.
Fax
- Select the settings you want.
Scan to File
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to
your computer.
to OCR
Convert your scanned document to an editable
text file.
622
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Add Shortcut Scan to Image
Scan a colour picture into your graphics
application.
to USB
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
to E-mail
Scan a monochrome or a colour document into
your email application.
to E-mail
Server
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to
the email address you want.
to Network
Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your
local network or on the Internet.
to FTP/SFTP
Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.
to SharePoint
Send scanned data via a SharePoint server.
Web
- Connect the Brother machine to an Internet
service.
Web services may have been added and
service names may have been changed by the
provider since this document was published.
Apps
- Connect the Brother machine to the Brother
Apps service.
These lists appears when
each Shortcut name is
pressed for two seconds.
Rename
- Change the shortcut name.
Edit
- Change the shortcut settings.
Delete
- Delete the shortcut.
Register
Card/NFC
- Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Delete
Card/NFC
- Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
[Secure Print]
[Secure Print]
Level 2
Descriptions
Secure Print
You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
[Web]
[Web]
Level 2
Descriptions
Web
Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
[Apps]
[Apps]
Level 2
Descriptions
Apps
Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
623
[USB]
[USB]
Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
USB Scan to USB
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
Direct Print
Print the data directly from a USB flash drive.
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
Level 2
Descriptions
2 in 1 ID Copy
Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Related Information
• Settings and Features Tables
624
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Features Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
Features Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN
>> Wi-Fi
®
Setup
>> [Toner]
>> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
>> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
>> [Copy]
>> [Scan]
>> [Shortcuts]
>> [Secure Print]
>> [Web]
>> [Apps]
>> [USB]
>> [2 in 1 ID Copy]
Wi-Fi
®
Setup
(Wi-Fi
®
Setup)
(For wireless network models)
Level 3
Descriptions
Find Wi-Fi Network
Configure your wireless network settings manually.
TCP/IP
1
Change the TCP/IP settings.
WPS/Push Button
Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
WPS/PIN Code
1
Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
WLAN Status
1
Display the wireless network connection status.
MAC Address
1
Display your machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
1
Restore your machine's wireless network settings to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable
1
Turn the wireless interface on or off.
1
Available after a Wi-Fi
®
connection has been configured.
[Toner]
[Toner]
Level 2
Descriptions
Toner Life
View the approximate remaining toner life.
Test Print
Print a test page.
Toner Cartridge Check
View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner
cartridge is genuine.
625
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Redial / Pause - - - Redial the last number called. When you are
entering a fax or telephone number on the
touchscreen, Redial changes to Pause on
the LCD. Press Pause when you need a
delay while dialling numbers, such as access
codes and credit card numbers. You can also
store a pause when you set up addresses.
Tel / R
- - - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as
the telephone line type. You can use R to
gain access to an outside line or to transfer a
call to another extension when connected to
a PBX.
Address Book
(Search)
- - Search within the Address Book.
Edit Add New
Address
Name
Store Address Book numbers, set up Group
numbers for Broadcasting, change and
delete Address Book numbers.
Address
Setup
Groups
Name
Add/
Delete
Change
(Select
Address)
Delete
(Select
Address)
(Select Address
Book)
Apply
- Start sending a fax using the Address Book.
Call History Redial
- - Redial the last number you dialled.
Outgoing Call
(Select
Outgoing Call)
Apply
Select a number from the Outgoing Call
history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the
Address Book, or delete it.
Edit
Fax Start
- - - Send a fax.
Options
Fax Resolution
- - Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
Contrast
- - Adjust the contrast.
2-sided Fax
(For automatic 2-
sided scanning
models)
- - Set the 2-sided scanning format.
Glass Scan Size
- - Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to
the size of the document.
Broadcasting Add Number Add
Number
Send the same fax message to more than
one fax number.
Add from
Address
book
Search in
Address
book
626
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Options
Preview
- - Preview a fax message before you send it.
Delayed Fax Delayed Fax
- Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be
sent.
Set Time
-
Real Time TX
- - Send a fax without using the memory.
Coverpage Setup Coverpage
Setup
- Set the machine to automatically send a pre-
programmed cover page.
Coverpage
Note
-
Total Pages
-
Overseas Mode
- - Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes
overseas.
Call History
- - Select a number from the Outgoing Call
history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the
Address Book, or delete it.
Address Book
- - Select the address of the recipient from the
address book.
Set New Default
- - Save your settings as the default.
Factory Reset
- - Restore all settings back to the factory
settings.
Save as
Shortcut
- - - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Sending Faxes
Redial / Pause - Redial the last number called. When you are entering a fax or
telephone number on the touchscreen, Redial changes to
Pause on the LCD. Press Pause when you need a delay
while dialling numbers, such as access codes and credit card
numbers. You can also store a pause when you set up
addresses.
Tel / R - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the telephone line
type. You can use R to gain access to an outside line or to
transfer a call to another extension when connected to a
PBX.
Address Book
- Select the address of the recipient from the address book.
Call History
- Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then
send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
Fax Start
- Send a fax.
Options
- Select your settings.
Save as
Shortcut
- Save the current settings as a shortcut.
Received
Faxes
Print/Delete Print
All(New
Faxes)
Print the new received faxes.
Print
All(Old
Faxes)
Print the old received faxes.
627
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Received
Faxes
Print/Delete Delete
All(New
Faxes)
Delete the new received faxes.
Delete
All(Old
Faxes)
Delete the old received faxes.
Address Book
- - Select the address of the recipient from the address book.
Call History
- - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then
send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
[Copy]
[Copy]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Start
- - Make a monochrome or greyscale copy.
ID
- - Make a copy of your ID card.
Options
Quality
- Select the Copy resolution for your document
type.
Tray Use
- Select the paper tray you want to use.
Enlarge/Reduce 100%
-
Enlarge
Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy.
Reduce
Select a reduction ratio for the next copy.
Auto
Adjusts the copy size to fit on the paper size you
have set.
Custom(25-400%)
Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Density
- Adjust the density.
2-sided Copy Layout
Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select flip
on long edge or flip on short edge.
2-sided Copy
Page Layout
- Select a page layout option when you make 2-
sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided document.
Contrast
- Adjust the contrast.
Stack/Sort
- Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
2in1/1in1
- If you select 2 in 1 (ID), you can select the layout
options.
Page Layout
- Make N in 1 and 2 in 1 copies.
Auto Deskew
- Set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically.
Save as Shortcut
- - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Scan]
[Scan]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB Other Scan to
Actions
- - Scan documents to a USB
flash drive.
Options
2-sided Scan
-
628
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB
Options
(For automatic 2-
sided scanning
models)
Scan documents to a USB
flash drive.
Colour Setting
-
Resolution
-
File Type
-
Document Size
-
Brightness
-
Contrast
-
File Name
-
File Name Style
-
File Size
-
Auto Deskew
-
Skip Blank Page
-
Skip Blank Page
Sensitivity
-
Remove
Background
Colour
-
Margin Settings
(available only for
certain models)
-
Document
Separation
Document
Separation
Copies
Number of
Pages
B&W TIFF
Compress
-
Set New Default
-
Factory Reset
-
Save as
Shortcut
- -
Start
- -
to My E-mail
- - - Scan a monochrome or a
colour document to your email
address.
to My Folder
- - - Send scanned data to your
folder in the CIFS server on
your local network or on the
Internet.
to PC to File Other Scan to
Actions
- Scan documents and save
them to a folder on your
computer.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
629
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to PC to OCR Other Scan to
Actions
- Convert your scanned
document to an editable text
file.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Image Other Scan to
Actions
- Scan photos or graphics into
your graphics applications.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to E-mail Other Scan to
Actions
- Send a scanned document as
an email attachment.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Mobile App Other Scan to
Actions
- - Scan documents to a mobile
application.
(Select Profile name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to E-mail
Server
Other Scan to
Actions
- - Scan a monochrome or a
colour document to your email
server.
Cancel
- -
Manual
- -
Address Book
(Search)
-
Edit
-
(Select Address
Book)
-
Next Destinations
-
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
Destinations
(Select Address) -
to FTP/SFTP Other Scan to
Actions
- - Send scanned data via FTP/
SFTP.
(Select Profile name)
Options
-
630
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to FTP/SFTP
(Select Profile name)
Save as
Shortcut
Send scanned data via FTP/
SFTP.
-
Start
-
to Network Other Scan to
Actions
- - Send scanned data to a CIFS
server on your local network or
on the Internet.
(Select Profile name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to SharePoint Other Scan to
Actions
- - Send scanned data via a
SharePoint server.
(Select Profile name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to Web
- - - Upload the scanned data to an
Internet service.
WS Scan
(Appears when you
install a Web
Services Scanner,
which is displayed in
your computer's
Network explorer.)
Other Scan to
Actions
- - Scan data using the Web
Service protocol.
Scan
- -
Scan for E-mail
- -
Scan for Fax
- -
Scan for Print
- -
[Shortcuts]
[Shortcuts]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Add Shortcut
Copy
- Select the settings you want.
Fax
- Select the settings you want.
Scan to File
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to
your computer.
to OCR
Convert your scanned document to an
editable text file.
to Image
Scan a colour picture into your graphics
application.
to USB
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
to E-mail
Scan a monochrome or a colour document
into your email application.
to E-mail
Server
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to
the email address you want.
to Network
Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your
local network or on the Internet.
to FTP/SFTP
Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.
to SharePoint
Send scanned data via a SharePoint server.
631
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Add Shortcut
Web
- Connect the Brother machine to an Internet
service.
Web services may have been added and
service names may have been changed by
the provider since this document was
published.
Apps
- Connect the Brother machine to the Brother
Apps service.
These lists appears when each
Shortcut name is pressed for
two seconds.
Rename
- Change the shortcut name.
Edit
- Change the shortcut settings.
Delete
- Delete the shortcut.
Register
Card/NFC
- Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Delete
Card/NFC
- Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
[Secure Print]
[Secure Print]
Level 2
Descriptions
Secure Print
You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
[Web]
[Web]
Level 2
Descriptions
Web
Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
[Apps]
[Apps]
Level 2
Descriptions
Apps
Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
[USB]
[USB]
Level 2
Level 3 Descriptions
USB Scan to USB
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
Direct Print
Print the data directly from a USB flash drive.
632
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Features Tables (DCP-L5510DW)
Features Tables (DCP-L5510DW)
Related Models: DCP-L5510DW
>> Wi-Fi
®
Setup
>> [Toner]
>> [Copy]
>> [Scan]
>> [Shortcuts]
>> [Secure Print]
>> [Web]
>> [Apps]
>> [USB]
>> [2 in 1 ID Copy]
Wi-Fi
®
Setup
(Wi-Fi
®
Setup)
(For wireless network models)
Level 3
Descriptions
Find Wi-Fi Network
Configure your wireless network settings manually.
TCP/IP
1
Change the TCP/IP settings.
WPS/Push Button
Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
WPS/PIN Code
1
Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
WLAN Status
1
Display the wireless network connection status.
MAC Address
1
Display your machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
1
Restore your machine's wireless network settings to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable
1
Turn the wireless interface on or off.
1
Available after a Wi-Fi
®
connection has been configured.
[Toner]
[Toner]
Level 2
Descriptions
Toner Life
View the approximate remaining toner life.
Test Print
Print a test page.
Toner Cartridge Check
View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner
cartridge is genuine.
634
[Copy]
[Copy]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Start
- - Make a monochrome or greyscale copy.
ID
- - Make a copy of your ID card.
Options
Quality
- Select the Copy resolution for your document
type.
Tray Use
- Select the paper tray you want to use.
Enlarge/Reduce 100%
-
Enlarge
Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy.
Reduce
Select a reduction ratio for the next copy.
Auto
Adjusts the copy size to fit on the paper size you
have set.
Custom(25-400%)
Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Density
- Adjust the density.
2-sided Copy Layout
Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select flip
on long edge or flip on short edge.
2-sided Copy
Page Layout
- Select a page layout option when you make 2-
sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided document.
Contrast
- Adjust the contrast.
Stack/Sort
- Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
2in1/1in1
- If you select 2 in 1 (ID), you can select the layout
options.
Page Layout
- Make N in 1 and 2 in 1 copies.
Auto Deskew
- Set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically.
Save as Shortcut
- - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Scan]
[Scan]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB Other Scan to
Actions
- - Scan documents to a USB flash
drive.
Options
2-sided Scan
(For automatic 2-
sided scanning
models)
-
Colour Setting
-
Resolution
-
File Type
-
Document Size
-
Brightness
-
Contrast
-
File Name
-
635
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB
Options
File Name Style
Scan documents to a USB flash
drive.
-
File Size
-
Auto Deskew
-
Skip Blank Page
-
Skip Blank Page
Sensitivity
-
Remove
Background
Colour
-
Margin Settings
(available only for
certain models)
-
Document
Separation
Document
Separation
Copies
Number of
Pages
B&W TIFF
Compress
-
Set New Default
-
Factory Reset
-
Save as
Shortcut
- -
Start
- -
to My E-mail
- - - Scan a monochrome or a
colour document to your email
address.
to My Folder
- - - Send scanned data to your
folder in the CIFS server on
your local network or on the
Internet.
to PC to File Other Scan to
Actions
- Scan documents and save
them to a folder on your
computer.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to OCR Other Scan to
Actions
- Convert your scanned
document to an editable text
file.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Image Other Scan to
Actions
- Scan photos or graphics into
your graphics applications.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
636
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to PC to Image
(Select USB or PC)
Save as
Shortcut
Scan photos or graphics into
your graphics applications.
Start
to E-mail Other Scan to
Actions
- Send a scanned document as
an email attachment.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Mobile App Other Scan to
Actions
- - Scan documents to a mobile
application.
(Select Profile name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to E-mail
Server
Other Scan to
Actions
- - Scan a monochrome or a
colour document to your email
server.
Cancel
- -
Manual
- -
Address Book
(Search)
-
Edit
-
(Select Address
Book)
-
Next Destinations
-
Preview
-
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
Destinations
(Select Address) -
to FTP/SFTP Other Scan to
Actions
- - Send scanned data via FTP/
SFTP.
(Select Profile name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to Network Other Scan to
Actions
- - Send scanned data to a CIFS
server on your local network or
on the Internet.
(Select Profile name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
637
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to SharePoint Other Scan to
Actions
- - Send scanned data via a
SharePoint server.
(Select Profile name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to Web
- - - Upload the scanned data to an
Internet service.
WS Scan
(Appears when you
install a Web
Services Scanner,
which is displayed in
your computer's
Network explorer.)
Other Scan to
Actions
- - Scan data using the Web
Service protocol.
Scan
- -
Scan for E-mail
- -
Scan for Fax
- -
Scan for Print
- -
[Shortcuts]
[Shortcuts]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Add Shortcut Copy
- Select the settings you want.
Scan to File
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to
your computer.
to OCR
Convert your scanned document to an editable
text file.
to Image
Scan a colour picture into your graphics
application.
to USB
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
to E-mail
Scan a monochrome or a colour document into
your email application.
to E-mail
Server
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to
the email address you want.
to Network
Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your
local network or on the Internet.
to FTP/SFTP
Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.
to SharePoint
Send scanned data via a SharePoint server.
Web
- Connect the Brother machine to an Internet
service.
Web services may have been added and
service names may have been changed by the
provider since this document was published.
Apps
- Connect the Brother machine to the Brother
Apps service.
These lists appears when
each Shortcut name is
pressed for two seconds.
Rename
- Change the shortcut name.
Edit
- Change the shortcut settings.
Delete
- Delete the shortcut.
Register
Card/NFC
- Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
638
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
These lists appears when
each Shortcut name is
pressed for two seconds.
Delete
Card/NFC
- Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
[Secure Print]
[Secure Print]
Level 2 Descriptions
Secure Print
You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
[Web]
[Web]
Level 2
Descriptions
Web
Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
[Apps]
[Apps]
Level 2
Descriptions
Apps
Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
[USB]
[USB]
Level 2
Level 3 Descriptions
USB Scan to USB
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
Direct Print
Print the data directly from a USB flash drive.
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
Level 2
Descriptions
2 in 1 ID Copy
Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Related Information
• Settings and Features Tables
639
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS).
• What is Web Based Management?
• Access Web Based Management
• Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
• Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management
640
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > What is Web
Based Management?
What is Web Based Management?
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS).
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
•
Make sure your machine is On and connected to the same network as your computer, and that your
network supports the TCP/IP protocol.
The actual screen may differ from the screen shown above.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
641
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Access Web
Based Management
Access Web Based Management
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
• We recommend using the HTTPS security protocol when configuring settings using Web Based
Management.
• When you use HTTPS for Web Based Management configuration, your browser will display a warning
dialog box. To avoid displaying the warning dialog box, you can install a self-signed certificate to use
SSL/TLS communication. For more information, see Related Information.
• The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from
unauthorised access.
You can also find the default password in the Network Configuration Report.
>> Access Web Based Management from your Web Browser
>> Access Web Based Management from Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
>> Access Web Based Management from Brother Utilities (Windows)
Access Web Based Management from your Web Browser
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
Access Web Based Management from Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan.
• Windows
Launch
(Brother iPrint&Scan).
642
• Mac
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon.
The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears.
2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then select your model
name from the list. Click OK.
3. Click
(Machine Settings).
4. Click All Settings.
The Web Based Management page appears.
5. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
6. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
You can also access Web Based Management from Brother Mobile Connect for mobile devices.
Access Web Based Management from Brother Utilities (Windows)
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Machine Settings.
The Web Based Management page appears.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
If you change the protocol settings, you must restart the machine after clicking Submit to activate the
configuration.
After configuring the settings, click Logout.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• Create a Self-signed Certificate
• Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrator
• Use SSL/TLS
643
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Set or Change a
Login Password for Web Based Management
Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorised
access.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you have previously set your own password, type it, and then click Login.
• If you have not previously set your own password, type the default login password, and then click Login.
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Login Password.
• The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and
marked "Pwd".
• Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. To change the password, type your current password in the Enter Old Password field.
6. Following the on-screen Login Password guidelines, type your new password in the Enter New Password
field.
7. Retype the new password in the Confirm New Password field.
8. Click Submit.
You can also change the lockout settings in the Login Password menu.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
644
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Set Up Your
Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management
Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management
Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
• We recommend using the HTTPS security protocol when configuring settings using Web Based
Management.
• When you use HTTPS for Web Based Management configuration, your browser will display a warning
dialog box.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Address Book.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Add or update the Address Book information as needed.
6. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
645
Home > Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
>> General Specifications
>> Document Size Specification
>> Print Media Specifications
>> Fax Specifications
>> Copy Specification
>> Scanner Specifications
>> Printer Specifications
>> Interface Specifications
>> Direct Print Feature Specifications
>> Supported Protocols and Security Features
>> Computer Requirements Specifications
General Specifications
Printer Type
Laser
Print Method Electrophotographic Laser Printer
Memory Capacity Standard • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW)
512 MB
• (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
2 GB
Machine display • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN)
3.5 in. TFT Colour touchscreen LCD 70.08 x 52.56 mm
1
• (MFC-L6710DW)
5.0 in. TFT Colour touchscreen LCD 108.00 x 64.8 mm
1
• (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
7.0 in. TFT Colour touchscreen LCD 153.84 x 85.63
mm
1
Power Source
220 V to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
Power
Consumption
(Average)
Peak Approximately 1,280 W
Printing
2
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN)
Approximately 670 W at 25°C
• (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910)
Approximately 710 W at 25°C
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
2
Approximately 430 W at 25°C
Copying
2
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN)
Approximately 680 W at 25°C
• (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910)
Approximately 710 W at 25°C
Copying
(Quiet Mode)
2
Approximately 430 W at 25°C
647
Power
Consumption
(Average)
Ready
2
Approximately 31 W at 25°C
Sleep
2
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN)
Approximately 5.9 W
• (MFC-L6710DW)
Approximately 6.0 W
• (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Approximately 6.7 W
Deep Sleep
2
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN)
Approximately 0.6 W
• (MFC-L6710DW)
Approximately 0.8 W
• (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Approximately 0.7 W
Power Off
3 4
Approximately 0.05 W
Dimensions
(Typical outline view)
Unit: mm
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN)
* : 417
** : 448
*** : 461
• (MFC-L6710DW)
* : 495
** : 518
*** : 473
• (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
* : 495
** : 518
*** : 495
Weight (with supplies)
• (MFC-L5710DW)
16.4 kg
• (MFC-L5710DN)
16.6 kg
• (DCP-L5510DW)
16.9 kg
• (MFC-L5715DN)
17.0 kg
• (MFC-L6710DW)
19.3 kg
• (MFC-L6910DN)
20.2 kg
• (MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
20.0 kg
648
Noise Level
Sound Pressure
5
Printing LpAm = 54.0 dB (A)
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
LpAm = 50 dB (A)
Ready LpAm = Up to 35.0 dB (A)
Sound Power
Printing
5
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN)
LWAc = 7.02 B (A)
• (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910)
LWAc = 7.06 B (A)
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
LWAc = 6.54 B (A)
Ready LWAc = Up to 4.9 B (A)
Temperature Operating From 10°C to 32.5°C
Storage From 0°C to 40°C
Humidity Operating 20% to 80% (without condensation)
Storage 35% to 85% (without condensation)
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN)
Up to 50 sheets
• (MFC-L6710DW)
Up to 70 sheets
• (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Up to 80 sheets
For best results we recommend:
• Temperature: 20°C to 30°C
• Humidity: 50% to 70%
• Paper: 80 g/m
2
1
Measured diagonally.
2
Measured when the machine is connected using the same network connection as the ENERGY STAR Ver. 3.1 test method.
3
Measured according to IEC 62301 Edition 2.0.
4
Power consumption varies slightly depending on the usage environment.
5
Measured in accordance with the method described in ISO 7779.
Document Size Specification
Document Size
ADF Width 105 mm to 215.9 mm
ADF Length 147.3 mm to 355.6 mm
Scanner Glass Width Maximum 216 mm
Scanner Glass Length • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
Maximum 300 mm
• (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Maximum 355.6 mm
Print Media Specifications
Paper Input
Paper Tray
(Standard)
Paper Type Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin Paper,
Recycled Paper, Thick Paper
649
Paper Input Paper Tray
(Standard)
Paper Size A4, Letter, B5 (JIS), A5, A5 (Long Edge), A6, Executive,
Legal, Mexico Legal, India Legal, Folio, 16K (195x270 mm),
A4 Short (270mm Paper)
Paper Weight
60 to 163 g/m
2
1
Maximum
Paper
Capacity
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN)
Up to 250 sheets of 80 g/m
2
Plain Paper
• (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910)
Up to 520 sheets of 80 g/m
2
Plain Paper
Multi-Purpose Tray
(MP tray)
Paper Type Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin Paper, Thick
Paper, Thicker Paper, Recycled Paper, Bond, Label,
Envelope, Env.Thin, Env.Thick
Paper Size • Width:
69.8 to 215.9 mm
• Length:
127 to 355.6 mm
• Envelope:
COM-10, DL, C5, Monarch
Paper Weight
60 to 230 g/m
2
1
Maximum
Paper
Capacity
• Up to 100 Sheets of 80 g/m
2
Plain Paper
• Envelope: Up to 11 mm thick
Paper Tray 2, 3
(Optional)
2
Paper Type Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin Paper,
Recycled Paper, Thick Paper
Paper Size A4, Letter, B5 (JIS), A5, Executive, Legal, Mexico Legal,
India Legal, Folio, 16K (195x270 mm), A4 Short (270mm
Paper)
Paper Weight
60 to 120 g/m
2
1
Maximum
Paper
Capacity
• LT-5505
Up to 250 sheets of 80 g/m
2
Plain Paper
• LT-6505
Up to 520 sheets of 80 g/m
2
Plain Paper
Paper
Output
3
Face Down Output Tray • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW)
Up to 150 sheets of 80 g/m
2
Plain Paper (face-down
delivery to the face-down output paper tray)
• (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Up to 250 Sheets of 80 g/m
2
Plain Paper (face down
delivery to the face down output paper tray)
Face Up Output Tray
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW)
One sheet (face up delivery to the face up output tray)
• (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Up to 10 sheets (face up delivery to the face up output
tray)
2-sided
Automatic 2-sided
Printing
Paper Type Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin Paper,
Recycled Paper
Paper Size A4
Paper Weight
60 to 105 g/m
2
650
1
For paper of 105 g/m
2
and above, open the back cover to use the face up output tray.
2
Maximum number of Lower Trays: Up to two Lower Trays in any combination.
3
For labels, we recommend removing the printed sheets from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine to avoid the
possibility of smudging.
Fax Specifications
NOTE
This feature is available for MFC models.
Compatibility
ITU-T Super Group 3
Coding System MH / MR / MMR / JBIG
Modem Speed 33,600 bps (with Automatic Fallback)
2-sided Print Receiving Yes
Automatic 2-sided Sending (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Yes (from the ADF)
Scanning Width Maximum 208 mm
Printing Width Maximum 207.4 mm
Greyscale 8 bit / 256 levels
Resolution Horizontal 203 dpi
Vertical Standard: 98 dpi
Fine: 196 dpi
Super fine: 392 dpi
Photo: 196 dpi
Address Book
1
300 Locations
Groups
1
Up to 20
Broadcasting 350 Locations
Automatic Redial 3 times at 5-minute intervals
Memory Transmission
Up to 500 pages
2
Out of Paper Reception
Up to 500 pages
2
1
Available for DCP and MFC models
2
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T TestChart Document No.1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code).
Copy Specification
Copy Width
Maximum 210 mm
Automatic 2-sided Copy (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Yes (from the ADF)
Sort Copy Yes
Stack Copy Up to 999 pages
Enlarge/Reduce 25 to 400% (in increments of 1%)
Resolution Maximum 1200 x 600 dpi
First Copy Out Time
1
Less than 8.7 seconds at 23°C
1
From Ready Mode and standard tray.
651
Scanner Specifications
Colour / Black Yes / Yes
TWAIN Compliant Yes
(Windows 10 / Windows 11)
WIA Compliant Yes
(Windows 10 / Windows 11)
Colour Depth • 48 bit colour Processing (Input)
• 24 bit colour Processing (Output)
Grey Scale • 16 bit colour Processing (Input)
• 8 bit colour Processing (Output)
Resolution
1
• Up to 19200 x 19200 dpi (interpolated)
• Up to 1200 x 1200 dpi (from Scanner Glass)
• Up to 600 x 600 dpi (from the ADF)
Scanning Width Maximum 210 mm
Automatic 2-sided Scanning (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Yes (from the ADF)
1
Maximum 1200 × 1200 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows 10 and Windows 11 (resolution up to 19200 × 19200 dpi can be
selected by using the scanner utility)
Printer Specifications
Automatic 2-sided Print
Yes
Emulation PCL6, BR-Script3, IBM Proprinter XL, Epson FX-850, PDF version1.7, XPS version
1.0
Resolution Up to 1200 x 1200 dpi
Print Speed
1
1-sided Print
2
3
• (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN)
Up to 50 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 48 pages/minute (A4 size)
• (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Up to 52 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 50 pages/minute (A4 size)
2-sided Print
Up to 24 sides/minute (Up to 12 sheets/minute) (Letter size)
Up to 24 sides/minute (Up to 12 sheets/minute) (A4 size)
First Print Time
4 5
6
Less than 6.7 seconds at 23°C
1
The print speed may be slower when the machine is connected by wireless LAN.
2
The print speeds of "1-sided Print" were measured in accordance with ISO/IEC 24734.
3
This speed is based on 1-sided printing. If your model’s default print setting is "2-sided", change to "1-sided" for these results.
4
Printing from Ready mode and standard tray.
5
Length of time from when the machine is started until paper output is complete (except when the machine is turned on or when an error is
fixed)
6
This applies when printing on A4- or Letter-size paper from the standard tray. It could be longer however, depending on the paper size
and the amount of print data.
Interface Specifications
USB
• Type: USB Type-B receptacle
Version: USB 2.0 High-Speed
1 2
Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no more than 2 metres long.
652
• Type: USB Type-A receptacle (Front)
3
• (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Type: USB Type-A receptacle (Rear)
3
Version: USB 2.0 High-Speed
Connect a USB flash drive for USB Storage Print.
LAN
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
4
Wireless LAN
5
(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n (Infrastructure Mode)
IEEE 802.11a/g/n (Wi-Fi Direct
®
)
NFC
6
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Yes
1
Your machine has a USB 2.0 Hi-Speed interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a USB 1.1 interface.
2
Third party USB hub devices are not supported.
3
USB host port
4
Use a Category 5e (or greater) network cable.
5
(MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is
installed.
6
When you connect an external IC card reader, use a HID class driver supported device.
Direct Print Feature Specifications
Compatibility
PDF version1.7, JPEG, Exif+JPEG, PRN (created by the machine's own printer driver), TIFF
(scanned by Brother models), XPS version 1.0
Interface USB direct interface: Front x1, Rear p661-x1 (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910)
Supported Protocols and Security Features
Supported protocols and security features may differ depending the models.
Ethernet
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
Protocols (IPv4)
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP), WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver, mDNS,
LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, POP3, SMTP Client, IPP/IPPS, FTP Client and
Server, CIFS Client, TELNET Server, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client and server, ICMP,
Web Services (Print/Scan), SNTP Client, LDAP, IMAP4, Syslog
Protocols (IPv6)
NDP, RA, DNS resolver, mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, POP3,
SMTP Client, FTP Client and Server, CIFS Client, TELNET Server, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, HTTP/HTTPS server,
TFTP client and server, ICMPv6, SNTP Client, LDAP, Web Services (Print/Scan), IMAP4, Syslog
Network Security (Wired)
APOP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPP, HTTP, SMTP, FTP, POP3, IMAP4), SNMP v3 802.1x (EAP-MD5, EAP-
FAST, PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos, IPsec
Network Security (Wireless)
APOP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPP, HTTP, SMTP, FTP, POP3, IMAP4), SNMP v3, 802.1x (EAP-FAST, PEAP,
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos, IPsec
Wireless Network Security
WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA3-SAE (AES) (Wi-Fi Direct supports
WPA2-PSK (AES) only)
653
Wireless Certification
Wi-Fi Certification Mark License (WPA3
™
- Enterprise, Personal), Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS) Identifier
Mark License, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
™
Wi-Fi Direct
Computer Requirements Specifications
Supported Operating Systems And Software Functions
For the latest supported OS, go to your model's Supported OS page at support.brother.com/os.
Computer Platform &
Operating System Version
Computer Interface Processor Hard Disk Space to
Install
1
USB
2
10Base-T/
100Base-
TX/
1000Base-
T
(Ethernet)
Wireless
3
802.11a/b/
g/n
For Drivers For
Applicatio
ns
(including
Drivers)
Windows
Operating
System
Windows 10
Home / 10 Pro / 10
Education / 10
Enterprise
4 5
Printing
PC Fax
6
Scanning
32 bit (x86)
or 64 bit
(x64)
processor
80 MB 1.8 GB
Windows 11 Home /
11 Pro / 11
Education / 11
Enterprise
4 5
64 bit (x64)
processor
Windows Server
2012
Printing
Scanning
Printing 64 bit (x64)
processor
80 MB
Windows Server
2012 R2
Windows Server
2016
Windows Server
2019
Windows Server
2022
Mac
Operating
System
7
macOS v11 Printing
PC-Fax (Send)
6 8
Scanning
64 bit
processor
N/A 500 MB
macOS v12
macOS v13
Chrome OS Printing
Scanning
N/A N/A N/A
1
An Internet connection is required to install the software if the installation disc is not supplied.
2
Third party USB ports are not supported.
3
For certain models, the optional Wireless Module is required.
4
For WIA, 1200x1200 resolution. Brother Scanner Utility enables resolutions up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.
5
PaperPort
™
14SE supports Windows 10 and Windows 11.
6
PC-Fax supports black and white only.
7
macOS Disclaimer
AirPrint capable: Printing or scanning via Mac requires using AirPrint. Mac drivers are not provided.
8
AirPrint only.
For the latest driver updates, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com.
All trademarks, brand and product names are the property of their respective companies.
654
Home > Appendix > Supplies
Supplies
When the time comes to replace supplies, such as the toner cartridge or drum unit, an error message will appear
on your machine's control panel or in the Status Monitor. For more information about the supplies for your
machine, visit www.brother.com/original or contact your local Brother dealer.
• The toner cartridge and drum unit are two separate parts.
• Supply product codes vary by country and region.
Supply Supply Product Codes Approximate Life
(Page Yield)
Applicable Models
Toner Cartridge Standard Toner:
TN3600 (For all other
countries except Israel)
TN3601 (For Israel)
Approximately 3,000 pages
1 2
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
High Yield Toner:
TN3600XL (For all other
countries except Israel)
TN3601XL (For Israel)
Approximately 6,000 pages
1 2
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Super High Yield Toner:
TN3600XXL (For all other
countries except Israel)
TN3601XXL (For Israel)
Approximately 11,000
pages
1 2
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Ultra High Yield Toner:
TN3610 (For all other
countries except Israel)
TN3611 (For Israel)
Approximately 18,000
pages
1 2
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Maximum Yield Toner:
TN3610XL (For all other
countries except Israel)
TN3611XL (For Israel)
Approximately 25,000
pages
1 2
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/
MFC-EX910
Inbox Toner:
(Supplied with your
machine)
Approximately 3,000 pages
1 2
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW
Approximately 6,000 pages
1 2
MFC-L6710DW
Approximately 11,000
pages
1 2
MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6910DN
Approximately 25,000
pages
1 2
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
Drum Unit DR3600 (For all other
countries except Israel)
DR3601 (For Israel)
Approximately 75,000
pages
3
DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/
MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/
MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1
A4 or Letter size single-sided pages
656
2
The approximate cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
3
Approximately 75,000 pages based on three pages per job and 45,000 pages based on one page per job (A4/Letter single-sided pages).
The number of pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size.
Related Information
• Appendix
657
Home > Appendix > Environmental and Compliance Information > Information Regarding Recycled Paper
Information Regarding Recycled Paper
• Recycled paper is of the same quality as paper made from original forest sources. Standards governing
modern recycled paper ensure that it meets the highest quality requirements for different printing processes.
The imaging equipment supplied by Brother is suitable for using with recycled paper meeting the EN
12281:2002 standard.
• Purchasing recycled paper saves natural resources and promotes the circular economy. Paper is made using
cellulose fibres from wood. Collecting and recycling paper extends the life of fibres over multiple life cycles,
making the best use of the resources.
• The recycled paper production process is shorter. The fibres have already been processed, so less water and
energy, and fewer chemicals are used.
• Paper recycling has the benefit of saving carbon by diverting paper products from alternative disposal routes
such as landfill and incineration. Landfill waste emits methane gas, which has a powerful greenhouse effect.
Related Information
• Environmental and Compliance Information
659
Home > Appendix > Environmental and Compliance Information > Availability of Service Parts
Availability of Service Parts
Brother warrants that service parts will be available for at least seven years after the last date we place models
on the market.
To obtain service parts, contact your Brother supplier or dealer.
Related Information
• Environmental and Compliance Information
660
Home > Appendix > Environmental and Compliance Information > Chemical Substances (EU REACH)
Chemical Substances (EU REACH)
Information concerning chemical substances within our products required for the REACH Regulation can be
found at https://www.brother.eu/reach.
Related Information
• Environmental and Compliance Information
661
Home > Appendix > Accessories
Accessories
Availability of accessories may vary depending on your country or region. For more information about the
accessories for your machine, visit www.brother.com/original or contact your Brother dealer or Brother customer
service.
Product Codes Items Applicable Models
LT-5505 Lower Tray (250 sheets) DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1
LT-6505 Lower Tray (520 sheets) DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1
TT-4000
Tower Tray
2
MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
CH-1000 Card Reader Holder DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/
MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/
MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
NC-9110W
(Available only for
certain countries)
Wireless Module MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910
1
Maximum number of Lower Trays: Up to two Lower Trays in any combination.
2
Available only when the Lower Tray Unit is not installed to the machine.
Related Information
• Appendix
662
Home > Appendix > Brother Help and Customer Support
Brother Help and Customer Support
If you need help with using your Brother product, visit support.brother.com for FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
You can also download the latest software, drivers and firmware, to improve the performance of your machine,
and user documentation, to learn how to get the most from your Brother product.
Further product and support information is available from your local Brother office website. Visit www.brother.com
to find the contact details for your local Brother office and to register your new product.
Related Information
• Appendix
663
UK
Version 0
Produkt Specifikationer
| Mærke: | Brother |
| Kategori: | Faxmaskine |
| Model: | MFC-L6910DN |
| Vekselstrømsindgangsspænding: | 220 - 240 V |
| Vekselstrømsindgangsfrekvens: | 50/60 Hz |
| Bredde: | 495 mm |
| Dybde: | 495 mm |
| Højde: | 518 mm |
| Vægt: | 18100 g |
| Brugervejledning: | Ja |
| Produktfarve: | Hvid |
| Kontroltype: | Berøring |
| Indbygget skærm: | Ja |
| Pakkevægt: | 24200 g |
| Pakkedybde: | 580 mm |
| Pakkebredde: | 588 mm |
| Pakkehøjde: | 628 mm |
| Wi-Fi: | Ja |
| USB-port: | Ja |
| Ethernet LAN: | Ja |
| Wi-Fi-standarder: | 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, Wi-Fi 4 (802.11n), Wi-Fi 5 (802.11ac) |
| Udskrivningsteknologi: | Laser |
| Maksimal opløsning: | 1200 x 1200 dpi |
| Udskrivningshastighed (sort, normal kvalitet, A4/amerikansk papirformat): | 50 sider pr. minut |
| Udskrivning: | Monoprint |
| Medietyper til papirbakke: | Bond paper, Envelopes, Labels, Letterhead, Plain paper, Recycled paper, Thick paper, Thicker paper, Thin paper |
| Maksimal ISO A-serie papirstørrelse: | A4 |
| ISO A-serie, størrelser (A0...A9): | A4, A5, A6 |
| Ikke-ISO udskriftsmedier størrelse: | Folio (media size), Legal (media size), Letter (media size) |
| Kuverter størrelser: | C5, Com-10, DL, Monarch |
| Medievægt på papirbakke: | 60 - 230 g/m² |
| Samlet antal inputbakker: | 1 |
| Samlet inputkapacitet: | 520 ark |
| Samlet outputkapacitet: | 250 ark |
| Scanner type: | ADF-scanner |
| Optisk scanningsopløsning: | 1200 x 1200 dpi |
| Scanning: | Mono scanning |
| Kopiering: | Monokopiering |
| Maksimal kopiopløsning: | 1200 x 600 dpi |
| Sikkerhedsalgoritmer: | 64-bit WEP, 128-bit WEP, APOP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, HTTPS, IPPS, PEAP, SMTP-AUTH, SNMPv3, SSL/TLS, WPA-AES, WPA-PSK, WPA-TKIP, WPA2-AES, WPA2-PSK |
| Markedspositionering: | Forretning |
| Direkte udskrivning: | Ja |
| Strømforbrug (slukket): | 0.7 W |
| Strømforbrug (kopiering): | 710 W |
| Maksimal driftscyklus: | 16000 sider pr. måned |
| Udskrivning af farver: | Sort |
| Fax: | Monofaxing |
| Intern hukommelse: | 2000 MB |
| Kabler inkluderet: | Vekselstrøm |
| Near Field Communication (NFC): | Ja |
| Modemhastighed: | 33.6 Kbit/s |
| Kabelteknologi: | 10/100/1000Base-T(X) |
| Duplex udskrivning: | Ja |
| Duplex udskrivningstilstand: | Automatisk |
| Brugerdefineret mediebredde: | 105 - 215.9 mm |
| Brugerdefineret medielængde: | 147.3 - 355.6 mm |
| Duplex-funktioner: | Copy, Fax, Print, Scan |
| Antal printpatroner: | 1 |
| Strømforbrug (udskrivning): | 430 W |
| Farve: | Ingen |
| Farveskærm: | Ja |
| Tid til første side (sort, normal): | 6.7 sek./side |
| Duplekskopiering: | Ja |
| Duplex scanning: | Ja |
| Dupleksfax: | Ja |
| Sidebeskrivelsessprog: | BR-Script 3, PCL 6 |
| Strømforbrug (dvale): | 31 W |
| Sikker udskrivning: | Ja |
| Universal-magasin kapacitet: | 100 ark |
| Multifunktionsbakke: | Ja |
| Energy Star-typisk elektricitetsforbrug (TEC): | 0.63 kWh/uge |
| Patron(er) inkluderet: | Ja |
| Scan til: | E-mail, E-mail Server, FTP, OCR, USB |
| Automatisk dokumentføder (ADF) indgangskapacitet: | 80 ark |
| JIS B-seriens størrelser (B0…B9): | B5 |
| Automatisk dokumentføder (ADF): | Ja |
| Maksimal kopieringsstørrelse: | A4 |
Har du brug for hjælp?
Hvis du har brug for hjælp til Brother MFC-L6910DN stil et spørgsmål nedenfor, og andre brugere vil svare dig
Faxmaskine Brother Manualer
1 August 2025
1 August 2025
1 August 2025
1 August 2025
1 August 2025
1 August 2025
1 August 2025
31 Juli 2025
31 Juli 2025
31 Juli 2025
Faxmaskine Manualer
- Ricoh
- Toshiba
- Canon
- CIMSUN
- Kyocera
- Xerox
- Sagemcom
- Philips
- Panasonic
- Acer
- Sharp
- Welltech
- KPN
- Samsung
- Konica-Minolta
Nyeste Faxmaskine Manualer
15 August 2025
8 August 2025
8 August 2025
8 August 2025
8 August 2025
25 Juli 2025
22 Juli 2025
18 Juli 2025
22 December 2024
13 September 2024